549300HN14450OU4IL772021-01-312022-01-29549300HN14450OU4IL772021-01-312022-01-29tedbaker:UnderlyingMemberiso4217:GBP549300HN14450OU4IL772021-01-312022-01-29tedbaker:NonUnderlyingItemsMember549300HN14450OU4IL772020-01-262021-01-30tedbaker:UnderlyingMember549300HN14450OU4IL772020-01-262021-01-30tedbaker:NonUnderlyingItemsMember549300HN14450OU4IL772020-01-262021-01-30iso4217:GBPxbrli:shares549300HN14450OU4IL772021-01-30ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember549300HN14450OU4IL772021-01-30ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember549300HN14450OU4IL772021-01-30ifrs-full:OtherReservesMember549300HN14450OU4IL772021-01-30ifrs-full:ReserveOfExchangeDifferencesOnTranslationMember549300HN14450OU4IL772021-01-30ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember549300HN14450OU4IL772021-01-30ifrs-full:EquityAttributableToOwnersOfParentMember549300HN14450OU4IL772021-01-312022-01-29ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember549300HN14450OU4IL772021-01-312022-01-29ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember549300HN14450OU4IL772021-01-312022-01-29ifrs-full:OtherReservesMember549300HN14450OU4IL772021-01-312022-01-29ifrs-full:ReserveOfExchangeDifferencesOnTranslationMember549300HN14450OU4IL772021-01-312022-01-29ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember549300HN14450OU4IL772021-01-312022-01-29ifrs-full:EquityAttributableToOwnersOfParentMember549300HN14450OU4IL772022-01-29ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember549300HN14450OU4IL772022-01-29ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember549300HN14450OU4IL772022-01-29ifrs-full:OtherReservesMember549300HN14450OU4IL772022-01-29ifrs-full:ReserveOfExchangeDifferencesOnTranslationMember549300HN14450OU4IL772022-01-29ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember549300HN14450OU4IL772022-01-29ifrs-full:EquityAttributableToOwnersOfParentMember549300HN14450OU4IL772020-01-25ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember549300HN14450OU4IL772020-01-25ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember549300HN14450OU4IL772020-01-25ifrs-full:OtherReservesMember549300HN14450OU4IL772020-01-25ifrs-full:ReserveOfExchangeDifferencesOnTranslationMember549300HN14450OU4IL772020-01-25ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember549300HN14450OU4IL772020-01-25ifrs-full:EquityAttributableToOwnersOfParentMember549300HN14450OU4IL772020-01-262021-01-30ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember549300HN14450OU4IL772020-01-262021-01-30ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember549300HN14450OU4IL772020-01-262021-01-30ifrs-full:OtherReservesMember549300HN14450OU4IL772020-01-262021-01-30ifrs-full:ReserveOfExchangeDifferencesOnTranslationMember549300HN14450OU4IL772020-01-262021-01-30ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember549300HN14450OU4IL772020-01-262021-01-30ifrs-full:EquityAttributableToOwnersOfParentMember549300HN14450OU4IL772022-01-29549300HN14450OU4IL772021-01-30549300HN14450OU4IL772020-01-25
ATTENTION TO DETAIL
ANNUAL REPORT FY22
No one expected the year to be as out of the ordinary as
theprevious year – but the pandemic kept some surprises
upits sleeve. Despite all the challenges, however, we came
through the year with good progress on our transformation
plan. With our foundations fixed in black and white, we
began to fill in the details, bringing colour and life to the
Ted Baker journey. To complete the picture, read on.
This year, our year end was 29th January 2022.
TTBB
||
AAR—’R—’2222
1TB | AR—’22
CONTENTS
STRATEGIC REPORT
TED BAKER TODAY
02 Chief Executive’s review
and introduction to Ted Baker
10 From our Interim Chair Helena Feltham
TAKING TED BAKER INTO THE FUTURE
14 Our business model
16 Our strategy
17 — Brand and customers
19 — Product
21 — Digital & capital-light growth
23 — Priority markets
REVIEW OF THE YEAR
26 Chief Financial Officer’s introduction
28 Key performance indicators
30 Business and financial review
38 Fashioning a better future
40 — People
47 — Communities and charity partnerships
48 — Our ethical sourcing programme
52 — Our planet
60 Risk report
67 Going concern and viability disclosure
GOVERNANCE REPORT
72 Board of Directors
74 Executive Team
76 Interim Chair’s introduction to governance
78 The Board’s year
81 Stakeholder engagement s172 compliance
84 Audit & Risk Committee Report
88 Nominations Committee Report
92 Compliance with the Code
96 Remuneration Committee Report
99 Directors’ Remuneration Policy in summary
101 Annual report on remuneration
111 Directors’ Report
114 Statement of Directors’ responsibilities
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
116 Independent auditor’s report
124 Income statement
125 Statement of comprehensive income
126 Statement of changes in equity
128 Balance sheet
129 Cash flow statement
130 Notes to the financial statements
167 Five-year summary
170 Approach to Task Force on Climate-related
FinancialDisclosures
171 Company information
2 TB | AR—’22
CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S REVIEW
Looking back to the situation we found ourselves in at the start
of the pandemic, we have come a very long way. Through two
years of pandemic uncertainty, we have made good progress
thanks to the actions we have taken to focus on our brand,
ourcustomers and our financial discipline. Our team has
continued to pull together through another incredibly hard
year of disruption and has achieved great things.
Seeing the brighter picture
Rachel Osborne
Chief Executive Officer
SR GR FS
3TB | AR—’22
As always, I am grateful for the ongoing support
of our stakeholders, which has been invaluable
in helping us continue to make progress with
thetransformation of Ted Baker. Despite all the
obstacles we have met through the year, the
business has been on a positive trajectory.
Therewere early signs of customer confidence
returning, with footfall building after lockdowns
ended and other social restrictions were lifted.
There was positive news as we ended the
yearin a net cash positive position and with
significantly reduced losses over the second
halfof the year. But we were left with a feeling
offrustration and optimism – with encouraging
signs in trading in the six weeks from the start of
November, the impact of the Omicron variant
and the accompanying social restrictions had
anegative effect over a critical sales period.
What was set to be a modest return to profit
forthe half year was delayed.
With the lifting of restrictions starting at the end
ofJanuary 2022, we continue to be optimistic
about what we can achieve with Ted Baker
asthe world opens up. As the situation evolves,
people are returning to the workplace, and
weddings and social gatherings are possible
again. As this happens, our customer insight
adds to our confidence that people will seek
outTed Baker’s unique mix of occasionwear
andformalwear, along with our new products,
supporting our return to growth and profit.
A QUICK SKETCH OF THIS YEAR’S
NUMBERS
We continued to deliver against the objectives
inour strategic plan on costs and cash, but
witha renewed focus on driving growth as
theimpactof the pandemic subsided at points
through the year. As a result, and despite the
impact of Omicron over our key sales weeks,
weended the year with a more efficient business
and astrong balance sheet.
We delivered £428.2m revenue for the full year,
up 23.2% in constant currency. Our gross margin
improved by 105 bps to 55.2% and we tightly
controlled our cost base, with our operating
costto sales ratio improving by 700 bps.
As a result, our loss for the year reduced
significantly and we ended the year with
£3 million net cash with an available facility
of£80 million.
“ Our team has continued to pull
together through another incredibly
hard year of disruption and has
achieved great things.”
Rachel Osborne
Chief Executive Officer
52%
Growth in total
newcustomers
CUSTOMERS – DRAWN FROM LIFE
Like any lifestyle brand, our customers
areat theheart of everything we do.
Understanding them is the key to building
our business and over the year we have
worked hard to attract more target
customers, while encouraging them
tobuymore often.
To do this, we invested in a new research
programme that has deepened our
understanding of different customer
segments, their lifestyles, tastes, attitudes
and interests. The ongoing programme
continues to deepen our knowledge,
sowecan be more effective in appealing
to them as we design targeted new products
and ranges.
The depth of this work and the insights are
making a real difference across the whole
process, from product creation to marketing
reach and effectiveness.
4 TB | AR—’22
Sales +20.5%
£428.2m
2021: £355.3m
Underlying loss before tax
£(38.4)m
2 0 21: £(59.2)m
Loss before tax +59.1%
£(44.1)m
2 0 21: £(107.7)m
Underlying gross profit
margin +105bps
55.2%
2021: 54.1%
UK & Europe 69.4%
North America 29.6%
Rest of the World 1.0%
Sales by region
Net cash at year end
£3.1m
2021: £66.7m
Ted Baker in broad brushstrokes
SR GR FS
5TB | AR—’22
Concessions
13 0
2021: 165
Digital mix of retail sales
44.3%
2021: 57.5%
Change in digital sales
(9.7)%
2021: 24.8%
Digital sales
£133.8m
2021: £148.2m
Total brand sales
£ 918 m
2021: £745m
Outlets
31
2021: 33
Retail 70.5%
Wholesale 26.0%
Licensing 3.5%
Sales by channel
Female 1,586 (71.3%)
Male 630 (28.3%)
Unspecified and gender diverse 8 (0.4%)
Total 2,224
Gender breakdown
Team members
2,224
2 0 21: 2,158
Own stores
85
2021: 83
6 TB | AR—’22
CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S REVIEW
“ Product licensing is a real strength and
opportunity for Ted Baker, not least for
the income it generates, but also for its
influence on our brand standing with
customers across the world.”
The retail sales picture
Retail sales were disrupted by the lockdowns
andrestrictions over the year, but sales increased
by 17.2% with digital sales delivering 44.3%
(2021: 57.5%). Overall, digital sales demand
stayed above historical levels, up 12.7% on
atwo year basis, but sales fell below the higher
levels we saw during the first lockdown as we
reviewed our promotional approach in line
withstock and liquidity levels. Our digital sales
performance has been strong in the concession
environment, with partners like John Lewis and
Next performing well.
The pick-up in occasionwear in the latter half
ofthe year in both our men’s and women’s
collections, along with formalwear and suits,
wasan encouraging sign that people are ready
to get back to some normality. From a product
point of view, we saw good performance
acrosswomenswear, accessories and footwear.
However, our menswear did not perform as well
as expected.
These positive customer signals allowed us to
move back to our full-price stance and reduce
discounting, with very encouraging progress –
full price sales delivered 810 bps over the year.
This, combined with our ongoing cost disciplines,
contributed to an improved performance.
Where consumer confidence was recovering
inthe first half of the year, we saw significantly
improved sales across our North American
concessions and North American and UK
shopping malls. This was also reflected in the
return of footfall in the first part of Q4, mentioned
above; although this didn’t hit pre-pandemic
levels, we did see an uplift, with many more
customers coming out and shopping. We saw
strong results for the six weeks of trading from the
start of November. The introduction of Omicron
warnings and restrictions in early to mid-
December saw footfall drop away – first in
Europe and then in the UK and US. With the
mood changing with the lifting of restrictions in
the UK in late January, and with more optimism
about the shift in mindset, we hope to see
asimilar return to recovery of footfall.
Shining a light on product licensing
Product licensing is a real strength for Ted Baker,
not only for the income it generates, but also
forits influence on our brand standing with
customers across the world.
Product licensing allows us to expand the
Ted Baker brand across a broader range of
clothing, accessories and homewares. We do
this by working with carefully selected partners
who bring unique supply chain experience
and/or retail distribution.
Our product licensing business punches well
above its weight with customers compared
tohow it shows up in our revenue. Including
royalties from territory licenses, it accounted
for3.5% of revenue in the year but represented
31.0% of brand sales (retail sales to
endcustomer).
SR GR FS
7TB | AR—’22
Our product licence partners work under our
brand guidelines and creative direction.
Ourpartnerships sit within three defined areas:
Specialist clothing categories: including
childrenswear, suiting, lingerie and nightwear,
men’s underwear, fragrance and skincare
Lifestyle accessories: including eyewear,
watches, luggage, jewellery and personal
technology accessories
Home: including bedding, towels, wallpaper
and rugs
Beauty: including fragrance and toiletries.
Income from licences increased by 21.7% to
£15.2 million (2021: £12.4 million), with strong
growth in eyewear in North America and the
UK, as well as another good performance from
childrenswear and lingerie in partnership with
Next. Formalwear sales remained subdued,
particularly in the first half of the year, as people
continued working from home and with the
reduction in the number of weddings and other
formal occasions taking place.
OUR STRATEGY – FROM
MONOCHROME TO TECHNICOLOUR
We have done much of the heavy lifting needed
to move the business forward. We have fixed
thefoundations and brought costs under control
throughout the business. During the year, we
refreshed our strategy to focus on our key areas
for growth.
The strategy continues the focus on our core
priorities. We have made solid progress on all
thepillars in the context of external challenges
including the ongoing pandemic, customer
spending and behaviours, while managing
availability of product and maintaining
aresilientsupply chain.
As we move into our new financial year, our
focusis on core value creation in three key
areas: brand, product and customer. To help us
do this,we brought in our new Chief Customer,
Marketing and Digital Officer, Jason Beckley,
inJanuary 2022.
Brand – creating a consistent and
differentiated image
The strength of the Ted Baker brand is at the
heart of our success. Built over 30 years,
Ted Baker is renowned for offering excellent
design, quality and value. Put simply, customers
love the brand, and this shows up consistently
across all our distribution channels, whether
physical or digital.
The brand remains in robust health, with strong
scores in our core brand metrics – in unprompted
and prompted awareness, affinity, perception
and quality, adding up to a healthy net promoter
score (NPS) despite the pandemic slowing
theopportunities for customers to see and try
product in store. We will continue to work
onourdistinctive brand expression to create
consistency across all channels.
Product – reframing our ranges
We will continue to use what we’ve learnt about
our customers to evolve our range of products
and make them more and more relevant to
people and their lives. The last two years saw
thearrival of lots of new design talent across
thebusiness – in men’s and women’s clothing,
footwear and accessories, and the team has
come together well under our Creative Director
Anthony Cuthbertson. They have been designing
against the new product pyramid we introduced
last year and customers have responded well,
with encouraging sales in womenswear.
Inmenswear, some of the new footwear
andaccessories in our core collection have
performed well. Lessons from our A/W 21
collection are being applied to future collections.
Changes in people’s buying habits are
aconstant challenge to brands in our sector.
Weare not immune to this and during the
pandemic, we have had to find a balance
between following trends and retaining the
essence of what makes Ted Baker clothing
andaccessories so loved by our customers.
Thelessons we have learned from the team’s
firstcollections, along with our deeper
understanding of our customers’ lifestyles and
motivations, are now being applied to fine
tunethe new collections in development.
Adding depth with capital-light investment
Over the last year, we have used short-term
leases to take advantage of changing footfall
patterns and test the viability of stores in new
locations such as Bromley, Leicester and Exeter.
Bringing physical and digital together is the art
ofa strong omnichannel and customer-centric
brand approach. We’re using this strategy to
grow Ted Baker in new and traditional markets.
At the end of the financial year, we signed an
agreement with Robert Goddard, a well-
established franchise partner in the UK. The
agreement will see them create new standalone
Ted Baker stores in a wholesale franchise
relationship that will increase the reach of our
brand while requiring minimal investment from us.
BRAND TRACKER SURVEY
Prompted
awareness Consideration NPS
UK 95% 54% 43%
USA 63% 33% 59%
GERMANY 48% 21% 36%
Source: Truth Consulting
8 TB | AR—’22
CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S REVIEW
Digital: from blueprint to full colour
We launched our new digital platform in March
2022, moving to a modern ‘fit for the future’
architecture that is the foundation for further
development of our integrated digital retail
proposition. The new global digital platform will
enhance the customer experience which should
ultimately lead to increased conversion, digital
marketing efficiency and higher digital sales.
Building the bigger picture on a global scale
As the world moves out of pandemic mindset and
we bring our learnings from our customer insight
project to bear, there are plenty of opportunities
for growth, but we need to make sure we do not
spread ourselves too thinly. We have refined our
fifth strategy pillar to focus on our biggest and
most important markets in the coming year. So we
will continue to re-establish and build Ted Baker’s
position in the UK, while also focusing on the US,
China, Germany and the Middle East.
You can see more details on our refreshed
strategy and five pillars, and find out more about
our thinking on pages 16-24.
ADDING COLOUR TO OUR
ESGAPPROACH
I’m very excited by the progress our team has
made on Ted Baker’s environmental, social
andgovernance (ESG) initiative, ‘Fashioning
aBetterFuture’.
The scope of work is broad – from improving
supply chain transparency to ensuring fair,
ethical and sustainable practices are in place
tocreating ranges with more sustainable cotton,
leather and wool. We relaunched our
eCommerce packaging and retail bags –
andthese are now FSC-certified and 100%
recyclable. We are aiming to have 100%
sustainable customer packaging by 2025,
withall paper-based packaging being made
from recycled materials.
It is vital that we share all this progress on
sustainability with our customers, so in November
we introduced sustainability swing tickets on our
products in stores. These show where products
are made and what they are made from. We
also added a QR code to our packaging and
swing tickets to give customers clear details of
the materials that go into each product.
Last year, we said we would set ambitious
carbon targets to achieve net zero by 2030,
and this year we submitted our carbon reduction
targets for accreditation by the SBTi (Science
Based Targets initiative). We also brought
together a Ted Baker carbon steering group
who are looking at how we will hit our 2030
targets. And we continue to work collaboratively
with other brands in the BRC Climate Action and
Textiles 2030 working groups.
You can read more about our ongoing
sustainability work on pages 52-59.
100%
Recyclable
eCommerce
packaging
SR GR FS
9TB | AR—’22
FROM UGLY TO GORGEOUS
Despite the challenges of the last year and the
potential challenges ahead, we go into this
financial year with our sense of optimism about
the future of Ted Baker stronger than ever.
We are looking forward to moving to our new
London HQ later in the year. Leaving behind the
Ugly Brown Building in St Pancras (which has
been our home for the last 22 years), we will
bring everyone together in the Gorgeous Brown
Building in Fitzrovia, London. Across the Atlantic,
our new North American head office in New
York, Flat 54, Manhattan, has brought together
the whole US team in one place for the first time.
Both spaces represent the spirit of moving
forward together in fresh environments inspired
by our refreshed brand. They will allow us to
continue to build a culture that the Ted Baker
brand, and our people, richly deserve.
The hard work and dedication of our team at
every level has helped us make great strides
forward this year. I would like to thank everyone
for their efforts and positive attitude, and I look
forward to working with them in the coming year.
Rachel Osborne
Chief Executive Officer
nil
60%
Terminal stock
going to landfill
(UK)
Cotton from
sustainable
sources
10 TB | AR—’22
INTERIM CHAIR’S STATEMENT
Following the sudden passing of our Chair, John Barton,
in early December 2021, Senior Independent Director
Helena Feltham became Interim Chair on 4 December 2021.
Our Interim Chair,
HelenaFeltham
The last year has been another hugely
challenging one for Ted Baker and the world at
large. The continuing disruption of Covid made it
difficult for us to plan with the certainty we would
have liked, particularly trying to move forward
after the lockdowns of 2020. With the world still
in lockdown at the start of 2021, everyone was
once again forced to draw on all their reserves
of ingenuity and resilience to keep the wheels
turning. We were all shocked by the events
unfolding in Ukraine and I am proud to report
our team has stepped up, with many people
volunteering to help in any way they can.
Ted Baker also sent an initial financial donation,
along with shipments of clothes and essential
sanitary products.
The whole Ted Baker team, at all levels, worked
hard on many fronts. Their efforts can be seen in
the progress of our strategy, which is now deeply
embedded in the business, setting Ted Baker up
for growth as we move into the new year.
Over the year, the Executive Team did a great job
of keeping the entire team feeling as joined up as
possible while stores were closed and people
continued to work from home. Retaining a sense
of belonging has been hard, and credit is due to
Rachel and the whole team for putting a huge
effort into keeping everyone connected. I’d also
like to thank former CFO David Wolffe for his
support and input to the business over the last two
years and we wish him well in his nextventure.
There have been many difficulties to contend
with over the last year. These are not only due
tothe pandemic and the increasingly
unpredictable world we live in, but also from
unexpected setbacks no one could see coming.
“ Looking back at the end of the
second year of our plan, it is
inspiring to see the advances
the business has made.”
Helena Feltham
Interim Chair
SR GR FS
11TB | AR—’22
For us, it was the sudden loss of our Chair, John
Barton, who led the Board with great skill from
July 2020 until his untimely death in December
2021. John combined a generosity of spirit with
great insight, humility and humour, and his
approach set the tone for the whole Board –
Non-Executives and Executives alike. He has
left us with a commanding legacy of getting on
with what needs doing for all our stakeholders
as we transition into the next stage of
Ted Baker’s journey.
Looking back at the end of the second year of
our plan, it is heartening to see the advances the
business has made. The ongoing tight control of
costs and the net cash positive position we have
achieved is testament to the Executive Team’s
approach. The hard work that went into fixing
the foundations in the previous two years and
consistently maintaining cost disciplines has
made a real difference to the underlying results
this year. We could not have achieved any of
this without the continued belief and support of
our shareholders and lenders.
The first half results were very encouraging and
with the relaxing of social restrictions and no
new lockdowns on the horizon, there was
everything to play for in the second half. In the
first five or six weeks of Q4, with increasing
footfall and improved full price sales, we were
planning to achieve a small but significant profit,
which would have marked a real turning point
for Ted Baker. Frustratingly this was not to be; the
arrival of the Omicron variant and the knock-on
effect of further social restrictions stopped the
world in its tracks again. Despite this, the signs
ofa return to more normal times are evident and
Iam certain we will see a return of customers as
we go back to working in the office, planning
celebrations and organising other social
gatherings as the year unfolds. Given the level
ofmacro-economic uncertainty, and the loss
before tax for the year, the Board has
determined that no dividend will be paid
inrespect of the financial year.
We are all inspired by the work the team
hasdone on our environmental, social and
governance (ESG) initiative, ‘Fashioning a Better
Future’. They have made excellent progress
towards meeting our sustainability targets and
setting ambitious carbon targets to achieve net
zero by 2030.
I would like to thank my Board colleagues for
their insights and efforts over the year. Together,
we have consistently challenged the Executive
Team in a constructive and supportive way. This
has been particularly important, for example, in
guiding development of the digital sales platform
project, which we were delighted to see launch
early in the new financial year.
Ted Baker is committed to having a diverse and
inclusive Board, so we were very pleased to
welcome two new Non-Executive Directors to
improve the balance. Fumbi Chima brings her
experience and expertise in digital transformation
working with fast-growing brandsincluding
adidas, Burberry and American Express.
MegLustman has a wealth of experience
advising CEOs, and from her 35 years in retail,
leading the transformation and growth of some
ofthe UK high street’s best known brands – most
recently as CEO ofHobbs.
Andrew Jennings had intended to retire at the
end of 2021 but has kindly agreed to stay on
asa NED and Chair of the Remuneration
Committee until the AGM in July. His ongoing
support and retail expertise is much appreciated
by all of us on the Board.
While we had made good progress on the
search for a new Chair, on 18 March 2022
Sycamore Partners Management LP announced
that it was considering a possible offer for the
Company and we consequently announced on
4 April 2022 that we had commenced a formal
sale process. The Board considered that
continuity and experience was key to the
Company successfully negotiating this period,
and we accordingly paused the search for
anew Chair pending the outcome of the formal
sale process.
As we move forward, the focus of the Board will
be to continue to achieve the balance between
the support and constructive challenge that is so
valuable to the Executive Team. We continue to
be encouraged by the progress the brand and
business have made, and we are optimistic that
the refreshed strategy will take Ted Baker from
strength to strength in the years to come.
Helena Feltham
Interim Chair
FORMAL SALE PROCESS
On 18 March 2022 Sycamore Partners Management LP announced that it was considering
apossible offer for the Company. While we received offers from Sycamore and other
unsolicited third-party bid interest in relation to the Company, the Board did not consider that
the offers received reflected appropriate value for the Company’s stakeholders. In view of the
interest expressed by potential offerors, and having consulted its major shareholders, the Board
decided to conduct an orderly process to establish whether there is a bidder prepared to offer
a value that the Board considers attractive relative to the standalone prospects of Ted Baker
asa listed company. Accordingly, on 4 April 2022 we announced that we would be
conducting a formal sale process. On 23 May 2022, we announced we were proceeding
with a preferred bidder.
12 JB | 1944–2021
We will miss John’s
wisdom, support and
guidance, as well as
thetwinkle in his eye.
John joined the Ted Baker Board as its Chair in July
2020. He brought with him a wealth of experience,
having held senior non-executive positions in leading
consumer-facing companies, including stints as
ChairofeasyJet, Next and Cable & Wireless.
He was a real find for Ted Baker and his broad
experience, insight and dry sense of humour made
ahuge difference to the business in his time with us.
Itisno exaggeration to say that everyone who met
himloved him; we all feel very fortunate to have had
theopportunity to work with him and learn from him.
John relished the challenges Ted Baker faced and
nothing could put him off his stride. His calm approach
was rooted in deep integrity and humility, which set
thetone for the Board and his interactions with
everyonehe met at every level of the business.
Hugelyencouraging and supportive of the Executive
Team, he was generous with both his time and
knowledge, building close relationships with CEO
Rachel Osborne and the Executive Team as they
navigated the trials of implementing a turnaround
planduring a global pandemic.
We will miss John’s wisdom, support and guidance,
aswell as the twinkle in his eye. Our deepest
sympathiesgo to his wife, Anne, and their family.
A tribute to John Barton 1944 – 2021
Ted Baker Chair, July 2020 – December 2021
SR GR FS
13TB | AR—’22
TTAAKING KING TTED BAED BAKKER ER
ININTTO TO THHE FUTE FUTUURERE
14 Our business model
16 Our strategy
17 — Brand and customers
19 — Product
21 — Digital & capital-light growth
23 — Priority markets
14 TB | AR—’22
OUR BUSINESS MODEL
Over the past 34 years, no other brand has consistently
delivered humour, wit and the unexpected like Ted Baker.
Growing from a single specialist shirt store in Glasgow
tothe global lito the global lifestyle brand we are today, consistency
has been the key. As we move forward, we will continue
to finesse our brand expression to ensure we are
consistent at every touchpoint.
The Ted Baker difference
Our unique strengths
Last year our new brand
ambition helped us focus on
exactly why we are here.
Ithas framed Anthony
Cuthbertson and his team’s
approach to design, which
has engaged both new and
loyal customers with the
sense of joy and British wit
that is unique to Ted Baker.
1
TAKING OUR
BRAND FROM
STRENGTH TO
STRENGTH
Our approach to capital-
light investment has led us
tostrengthen our licensing
partnerships and joint
ventures. Our product
licence income accounts
for3.5% of our revenue
butrepresents 31.0% of
totalbrand sales (retail
sales tocustomers), and
isan important factor in
building the presence of the
Ted Baker name around the
world. This year, we began
exploring opportunities for
new locations in addition
toour traditional stores.
Arecently-signed UK
franchise agreement will
extend our reach with
minimal capital investment
from Ted Baker,
strengthening our presence
and putting the brand in
front of new customers.
2
AGILE,
CAPITAL-LIGHT
INVESTMENT
As always, our people
continue to be the heart
and soul of the Ted Baker
brand. The continued
commitment and passion
ofour team members
through a second year
ofthe pandemic has been
incredible. We began to
embed our new company
values launched last year,
which were inspired by
what we see in our people
every day. As part of our
inclusion strategy, we
launched the first Ted Baker
employee engagement
survey during the year.
Agreat many of our people
responded and we are
acting on theresults.
3
THE LIFEBLOOD
OFOUR SUCCESS
–OURPEOPLE
We made excellent
progress on our
sustainability targets this
year – we ended the
yearwith 26% of all our
materials coming from
moresustainable sources,
up from17% last year.
Despite our best efforts,
wemissed our target of
75% for sustainable cotton,
due to the fact wesourced
more cotton than forecast,
at a time of increased
global demand and
decreased supply of
sustainable cotton.
Sixty-five percent of
tanneries we source our
leather from are now part of
the Leather Working Group,
working towards our aim of
100%by 2025.
4
TRANSPARENT
AND FAIR
– OUR SUPPLY
CHAIN
We continue to distribute
through a strong mix of own
stores and online presence,
concessions, wholesale,
territory franchises and
jointventures, and product
licences. All this allows
ustoreach our customers
through a wide variety of
channels in the UK and in
our international markets.
5
VARIED
DISTRIBUTION
AND
PARTNERSHIPS
SR GR FS
15TB | AR—’22
FOR OUR SHAREHOLDERS
We have a small number of large shareholders, along
with many other individual shareholders, who continue
to support our growth with their investment and belief in
our brand.
FOR OUR PARTNERS
They are a vital part of our business and future plans.
We have over 50 wholesale partners, 40 product
licence partners and 22 franchise partners in 32 countries
around the world.
FOR OUR COMMUNITIES
We always aim to give back to our communities and
wider society. For example, we are working with the
British Retail Consortium (BRC) to make social mobility
inretail a reality for thousands of people.
FOR OUR PLANET
We aim to be net carbon neutral by 2030 in Scopes 1
and 2. We have submitted our absolute carbon
reduction target of 46% across all Scope 3 operations
by 2030 for accreditation by the SBTi (Science Based
Targets initiative).
A newly-formed internal carbon steering group will
deliver a roadmap to underpin our carbon goals.
We gave 3.6 tonnes of terminal stock to charities rather
than sending to landfill.
All our UK stores and the Ugly Brown Building continue
to use 100% renewable energy.
FOR OUR PEOPLE
Our 2,224 people make Ted Baker the company
weare today. We aim to reward their commitment to
our brand by supporting their wellbeing and helping
them develop their careers and personal aspirations.
Our values
We have a clear set of values, drawn from our
people. They are reflected in, and underpin,
everything we do. During the pandemic, these
behaviours have come to the fore and they
sitatthe heart of our strategy. We are:
AUTHENTIC
CURIOUS
COURAGEOUS
INCLUSIVE
KIND
How we use our strengths
The value we deliver
DESIGN, SOURCE AND MAKE
Designing our clothes and accessories,
guided by the DNA of the brand
SELL
How we reach our customers
Retail — Digital Sales
Wholesale — Licensing
OUR
CUSTOMERS
Retaining our current
customers and
attracting
new ones
16 TB | AR—’22
OUR STRATEGY
Capturing the brilliant, unexpected,
joyous moments that make up
everyday British life
As the world comes out of the pandemic and
learns to live with Covid, we are optimistic
aboutpeople’s return to work, social life and
spontaneity. And we are excited about the
important and joyous part Ted Baker has
toplayin all of this.
We have summarised our refreshed strategy
here. On the following pages, you can read
about our progress to date against our priorities
and our plans for the coming year.
Two years into our strategic plan, we have refreshed our strategy
toreflect our progress and the big ambitions we hold for our brand.
1 see page 17
Refresh our distinct
brand expression
across all
touchpoints
Drive the
activation of the
brand across all
customer and
employee touch
points – online,
stores, partners
and marketing
channels
2 see page 18
Attract, drive
frequency and
retain more target
customers
Develop
adeeper
understanding
ofour customers
to grow market
share
3 see page 19
Expand our
product and its
relevance
Execute key
learnings from
FY22 into new
ranges
Expand product
portfolio to meet
lifestyle brand
aspirations
4 see page 21
Drive our digital
omnichannel and
capital-light
growth
Drive digital
omnichannel
services in order
toscale a fully
immersive
customer
experience
ofTed Baker
inDirect to
Consumer (DTC)
Continue to use
short-term leases
to test and
explore new,
untapped
markets (physical
and digital)
5 see page 23
Scale up in
prioritymarkets
Re-establish
Ted Baker
asapremium
brandin the UK
Scale up in the
USwith digital
and physical
expansion
enabled by
omnichannel
services
Scale up in
Germany and
Middle East
Become
profitable
andscale up
inChina
Grow in other
territories with
the right model
OUR GOAL IS TO BE THE MOST ENGAGING BRITISH LIFESTYLE BRAND
Growth driversStrategic priorities
SR GR FS
17TB | AR—’22
OUR STRATEGY: BRAND AND CUSTOMERS
REMINDING OURSELVES WHY CUSTOMERS LOVE TED BAKER
Our new Chief Customer, Marketing and Digital Officer
JasonBeckley explains why customers feel a great affinity
for the Ted Baker brand. Here, he gives an overview of the
work we have done recently to understand our customers
better than ever, how we will attract and retain more of our
target customers and interact more frequently with them.
What makes the Ted Baker brand
soenduring?
Jason: Great brands resonate on multiple levels.
They connect to us because of their values and
beliefs as well as the products or services they
offer. What they stand for is as important as
whatthey sell. We run frequent and in-depth
consumer studies at Ted Baker to find out
exactlywhat people think, and the most
impressive thing is the huge amount of goodwill
people feel towards the brand. Ted Baker stands
for positivity; it has a lightness, doesn’t take life
“ Ted Baker has
alwaysbeen about
personal style and
ourmarketing has to
amplify that. It means
putting the customer
atthe heart of
everything we do.”
Jason Beckley
Chief Customer, Marketing and
DigitalOfficer
too seriously and there is a feeling of inclusivity.
All of this gives the brand a truly unique DNA
which we must always hold in high regard as
wegrow and develop. There was a phrase
fromthe early days of the brand that said,
“itmust be Ted at ten paces”. It’s a powerful
idea– we must celebrate what makes us
different and unique asa brand. Our customers
are clear that it is this that makes Ted Baker no
ordinary lifestyle brand.
Refreshing our distinct brand expression
acrossall touchpoints
Growth drivers 1&2
18 TB | AR—’22
OUR STRATEGY
95%
Prompted
awareness of
thebrand (UK)
How are you refreshing the brand
positioning?
Jason: Refresh is the optimal word, certainly
notreinvent or reappraise. This is a brand that
ishighly recognisable and has really strong
consumer affinity. We must build from what
weare, what we’re famous for and why we’re
admired. The Ted Baker code gives us all
weneed to stay relevant and contemporary.
Theaim is to refresh this code but to never
losesight of it.
How do you see Ted Baker’s approach to
marketing evolving?
Jason: We will be taking a content-driven,
consumer-focused approach to communication,
looking to develop and build a connected and
engaged community around the brand that
shares our values. At both customer level and
with partners, collaborations and capsules,
we’re reflecting a lifestyle and want to be
present in some way in many aspects of our
customers’ lives. We must keep the brand
proposition fresh and innovative.
Ted Baker has always been about personal
styleand our marketing needs to amplify that.
Itmeans putting the customer at the heart of
everything we do. It means looking at things in
aholistic way and controlling our output with
great discipline. We must view everything –
stores, online, social channels – through the
lensofour brand. We are proud to be the
custodians of a very special thing here at
Ted Baker – everything we do must be additive,
always expanding and developing the
Ted Baker philosophy.
What is Ted Baker doing to get closer to
itscustomers?
Jason: We have a brand first, customer-centric
approach to our strategic development.
Sogetting closer to the customer is paramount
toour success. There is no magical formula for
this, our approach is quite simple – we talk to
them. Over the past 18 months we have built
animpressive structure of insight and consumer
data. We interview and interact with thousands
of customers across our major markets each
month and use their input as a basis for decision
making. These are major qualitative and
quantitative studies that provide a detailed
andrich data set of choices, aspirations,
demographics and reactions.
It gives us a window into our brand through
acustomer lens – it allows us to measure
ourselves on what they think. We have now
segmented ourcustomers to a much more
detailed level, andmapped them to our product
and marketing creative process. This has given
usa strategy based on data that brings to life
areal customer target – as it means we can now
inspire them withexceptional creativity. What we
do know and can evidence is the great affinity
for Ted Baker by customers – perceptions of
quality and being abrand worth buying is very
strong. It’s clear thatour customers feel good
when they wear Ted Baker and with prompted
awareness at 95%in the UK and growing brand
awareness inthe US and Germany, we are
building on very strong foundations.
Ted Baker’s brand optimism, versatility,
playfulness, the colour and prints – these are
theelements we are known and wanted for.
With everything we’ve learned, we know the
brand is well positioned in customers’ minds.
It’san opportunity we can be confident in –
nowwe can work together to cut through
creatively and capture our customers’
imagination as we ramp up our investment
inthebrand across our focus markets.
SR GR FS
19TB | AR—’22
OUR STRATEGY: PRODUCT
Expand our product
anditsrelevance
CREATING DESIRABLE, BEAUTIFUL AND MORE SUSTAINABLE PRODUCTS
Anthony Cuthbertson, our Global Creative Director, explains
howheand his team are approaching designing our new
collections with an eye on the future. And Cat Lee, our Ethics,
Communities & Sustainability Lead, shares how design and
sustainability come together to create beautiful clothes
andaccessories that are kinder to the planet.
How has your approach evolved over
theyear?
Anthony: We have a very clear vision and
strategy and, together with the team, we’ve
takenthe insights from our customer research
and we’re feeding that into the new ranges.
Ithas been incredibly useful to see the data and
understand why people are buying particular
pieces from our website, in store or from one
ofour partners like John Lewis, Next, Zalando
orBloomingdales. It all helps evolve the
newcollections.
How does that play out in the clothes
themselves?
Anthony: As a British global lifestyle brand,
wealways look at our history and what’s going
on in the world, then we play on that and our
personality to deliver the essence of Ted Baker.
The biggest thing I’ve learned is the importance
of storytelling. Every Ted Baker fabric design,
every element of cut and fit down to the smallest
details– a button for example – must tell a story.
This gives our marketing and customer teams
astory to tell, through our digital channels and in
store. It’s avery powerful part of the brand DNA.
“ Every Ted Baker fabric
design, every element
of cut and fit down to
the smallest details –
abutton for example
– must tell a story.”
Anthony Cuthbertson
Creative Director
Growth driver 3
20 TB | AR—’22
OUR STRATEGY: PRODUCT
We can do this more effectively with our new
customer personas added into the mix and
working to our design pyramid that captures
thethreads of core continuity, trend and concept.
Itmeans we can be more consistent in the way
we tell the Ted Baker story through iconic prints
like the magnolia flower or our Floral Street
tartan. Much of this is inspired by our history but
with acontemporary twist so it feels up-to-date
but still very Ted Baker. This is what resonates
with customers – it’s not just a shirt or a dress,
it’sa Ted Baker shirt or dress, always
unexpected, never ordinary.
What do you think the big changes will
beover the next year?
Anthony: The world is changing fast and we
want to deliver a vision and product that is
relevant for customers today. With people
goingback to work, hopefully they will be
buying more trousers and dresses rather than
staying at home and buying slippers and
dressing gowns! I see a move away from
completely casual to a mix of smart casual.
Andpeople will be getting together for more
formal occasions and events this year, which is
agreat opportunity for us. The other important
thing is toreally drive through new developments
with fabrics and techniques. We must push the
boundaries in sustainability. For example, we’ve
taken a very successful bag that has been in the
collection for many years and made it much more
sustainable, so it retains the essence of the brand
but is kinder to the environment.
Can you tell us more about Ted Baker’s
approach to sustainability?
Cat: We’re looking at every aspect, across all
our products and ranges with different materials.
So the bag Anthony mentioned is a recycled
puffer bag, made from 85% certified recycled
polyester, which helps divert plastic from ending
up in landfill – it can make a big difference and
customers are actively looking for ideas and
materials like this.
Another example would be in menswear with
our Icon T-shirts launched back in August, which
are made from 100% organic cotton. It’snot
always straightforward – there have been some
challenges which have slowed us down abit,
particularly in the cotton supply chain.
We’ve also made big steps in sourcing leather
from Leather Working Group (LWG) tanneries.
We’re now at 65% and we’re aiming to source
100% of our leather from LWG or equivalent
certified tanneries by 2025. In terms of our
sustainable sourcing, overall we’ve managed
toreach 26%, up from 17% last year, which is
ahuge achievement with the challenges of the
pandemic to our supply chain.
26%
of all materials
sustainably
sourced
How are you communicating all this
tocustomers?
Cat: All our eCommerce packaging and
retailbags are now FSC-certified and 100%
recyclable. They will have a QR code on them
that links to our sustainability website, so customers
can get the full story about everything we are
doing. The aim is to have 100% sustainable
customer packaging by 2025, with all paper-
based packaging made from recycled materials.
We’ve also brought in sustainability swing
ticketson all our products in store, so customers
can easily see which products are made with
responsibly-sourced cotton, wool and recycled
polyester. These products are evolving
continually to comply with the CMA guidelines
that launched in December 2021.
SR GR FS
21TB | AR—’22
OUR STRATEGY: DIGITAL AND CAPITAL-LIGHT GROWTH
Drive our digital, omnichannel
andcapital-light growth
MAKING MORE FROM LESS
Jason Beckley and Helen Costello, our Group Commercial
& Business Development Director, share how we will use
our new digital platform to amplify our brand and how
wework with investment from our partners to drive growth.
Tell us about Ted Baker’s new digital
platform
Jason: We’ve moved from a relatively standard
digital solution to one that gives us the scope
todevelop our digital experience beyond
standard online product purchase into a fully
immersive digital eco-system. This will draw
customers deeper into the brand and help us
serve aconnected community.
We’re building an ‘always-on Beta culture’,
sowe can constantly evolve how we do things
to give customers a deeper, richer experience
when they come to tedbaker.com. Agility is
everything and this cloud-based digital
commerce solution means we can move
quicklytotake advantage of growth
opportunities in a flexible and agile way.
From a technology point of view, our new
platform is a single point of access for customers
everywhere. We can process orders anywhere
in the world and the user experience has been
carefully designed to make it a smooth, easy
process. It’s a starting point with huge potential
to take the brand into a different world.
Growth driver 4
22 TB | AR—’22
OUR STRATEGY: DIGITAL AND CAPITAL-LIGHT GROWTH
How have you approached opening up
innew, untapped locations?
Helen: We’ve been exploring new locations in
the UK over the last year with smaller footprint
stores in places we wouldn’t have traditionally
focused on. We opened three stores –
inBromley, Exeter and Leicester – whose
short-term leases and lowcapital expenditure
allow us to be flexible and agile.
It’s really made us think outside the box.
Whatcan you achieve in 100 square metres?
What’s the right balance of clothing and
accessories, sizes and stock? Which customers
should we focus on? It’s been a great way to test
and learn what works well in a smaller store and
what challenges it throws up.
How do you extend Ted Baker’s reach
tobuild a truly global brand?
Helen: One of the great strengths of Ted Baker
isthat we have a relatively small own-store
footprint with a large global reach through
ourpartnerships, withmultiple routes to market.
These include wholesaling, product licensing,
franchises, concessions and digital platforms.
Franchise partners are helping us build an
international footprint in territories like the
MiddleEast. And wholesale isthe foundation
forgrowing our presence in Europe, especially
in key markets like Germany.
Can you tell us about Ted Baker’s new UK
franchise partner?
Helen: We signed a three-year, three-stores-per-
annum deal with Robert Goddard at the end
ofthe year – they’ve been a very supportive
wholesale partner for 20 years, with a strong
track record. The aim is to open stores in locations
we haven’t considered in the past. They’ll take on
the capital expenditure and operations and we’ll
work with them from abrand standpoint. Itwill
increase our brand awareness and we expect
tosee a halo effect on our omnichannel sales.
We’re also working on a new omnichannel
franchise deal in the Middle East. The franchisee
will look after all the channels, from bricks-and-
mortar stores to digital sales. As well as running
stores, they will look after the digital back end –
fulfilling orders and managing stock. It means
they can manage the whole region more
efficiently, maximising sales across all channels.
Customers will get a better, joined-up service
and it’s a capital-light investment for us.
“ It’s been a great
waytotest and learn
whatworks well in
asmaller store and the
challenges it throws up.”
Helen Costello
Group Commercial and Business
DevelopmentDirector
£918m
Brand
sales
SR GR FS
23TB | AR—’22
“ We will concentrate
onour largest markets,
where we already
havea strong brand
presence, as well as
markets where we see
the biggest potential
inthe medium term.”
Tikki Godley
Group Trading Director
OUR STRATEGY: PRIORITY MARKETS
Scaling up in priority markets
A CAREFUL, STRATEGIC AND CAPITAL-LIGHT APPROACH TO GROWTH
We asked Group Trading Director Tikki Godley to talk
usthrough the thinking behind sharpening our focus on
key markets to grow the Ted Baker brand and business
around the world.
Ted Baker has a large footprint across
theglobe – just how big is it?
Tikki: Ted Baker has a physical brand presence
in over 50 countries with over 350 stores and
concessions worldwide supported by a global
digital proposition. We successfully operate
different models – owned stores, territory
franchises, franchises, concessions and
wholesale and joint ventures – which depend
onthe maturity and size ofa market and which
support our capital-light growth strategy.
What does ‘sharpening your focus on
keymarkets’ mean for Ted Baker?
Tikki: We have a large global footprint
consisting of owned stores in some great
locations, alongside strong franchise, JV and
concessions partnerships across several markets.
As the world emerges from the pandemic, there
is significant potential to develop further in these
existing markets.
The key to making the most of this opportunity is
focus and prioritisation – to not spread ourselves
too thinly. We will concentrate on our largest
markets, where we already have a strong brand
presence, as well as markets where we see the
biggest potential in the medium term.
Growth driver 5
24 TB | AR—’22
OUR STRATEGY: PRIORITY MARKETS
In North America, we’re excited about the huge
potential for the brand. We are well-placed to
deliver against this with a good existing physical,
digital,product licence and wholesale brand
presence – supported by a strong local team
and well-established distribution across the
continent. Over the year we consolidated our
local sales, marketing and support teams into
abeautiful new head office in central New York
that includes trade showroom space to better
showcase our ranges.
In Germany, one of the largest European markets,
we will drive growth through the capital-light
models of concessions and wholesale, with
digital playing an increasingly important role.
In the Middle East, we are targeting scale
throughleveraging our franchise relationship with
Al Futtaim, moving from purely franchise/retail
toinclude a deeper partnership on wholesale,
animproved digital business and a wider
productoffering across all channels.
China, although currently small in financial terms
for Ted Baker, offers a huge opportunity in the
medium and longer term. The brand resonates
well with local customers, and we have an
established local JV partner to support the
expansion of our physical presence. We see
asignificant digital opportunity in the
mediumterm.
What will you do differently in each market?
Tikki: Firstly, there are many things that will be
thesame and consistent wherever the Ted Baker
brand shows up – our core brand values and the
customer experience, to highlight two of them.
We successfully operate and distribute across
arange of physical and digitalsales channels–
wholesale, online marketplaces, concessions,
franchise stores andowned stores and
digitalplatforms.
As we grow in our priority markets, we seek
tobalance capital-light investment, brand
controland direct customer connection – with
wholesale models at one end of the spectrum
and owned stores and digital at the other.
Ourapproach is determined by the size of the
prize combined with the need for specific local
market knowledge to deliver it.
What about the other markets that you
operate in?
Tikki: Our focus on priority markets doesn’t
meanthat we will neglect other markets and
ourpartners there. We’ll continue to nurture
andsupport them with the fantastic product
andbrand marketing they’ve come to expect
from Ted Baker.
We’ll continue to push for growth in these other
regions through our wholesale customers and
territory franchise partners, encouraging them
toexpand into new locations. Our JV in Australia
is strategically important for us – given our
partner’s local market knowledge and strengths,
the JV needs less management oversight from us.
What is the role of digital in driving
international growth?
Tikki: Digital is often the first point of contact for
both new and existing customers, so is central to
Ted Baker’s growth strategy both in our core UK
market and globally. Our new web platform
supports international sales and we can drive
customer traffic through localised social and
digital marketing. We also work closely with
ourterritory partners to underpin their digital
development– for example in the Middle East
and Australia.
UK & Europe 69.4%
North America 29.6%
Rest of the World 1.0%
Sales by region
SR GR FS
25TB | AR—’22
26 Chief Financial Officer’s introduction
28 Key performance indicators
30 Business and financial review
38 Fashioning a better future
40 — People
47 — Communities and charity partnerships
48 — Our ethical sourcing programme
52 — Our planet
60 Risk Report
67 Going concern and viability disclosure
RREEVIVIEEW W OOF F
TTHHEEYYEEAARR
26 TB | AR—’22
CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER’S INTRODUCTION
Financial summary of the year
“ We start the new
financial year
withoptimism
andconfidence.”
Marc Dench
Chief Financial Officer
The first half of the year saw the business make great strides,
building on our transformation plan despite ongoing challenges
of the pandemic. As the vaccination programme gained pace,
and people returned to the office and to socialising, we saw
momentum building towards the end of the year, and we were
optimistic that the second half would see us return a modest profit.
However, the unexpected onset of the Omicron
variant and related restrictions saw this
momentum slow through the important final
quarter of the year. The good progress we’ve
made on our financial foundations coupled with
the positive sales performance we’ve seen when
restrictions ease mean we are optimistic as we
look ahead to the new financial year.
A YEAR OF GOOD PROGRESS
Overall, our financials demonstrate the
continuing improvement in our underlying
performance. Our loss before tax for the year
of£44.1 million was £63.7 million better than
the prior year. Excluding non-underlying items,
ourloss before tax improved by £20.8 million
compared with the prior year to 38.4 million.
A positive trajectory
As restrictions eased, we saw trading in non-city
centre stores and concessions in metropolitan
areas coming close to (and in some cases
exceeding) their pre-pandemic levels.
In addition to delivering top line sales growth,
we continued to improve our underlying gross
margin which was improved by 105 bps in the
year from 54.1% to 55.2%. This improvement
was supported by the sales mix – with an
increase in in-store sales, and a strong
improvement in our full price sales mix which
wasup over 800 bps. Starting the year with less
aged stock plus buying discipline and a positive
customer response to new ranges, in particular
our A/W womenswear range, meant we
wereable to reduce promotional and
discounting activity.
Our sales and gross margin performance were
underpinned by a resilient supply chain through
the year. Despite the well-publicised disruption
to sea freight and HGV driver shortages, we
managed to keep a smooth flow of product into
our distribution centre and out to customers in the
UK. In the US, disruption was a bigger issue and
at times it was difficult to maintain desired stock
levels in store. The costs of freight remained at
elevated levels through the period reflecting
these challenges.
The progress we’ve made and the positive
signsseen through FY22 mean we start
thenewfinancial year with optimism
andconfidence.
Continuing focus on strong financial
management
The disciplines of the transformation programme
are now embedded in how we work, with
afocus on managing cash and tight control
overcosts and financial commitments.
We have maintained strong relationships with
suppliers and landlords and are very grateful
fortheir support and flexibility as we all navigate
through the operational and commercial
challenges arising from the pandemic.
SR GR FS
27TB | AR—’22
Wecontinued to make good progress on
improving our store lease flexibility and costs
through the year.
Stock remains a key area of focus. We further
improved our disciplines on planning, buying
and managing stock, balancing the need to
have enough stock to support consumer sales
recovery across our channels with the
objectivesof managing our cash and
improvinggross margin.
All these factors helped us keep a tight grip
oncash, with the year ending net cash positive
with £3.1 million (2021: £66.7 million).
WELL POSITIONED FOR THE
YEARAHEAD
We start the new financial year with confidence
and optimism. Confidence in our brand, product
ranges, people and operating model. Optimism
given the positive trends seen in the prior year
combined with further easing of Covid
restrictions domestically within countries and for
international travel.
But our optimism is tempered with caution – the
effects of inflation and the rising cost of living are
very real, as are the ongoing challenges of
managing disruption across the supply chain.
Facing into this demand and supply volatility
means that forecasting – a tough job at the best
of times – is harder than ever. The benefits from
our transformation programme – a reduced
fixed cost base, sourcing diversification,
refreshed product ranges and more efficient
ways of working, combined with the recent
launch of our new global digital platform and
the enduring strength of our Ted Baker brand
puts us in a good position to navigate these
unprecedented times.
Marc Dench
Chief Financial Officer
INTRODUCING MARC DENCH – CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER
What attracted you to the job at Ted Baker?
I’m a massive fan of the brand – I’ve been a customer of Ted Baker for over
20years, so you could say it’s in the blood! From a professional point of view,
I’vefollowed the brand’s story as it’s grown into a global lifestyle brand.
IbelieveTed Baker is hugely relevant across multiple categories here in the
UKand anywhere you find it around the world.
What excited you about the role?
It’s a very exciting time to come on board. Clearly Ted Baker has faced several
challenges over the last three years, not least trying to turn the business around
inthe midst of a global pandemic! But by addressing those challenges with
asmart transformation plan, the business is not only more agile and efficient but
also, critically, it has maintained focus and discipline on developing the brand
andproducts. The passion of the people and teams across the business is
hugelyinspiring too – from stores to our distribution centres to everyone who
works in our head offices in London and New York.
What are the key strategies that will drive success at Ted Baker?
For me, it’s about three things: purpose, people and discipline. Having clarity
ofwhy we’re in business and what we stand for, combined with clear strategic
priorities, means we can be ruthlessly focused on doing what we do as well
aspossible.
To achieve this requires the right people with a shared goal and attitude. It’s not
rocket science – we know from experience that highly engaged teams deliver
greater returns for shareholders. The pandemic has driven all sorts of change,
particularly in employee engagement and development, retention and
recruitment. Dealing with these changes in a post-pandemic world is a real test
ofleadership.
Finally, discipline is essential. That means creating and maintaining innovative
ways of working as well as ensuring consistency and rigour in our processes, our
investment approach and how we deliver projects more effectively and efficiently.
What are your priorities for the new financial year?
Simple: to build on what’s been achieved over the last two years and deliver the
final year of our transformation plan. It’s also about managing the transition from
transformation to growth-focused initiatives. We also need to closely monitor and
react to the rapidly-changing macro-economic conditions that are making things
challenging for everyone. I have high hopes for what we can achieve this year.
28 TB | AR—’22
KEY PERFORMANCE INDICATORS
We review the ongoing performance
ofthe Group against key performance
indicators (KPIs) across financial,
operational and sustainability factors.
Below arethe KPIs that the Board
judges to be most effective inassessing
the business asitmoves through the
transformation. These are considered
inmore detail inthereport.
As we discuss on pages 40-46,
ourpeople are critical to the success
ofthe business; as we evolve our global
culture we will align our people KPIs,
and report on them in the future.
How we measure progress
Group financial KPIs
BRAND SALES
£918m +23.2%
FY22
FY21
FY20
£918m
£745m
£1,230m
UNDERLYING GROSS MARGIN
55.2% +105bps
FY22
FY21
FY2
0*
55.2%
54.1%
55.6%
NET DEBT/CASH
£3.1m £(63.6)m
FY22
FY21
FY20
£66.7m
£(127.1)m
£3.1m
REVENUE
£428.2m +20.5%
FY22
FY21
FY20
£428.2m
£355.3m
£630.5m
(LOSS)/PROFIT BEFORE TAX
£(44.1)m +59.1%
FY22
FY21
FY20
£(44.1)m
£(
107.7)m
£(77.6)m
* Please see note 3 to the financial statements for the change in presentation
of delivery income from FY20 to FY21.
SR GR FS
29TB | AR—’22
Operational KPIs Sustainability KPIs
FULL PRICE SALES MIX
Improvement in the proportion of our sales at full price is
closely monitored as we move out of the pandemic and
reduce discounting.
There was a significant improvement in FY22.
+810bps FY21-1890bps
FY22
FY21
-1890bps
810bps
CUSTOMER METRICS
Active Customer base
The active customer base has shrunk slightly due to
adecrease in the number of promotions during the year,
butstill up on FY20.
(5)% FY21 8%
FY22
FY21
(5)%
8%
AVERAGE ORDER VALUE (AOV)
An increase in AOV with the launch of new styles and
ranges and reduction in discounting.
14 % FY21 (27)%
FY22
FY21
(27)%
14 %
COMMUNITIES
Target:
Launch of Ted’s
Diploma by 2022
Progress:
Piloted Ted’s
Diploma with 120
students in London
ETHICAL SOURCING
We have delivered against the targets established within
our transformation plan.
Target:
100%
Tier 1 and 2 factories meet
or exceed Ted Baker’s
minimum ethical
requirements
Target:
100%
of workers in Ted Baker’s
direct supply chain to have
access to channels to raise
concerns and ideas by 2025
Progress:
100%
Ethical audits on all Tier 1 suppliers and full transparency
ofall subcontracting units to include homeworking sites.
Mapped systemic issues in the supply chain – and piloted
aworker voice program for roll out in FY23.
PLANET
Target 100% of all materials to be from
sustainable sources by 2030
FY22
FY21
2030 target
2022 target: 20%
26%
17%
100%
Recycled polyester
FY22
FY21
2030 target
11 %
3%
100%
Responsible wool
FY22
FY21
2030 target
12%
2%
100%
Leather from Leather Working Group tanneries
FY22
FY21
2025 target
65%
26%
100%
PEOPLE COST SAVINGS VS FY20
We have delivered against the targets established within
our transformation plan.
Target:
£ 2 7. 0 m
people cost on an
annualised basis
Progress:
£31.0m
delivered on an
annualisedbasis
30 TB | AR—’22
BUSINESS AND FINANCIAL REVIEW
Business review
This year has seen a robust performance by the Group, with a significant
increase in revenues and gross margin, and narrowing losses with
encouraging momentum through the year. All this has been achieved
despite the ongoing challenges and disruption caused by Covid that
continued to impact store openings and footfall. The pandemic also
continued to hold back demand for our formal and occasionwear ranges.
CHANNEL PERFORMANCE
Ted Baker’s total brand sales increased to
£918 million in the year (2021: £745m) with
animproved performance seen across all of our
channels and markets. Brand sales represents
management’s estimate of the end retail sales
value to the consumer including its own retail
channels and those of its wholesale trustees,
jointventure partners, territorial licences
(franchisees) and product licensing sales.
Retail
Our retail channel comprises physical stores,
concessions and eCommerce. We operate
stores and concessions across the UK, Europe,
North America and South Africa, with localised
eCommerce sites in the UK, Europe, North
America and Australia. Our stores play an
important role supporting digital sales: driving
brand awareness, showcasing our products,
andgiving customers a seamless experience for
click and collect and order-in-store. Our stores
also provide a fulfil-from-store service, which
makes our store stock available to customers
shopping online.
Covid disruption continued to affect the
performance of our retail channel through the
year. Most of our stores in the UK, Europe and
Canada were closed for extended periods at
the start of the financial year to comply with local
lockdowns. As stores reopened during the first
half of the year footfall remained well short of
pre-pandemic levels but recovered as the year
progressed. The success of vaccine rollouts and
the reduced prevalence of the virus in many of
our territories saw customers beginning to return
to the workplace and shops. We saw significant
improvement in in-store sales through November
and the first weeks of December, with some
ofour locations trading close to – or even
above– pre-pandemic levels. The emergence
of the Omicron variant in mid-December
reversed this positive momentum. This coincided
with the important trading period in the run up to
Christmas, with restrictions and work from home
guidance reintroduced across much of Europe
and the UK.
We continued to make good progress on our
store portfolio optimisation programme in line
with our capital-light growth strategy. We closed
a further 15 locations and opened seven stores
during the period (excluding partner locations),
while continuing to renegotiate improved lease
terms. We transitioned our business with House
of Fraser from a concession to a wholesale
model – these sales are now reported within
ourwholesale channel from the second half
oftheyear.
eCommerce revenue decreased 9.7% (-8.1% in
constant currency)
1
in the year against a strong
comparable period that saw growth of 24.8%.
Sales in the prior year benefitted from store
channels being closed, due to Covid restrictions,
for a larger proportion of the period, and
ahigher level of promotion and markdown
salesgiven the elevated stock levels due to the
store closures. eCommerce sales in the current
year delivered a significantly improved gross
margin with a better full-price sales mix.
Onatwo-year basis eCommerce revenue
wasup by 12.7% in constant currency.
1
Wholesale
Our wholesale business serves trade customers
(‘trustees’) across the world. These are located
primarily in the UK, Europe, and North America,
we also supply products to our territorial licence
partners (franchisees) and joint venture partners
in China and Australia.
Many of our wholesale customers experienced
the same Covid disruption as our own retail
channels, and as such, demand remained below
pre-pandemic levels.
In the UK and Europe, sales rebounded strongly
against the previous year, ending the year up
48.2%. This performance was achieved despite
ongoing disruption from Covid and distribution
challenges to trustees in Europe due to Brexit in
the first half of the year.
Demand in North America held up well, with
aparticularly good performance in the first half.
This reflected the effect of the first wave of
Covidin the previous year and despite adverse
weather conditions and localised lockdowns
impacting several of our wholesale partners.
Wholesale revenue overall increased by 30.4%
(33.0% in constant currency
1
) to £111.2 million
(2021: £85.3m). Gross margin declined to
36.4% (2021: 39.6%), reflecting the customer
and channel sales mix as sales demand
recovered at different speeds across markets
and partners.
SR GR FS
31TB | AR—’22
Global Group summary
52 weeks ended
29 January 2022
53 weeks ended
30 January 2021
(restated)
2
Variance
Constant currency
variance
1
Group
Revenue £428.2m £355.3m 20.5% 23.2%
Gross margin (excluding non-underlying items) 55.2% 54.1% 105 bps
Loss before tax (excluding non-underlying items) £(38.4)m £(59.2)m +£20.8m
Loss before tax £(44.1)m £(107. 7 ) m +£63.7m
Loss before tax as a % of revenue (10.3%) (30.3%) 2000 bps
Retail
Retail revenue £301.9m £ 2 5 7. 5 m 17. 2 % 20.0%
Store revenue £168.1m £109.3m 53.7% 58.1%
eCommerce revenue £133.8m £148.2m (9.7)% (8.1)%
Gross margin (excluding non-underlying items) 59.9% 56.7% 310 bps
Average square footage* 363,202 421,435 (13.8%)
Closing square footage* 344,502 411, 6 0 2 (16.3%)
Sales per square foot* excluding eCommerce £463 £259 78.4% 83.4%
Wholesale
Revenue £111. 2 m £85.3m 30.4% 33.0%
Gross margin 36.4% 39.6% (320) bps
Licensing
Revenue £15.2m £12.4m 21. 7 % 21.7%
*Excludes licence partner (franchisee) stores. Sales per square foot is based on average square footage.
1 Constant currency compares the performance in local currency at the same exchange rate for both periods, thereby removing the impact of exchange rate
fluctuations between periods.
2 Prior year revenue, gross margin and distribution costs are adjusted to reflect the reclassification of delivery income from cost of goods sold to revenue and
certain elements of delivery cost from cost of goods sold to distribution expenses. The prior year is reported on a consistent basis to FY22.
LICENCE INCOME
Licence income represents royalty income from
territory licence partners (franchisees) and royalty
income from product licences. Our partners for
territory and product licences are carefully
selected as specialists in their field. They share
our passion for unwavering attention to detail and
firm commitment to quality and who we consider
will be good custodians of the Ted Baker brand.
Territory licences cover specific countries or
regions primarily in the Middle East, Asia, Europe
and Central America, where our partners operate
Ted Baker branded stores under licence and, in
some territories, undertake wholesale business.
Product licensing allows us to expand the
Ted Baker brand across a broader range of
products relevant to our customers’ lifestyles.
Wework with carefully selected partners that
share our passion for the Ted Baker brand and
bring unique supply chain capability and/or retail
and wholesale distribution. Our product licence
partnerships cover:
Specialist clothing categories:
e.g. childrenswear, suiting, lingerie and
nightwear, men’s underwear
Beauty: e.g. fragrance, toiletries,
andskincare
Lifestyle accessories: e.g., eyewear, watches,
luggage, jewellery, and personal technology
accessories
Home: e.g. bedding, towels, wallpaper,
andrugs
Licence income increased by 21.7% to
£15.2 million (2021: £12.4m). We saw a good
performance in the eyewear segment in North
America and the UK, as well as from our
partnership with Next for childrenswear and
lingerie and nightwear. Sales in the formalwear
segment remained subdued with Covid
restrictions affecting return to the workplace
andwith fewer events such as weddings
takingplace.
COLLECTION PERFORMANCE
Ted Baker womenswear sales increased
by23.3% to £270.9 million (2021: £219.7m)
andrepresented 66.1% (2021: 64.7%) of total
sales. Ted Baker menswear sales increased
by15.8% to £138.7 million (2021: £119.8m)
and represented 33.9% of total sales
(2021:35.3%).
32 TB | AR—’22
BUSINESS AND FINANCIAL REVIEW
Geographic performance
UNITED KINGDOM AND EUROPE
52 weeks ended
29 January 2022
53 weeks ended
30 January 2021
(restated)
2
Variance
Constant currency
variance
1
Revenue (including licensing) £297.4m £248.7m 19.6% 20.2%
Total retail revenue £204.7m £183.9m 11. 3 % 12.1%
Store revenue £99.7m £ 6 7. 3 m 48.0% 49.7%
eCommerce revenue* £105.0m £116.6m (9.9%) (9.6%)
Average square footage** 222,816 276,437 (19. 4%)
Closing square footage** 203,367 269,283 (24.5%)
Sales per square foot** excluding
eCommerce sales £447 £237 89.0% 85.7%
Wholesale revenue £7 7. 6 m £52.4m 48.2% 48.0%
Own stores 47 44 6.8%
Concessions*** 95 130 (26.9%)
Outlets 19 21 (9.5%)
Partner stores/concessions 12 10 20.0%
Total 173 205 (15.6%)
*Includes all revenue from eCommerce channels to customers outside North America, including non-European territories.
**Excludes licence partner (franchisee) stores. Sales per square foot is based on average square footage.
***Concession store numbers count multiple product locations (‘mats’) within one concession partner store as a single location.
1 Constant currency compares the performance in local currency at the same exchange rate for both periods, thereby removing the impact
ofexchange rate fluctuations between periods.
2 Prior year revenue, gross margin and distribution costs are adjusted to reflect the reclassification of delivery income from cost of goods sold to
revenue and certain elements of delivery cost from cost of goods sold to distribution expenses. The prior year is reported on a consistent basis
to FY22.
The UK and major European territories were
affected by lockdowns during the first half of the
year. In the UK, stores remained closed from
before the start of the financial year until the
middle of April 2021. Stores across our European
markets were closed over the same period with
amore gradual re-opening phased over the first
half of our financial year.
When stores reopened, footfall remained below
pre-pandemic levels, particularly in city centres
and areas traditionally popular with tourists.
Asthe year progressed, workers and shoppers
started to return to city centres and trading
performance improved, with some locations
outperforming their pre-pandemic levels in
November and the first few weeks of December.
However, with the emergence of the Omicron
variant in the middle of December, restrictions
and/or work from home guidance were
reinstated in several of our markets. This affected
consumer confidence and store sales over the
important Christmas trading period.
At the end of the first half, we transitioned our
29concession locations within House of Fraser
stores in the UK to a wholesale model, with
salesfrom these locations reported through the
wholesale channel through the second half.
Weclosed threeunprofitable outlets in Europe
and eight concessions in the UK. In the UK,
weopened one outlet store in Cannock and
three new stores on flexible short-term leases
with low fit-out costs. These smaller-than-typical
stores have provided an opportunity to learn
about performance indifferent locations and
fordifferent storeconfigurations.
eCommerce sales declined against a strong
comparative prior year performance with sales
on the tedbaker.com website in part held by
constraints of the legacy platform. Sales on
third-party concession partner platforms saw
good growth as we increased the number of
product options available and further enhanced
our ways of working with our partners. The gross
margin on eCommerce sales improved in the year
with an improved promotion stance and a higher
mix of full price sales through tedbaker.com.
Retail sales in the UK and Europe increased
by11.3% (12.1% in constant currency)
to£204.7 million (2021: £183.9m), with
eCommerce sales representing 51.3% (2021:
63.4%) of the total. Despite the distribution
disruption caused by Brexit and the continuing
effects of the pandemic, demand from wholesale
trustees and territory licence partners recovered
well, increasing ourwholesale sales by 48.2%
(48.0% in constantcurrency).
SR GR FS
33TB | AR—’22
NORTH AMERICA
52 weeks ended
29 January 2022
53 weeks ended
30 January 2021
(restated)
2
Variance
Constant currency
variance
1
Revenue £126.8m £104.1m 21.8% 29.3%
Total retail revenue £93.2m £71.3m 30.8% 38.7%
Store revenue £64.4m £39. 7m 62.4% 71.7%
eCommerce revenue £28.8m £31.6m (8.9%) (2.8%)
Average square footage* 131,570 13 7, 8 9 4 (4.6%)
Closing square footage* 130,653 135,215 (3.4%)
Sales per square foot* excluding
eCommerce sales £490 £288 70.2% 79.9%
Wholesale revenue £33.6m £32.8m 2.3% 9.0%
Own stores 32 35 (8.6%)
Concessions** 35 35 –
Outlets 12 12 –
Partner stores/concessions 16 16 -
Total 95 98 (3.1%)
*Excludes licence partner (franchisee) stores. Sales per square foot is based on average square footage.
**Concession store numbers count multiple product locations (‘mats’) within one concession partner store as a single location.
1 Constant currency compares the performance in local currency at the same exchange rate for both periods, thereby removing the impact
ofexchange rate fluctuations between periods.
2 Prior year revenue, gross margin and distribution costs are adjusted to reflect the reclassification of delivery income from cost of goods sold to
revenue and certain elements of delivery cost from cost of goods sold to distribution expenses. The prior year is reported on a consistent basis
to FY22.
Our North American business saw a good
recovery from the previous year’s challenges.
Covid-related disruption and resulting travel
restrictions affected footfall at the start of the
year, particularly in key tourist markets such
asNew York, Los Angeles, San Francisco and
LasVegas. Our stores in Canada also remained
closed under lockdown for a significant
proportion of the first half. However, consumer
confidence began to return in the spring
asvaccination programmes rolled out and
restrictions eased, with the return to offices and
social activities driving demand for more formal
and occasionwear.
Store sales increased by 62.4% (71.7% in
constant currency
1
) to £64.4 million (2021:
£39.7m), reflecting the above consumer trends.
We closed four stores in the year that were not
considered financially viable, and opened one
new location in San Antonio, Texas.
eCommerce sales reduced by 8.9% (down
2.8%in constant currency
1
) as demand returned
to physical channels, on a two-year basis
eCommerce sales grew by 30.4%. eCommerce
sales represented 30.9% of total retail sales
(2021: 4 4.3%).
The retail gross margin rate improved year-on-
year, driven by an improved full-price sales
mixas we started the year with a cleaner
stockposition.
Wholesale sales increased by 2.3% (9.0%
inconstant currency
1
) to £33.6 million (2021:
£32.8m). This performance was supported by
astrong first half of the year as demand from
ourtrustees returned following the previous
year’s challenges.
We continued to deliver cost efficiencies in our
North America business and consolidated all
our North America teams into a new office and
trade showroom in New York.
34 TB | AR—’22
BUSINESS AND FINANCIAL REVIEW
REST OF THE WORLD
Outside our UK, European and North America
businesses, we pursue a capital-light growth
strategy with a focus on working with partners
for territory licences, joint ventures or wholesale.
Retail
We operate owned stores in South Africa,
where we opened two new locations in
Johannesburg and Durban, and now operate
sixstores in the country (2021: four stores). Total
retail sales increased by 74.4% to £4.1 million
(2021: £2.3m), up 69.4% in constant currency.
1
Territory licences (franchisees) and
Joint Ventures
We have joint ventures in China and Australia,
and territory licence (franchise) agreements in
territories including the Middle East, India and
South Korea.
During the year our territory licence partners
opened one store in Kuwait, four in south-eastern
Europe, two in India and one in Indonesia, and
closed five in Asia and one in Europe.
Our joint venture in China (including Hong Kong
and Macau) returned to growth despite
consumer demand being affected by ongoing
Covid disruption. Our partner opened five new
stores during the period and closed three
unprofitable locations. It now operates
22 stores and concessions across the region
(2021: 20 stores and concessions).
Our Australian joint venture partner opened two
new short-term lease stores during the year and
now operates eleven stores in Australia and
New Zealand (2021: nine stores).
Product sales to our joint venture and territory
licence partners are reported through our
wholesale channel.
SR GR FS
35TB | AR—’22
Financial review
While performance continued to be affected by the global pandemic,
the benefits of the Group’s transformation programme are now well
embedded, with improved operational efficiency, robust cost control
and rigorous appraisal for capital expenditure.
Group revenue increased by 20.5% (23.2%
inconstant currency
1
) to £428.2 million (2021:
£355.3m
2
). Several of the Group’s stores, as well
as those of our territory licence (franchisee)
partners and wholesale trustees, were closed
formost of the first quarter to comply with local
lockdown restrictions. As the year progressed
and restrictions were eased in many territories,
we saw footfall and customer demand improve
as well as a good response to our refreshed
A/W ’21 collection in the second halfof the
year. The emergence of the Omicron variant in
December, and the reinstatement ofrestrictions
and work from home guidance inseveral
markets, resulted in a significant slowdown of
thistrend impacting the final six weeks of our
financial year.
(50)
0
50
100
15 0
200
Q1
Year-on-year change in sales* (FY21-22)
%
Q2 Q3 Q4**
Retail
Wholesale Licencing
Group
(18)
23
28
53
37
25
188
(25)
7
30
13
15
(50)
(40)
(30)
(20)
(10)
0
Q1
Two-year change in sales* (FY22 vs. FY20)
%
Q2 Q3 Q4
(46)
(10)
(29)
(50)
(27)
(17)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(35)
(30)
(28)
*Sales variances calculated on sales excluding delivery income in all quarters.
**FY21 was a 53-week year – Q4 adjusted to show comparison on 12-week to 12-week basis, i.e., excluding week 53.
Notes:
1 Constant currency compares the performance in local currency at the same exchange rate for both periods, thereby removing the impact of exchange rate fluctuations between periods.
2 Prior year revenue, gross margin and distribution costs are adjusted to reflect the reclassification of delivery income from cost of goods sold to revenue and certain elements of delivery cost from
cost of goods sold to distribution expenses. The prior year is reported on a consistent basis to FY22.
36 TB | AR—’22
BUSINESS AND FINANCIAL REVIEW
Gross margin before non-underlying items
improved by 105 bps to 55.2% (2021: 54.1%
adjusted for change in basis
2
) reflecting the less
challenging trading conditions and improvement
in our promotional stance.
We started the financial year with a controlled
inventory position which combined with the
refreshed product ranges has allowed us to
adopt a less promotional stance and begin
tore-establish Ted Baker’s premium brand
positioning. The gross margin rate improvement
was due to a significant improvement in the
full-price sales mix, up 810 bps year-on-year,
partly offset by additional duties and
unrecoverable sales tax resulting from Brexit.
Distribution costs (before non-underlying costs),
which comprise the cost of retail operations
anddistribution centres, increased by 3.7%
to£184.1 million (2021: £177.5m, adjusted for
change in basis
2
). Retail store operating costs
increased as stores reopened, and lower levels
of furlough and government subsidies were
received relative to the prior year.
Administration expenses (before non-underlying
costs) increased by 20.8% to £85.8 million
(2021: £71.0m). Staff costs increased year-on-
year as no furlough or subsidies were received
for head office team members. We also
continued to invest in marketing to support the
future growth of the business.
LOSS BEFORE TAX, AND LOSS BEFORE
TAX AND NON-UNDERLYING ITEMS
The loss before tax was £44.1 million (2021: loss
of £107.7m), an improvement of £63.7 million in
the year. The loss before tax and non-underlying
items was £38.4 million (2021: loss of £59.2m),
an improvement of £20.8 million in the year.
NON-UNDERLYING ITEMS
Non-underlying items before tax in the period
amounted to £5.6 million (2021: £48.6m)
andcomprised the following items of
expenses/(income) (see table below).
FINANCE INCOME AND EXPENSES
Net finance expenses were £8.2 million
(2021:£7.7m). The IFRS 16 interest expense
forthe period was £5.5 million (2021: £4.6m
(restated)). Net finance expenses before
non-underlying items were £6.4 million
(2021:£8.3m).
TAXATION
The Group tax credit for the period was
£8.5 million (2021: credit of £21.3m).
An income tax credit is recognised on losses
before non-underlying items at the forecast
effective tax rate for the year. This effective tax
rate is higher than the UK tax rate due to the
revaluation of previously recognised UK
deferred tax assets at the higher UK rate of 25%.
The higher UK tax rate was substantively
enacted at the balance sheet date and is
effective from 1 April 2023.
£ million
52 weeks ended
29 January 2022
53 weeks ended
30 January 2021
Loss before tax and non-underlying items (38.4) (59.2)
Inventory changes in estimates – (6.1)
Onerous contract provision 1.2 (2.0)
Included in gross profit 1.2 (8.0)
Impairments (3.0) (45.3)
Restructuring and refinancing costs (2.2) (11. 4 )
New platform cost (SaaS) ( 7. 8 ) –
Head office exit receivable 8.0 –
Gain on sales and leaseback of head office – 17. 4
Other – (2.0)
Included in operating loss (3.9) (49.2)
Foreign exchange & other items (1.8) 0.7
Total non-underlying items (5.6) (48.6)
Loss before tax (44.1) (107. 7 )
Notes:
1 Constant currency compares the performance in local currency at the same exchange rate for both periods, thereby removing the impact of exchange rate fluctuations between periods.
2 Prior year revenue, gross margin and distribution costs are adjusted to reflect the reclassification of delivery income from cost of goods sold to revenue and certain elements of delivery cost from
cost of goods sold to distribution expenses. The prior year is reported on a consistent basis to FY22.
SR GR FS
37TB | AR—’22
The Group’s future effective tax rate is expected
to be broadly in line with the UK tax rate which
aligns more closely with overseas tax rates from
the point it increases to 25%.
CASH FLOW
Net cash flow for the period was an outflow
of£54.4 million (2021: inflow of £15.2m), this
reflects an increased investment in working
capital as the Group returned to revenue growth
(2021: net working capital inflow of £57.7m)
aswell as an increase in investment intended to
support future growth, including the Group’s
newdigital platform.
In the prior year, the net cash inflow of
£15.2 million includes the sale of the Group’s
head office in London (the Ugly Brown Building)
for net proceeds of £72.2 million, net inflow
fromthe issuance of new equity of £97.8 million,
areduction in net working capital of £57.7 million
and the repayment of £180 million of
borrowingfacilities.
Net cash outflow from operating activities
was£23.4 million (2021: inflow of £52.6m).
Theimprovement in loss before tax for the
yearwas more than offset by an outflow
frominvestment in net working capital and
expenditure in the Group’s new digital platform,
the majority of which was on a cloud (or SaaS)
based solution and, in accordance with the
latest accounting guidance (IFRIC) has been
expensed in the period rather than treated
asaninvestment and capitalised.
Net working capital, which comprises
inventories, trade and other receivables and
trade and other payables, increased by
£37.2 million to £82.8 million (2021: £45.7m),
reflecting the return to growth of the business.
Inventory increased by 17.3% to £103.1 million
(2021: £87.8m) whilst sales increased 20.5%
(23.2% in constant currency
1
). We continued to
exercise controls on inventory through the year.
BORROWING FACILITIES
The Group’s net cash at 29 January 2022
was£3.1 million, reflecting a cash balance of
£14.5 million and borrowings and overdraft
of£11.4 million (30 January 2021: net cash
£66.7m). The Group has a revolving credit
facility (‘RCF’) of £80 million with a maturity
inNovember 2023.
On 25 May 2021 the Group announced the
extension to its RCF with its existing lending
syndicate. The new agreement extended the
RCF maturity from September 2022 to
November 2023 and amended the covenants.
Under the new agreement, the existing Facility A
of £107.8 million maturing in September 2022
and Facility B of £25 million maturing in January
2022, were replaced by a new RCF of
£90 million that reduced to £80 million on
30 January 2022 until maturity in November
2023. The amended RCF includes among other
changes, amendments to the quarterly covenant
tests on adjusted EBITDA, leverage ratio and
fixed charge cover. The Group has subsequently
agreed with its lenders to adjust the covenant
tests over the remaining life of the facility to
provide more headroom for the Group given the
prolonged disruption of Covid and the impact of
the Omicron variant on the Group’s trading in the
final weeks of the last financial year.
The existing lending syndicate continues to show
ongoing support to the Group.
TREASURY RISK MANAGEMENT
The Group has exposure to foreign exchange
fluctuations in relation to purchases made in
foreign currencies, principally the US Dollar and
the euro. We realise a high proportion of natural
hedging of these currency exposures due to our
business operations in North America and
Europe. The Group’s treasury risk management
policy allows for foreign currency to be hedged
for up to 24 months in advance.
The Group is also exposed to movements in
exchange rates on intercompany balances
denominated in a foreign currency. These are
not hedged, and movement in foreign exchange
rates can result in gains or losses being
recognised in the income statement.
The Group is exposed to movements in UK,
European and US interest rates as the revolving
credit facility accrues interest. This is based on
the relevant SONIA (for Sterling borrowing),
EURIBOR (for euro borrowing) or SOFR (for US
dollar borrowing) rate plus a margin. The Group
does not hold any interest rate hedge contracts.
BREXIT
The ‘transitional period’ for Brexit ended on
31 December 2020, introducing several
complexities into the Group’s operations within,
and distribution logistics to, Europe. The main
operational effects have been on the flow
ofgoods into the UK through the ports and
distribution from the UK to stores, territory licence
partners, wholesale trustees and eCommerce
customers in Europe.
We have established a customs warehouse in
theUK, which became operational in April 2021
and has partially mitigated the impact although
we expect there to be an ongoing adverse gross
margin impact on our European sales for the
foreseeable future.
EARNINGS PER SHARE AND
DIVIDENDS
The basic loss per share was 19.3 pence (2021:
loss per share 56.2p). Underlying loss per share,
which excludes non-underlying items, was a loss
of 16.4 pence (2021: loss per share 26.0p).
With consideration to the current trading
conditions and our commitments under the RCF
agreement, the Board has determined that no
final dividend is to be paid in respect of the
52weeks ended 29 January 2022 (2021: nil).
TheBoard remains committed to reinstating
shareholder distributions when it is financially
viable and responsible to do so.
Marc Dench
Chief Financial Officer
38 TB | AR—’22
FASHIONING A BETTER FUTURE
Caring for our people and planet
At Ted Baker, we want to do the right thing by our people and
ourplanet. That means making sure we have the tools and
processes to help our team members feel valued and we consider
all our stakeholders – from our supply chain partners to our
local communities – when making decisions.
It also means living by our belief that ethics and sustainability
gohand in hand, ensuring we uphold the highest standards in
ourbusiness and supply chains, treating everyone who comes
into contact with Ted Baker with respect, working collaboratively
to help our industry tread a lighter path. Indoing so, we will
realise our mission to ‘fashion a better future’.
We’ve organised this report around the four areas of our sustainability
programme – and we were pleased to have made good progress in
many areas, despite the ongoing challenges of the pandemic.
40
Our people
See how we are
building a company
that rewards our
people’s commitment
to our brand.
48
Our ethical sourcing
programme
Explore how we play
an active role in the
community working
with local partners
andschools.
47
Communities and
charity partnerships
Discover how we take
a proactive approach
to promoting positive
working conditions
and protecting
humanrights.
52
Planet
See the progress we
have made in lowering
our environmental
impact by using more
sustainable and
responsible materials.
Our values
In April 2021, we launched a new
set of global internal values, which
we developed using feedback
from team members across the
business. These values will
ultimately reflect our culture and
help us make meaningful choices
about the kind of company we
want to be:
We are AUTHENTIC
We are CURIOUS
We are COURAGEOUS
We are INCLUSIVE
We are KIND
SR GR FS
39TB | AR—’22
Caring for our people and planet
Highlights of the year
AUTHENTIC
We finished mapping our
nominated mills to strengthen our
ethical sourcing programme and
provide greater transparency.
We refreshed our sustainability
communications in our stores, with:
– new sustainable swing tickets
– in-store screen messages about
our sustainable sourcing targets.
Read more in our ethical sourcing
section on page 48
Read more in our planet
section on page 56
CURIOUS
We launched our new Thrive at
Tedlearning and communication
platform to encourage team
members globally to share
user-generated content and
learnfrom one another.
We partnered with external
diversity and inclusion experts,
TheUnmistakables, to run an
Inclusive Fashion workshop with
external speakers discussing
arange of inclusion topics.
We became a founding signatory
of UK waste recycling charity
WRAP’s Textile 2030 initiative
andtook part in the organisation’s
Textiles Action Week in October
2021 to help launch the initiative
toour customers.
Read more in our people
section on page 43
Read more in our people
section on page 45
Read more in our ethical sourcing
section on page 59
COURAGEOUS
We launched our first global
“Engage at Ted” survey to
encourage our team members
tospeak up and share their views
on working at Ted Baker.
As part of our membership of the
Textiles Exchange, we participated
in several working groups to help
accelerate the use of sustainable
fibres in our industry.
Read more in our people
section on page 42
Read more in our ethical sourcing
section on page 57
INCLUSIVE
We continued to develop our new
inclusion strategy, including running
Ted Listens sessions to give team
members the chance to share their
views and ideas.
We made progress on our gender
pay gap action plan including
introducing enhanced family leave
benefits, improving our approach
toflexible working and investing
inour female talent development
programme.
We launched a leadership and
mentoring programme with an
all-female cohort of 21 leaders
and21 more junior mentees.
Read more in our people
section on page 45
Read more in our people
section on page 46
Read more in our people
section on page 44
KIND
We trained 30 team members
inour UK office and retail business
to become Mental Health First
Aiders (MHFA).
We relaunched our Ted Gives
Backvolunteering programme to
encourage more team members to
support causes close to their hearts.
We launched a pilot of our new
Ted’s Diploma programme at a
West London secondary school.
Read more in our people
section on page 44
Read more in our communities
section on page 47
Read more in our communities
section on page 47
We made good progress across all areas of sustainability this
year,including setting ourselves ambitious new carbon emissions
targets, committing to reaching 100% absolute net zero in our
Scope1and 2 emissions and reducing Scope 3 emissions by 46%
by2030. The table below shares some of the highlights in other areas,
collated by the value they support:
40 TB | AR—’22
FASHIONING A BETTER FUTURE
2,224
Total number of global
TedBakerteam members
2
74
Total number of nationalities,
including 37in our London
head office alone
870
years of service!
We’re really proud that this year
(toend December 2021) wecollectively
celebrated 870years of service –
including 121team members hitting
service milestones. Four have been
with usfor 20 years, 33for10 years
and the rest forfive years.
Our people at a glance
Our people
Our people make Ted Baker – from our team in our head offices to team
members out in our stores creating a welcoming environment for our
customers. They deserve to work for a company that rewards their
commitment to our brand, supports their wellbeing and helps them develop
their careers and personal aspirations as part of the Ted Baker family.
White British and white other 62%
Black, Asian and minority ethnic 18 %
Not known 20%
Our ethnic breakdown
1
5 years 68%
10 years 27%
20 years 3%
25 years 2%
Length of service
Female 71%
Male 28%
Other/Not specified 1%
Our gender statistics
2
1 As at 29 January 2022 – UK only
2 As at 29 January 2022
SR GR FS
41TB | AR—’22
REMARKABLE RESILIENCE IN
ANOTHER BUMPY YEAR
There’s no doubt that this has been another
tough year, with ongoing disruption caused
bythe Covid pandemic continuing to create
uncertainty at our offices, stores and distribution
centres. Of course, the pandemic has also had
avery personal impact on our team members
and those closest to them, and this year we have
learned not to underestimate the human toll
onenergy and personal freedom it has caused.
Thiswill influence and shape our culture as we
define it in the year ahead.
In short, it is thanks to the hard work, optimism
and determination of our teams that we have
continued to evolve, set important new
sustainability targets and uphold high ethical
standards in our supply chains despite another
incredibly bumpy year in the global economy.
Itis their commitment to Ted Baker and our values
that mean we can begin to move beyondthe
pandemic’s immediate shadow while continuing
to transform our business in a way that will help
build back our unique brand energy.
HELPING OUR TEAMS GET TO KNOW
OUR VALUES
Launching our values in April 2021 allowed us
toinvest time exploring what they meant to each
team throughout the business. This included
running a six-week virtual Global Values Festival,
which kicked off with a filmed conversation
between our CEO Rachel Osborne and Chief
People Officer Peter Collyer talking about the
collaborative way we developed our values.
Rachel also shared her thoughts in a separate
video on the importance of belonging, which
seemed particularly pertinent given the
pandemic we had experienced.
We were pleased to see team members from
across the globe get involved, with 39% of the
total content uploaded throughout the festival
being created and uploaded by team members
themselves. Team members shared their
self-created content and experiences via our
new learning and communications platform,
Thrive, from photos of their teams displaying
thevalues in their own ways toarticles that they
found informative, to videos that have inspired
them and sharing ideas about how they
couldbring these values more into their
day-to-day lives.
We’ll continue to share and embed our
valuesinthe coming months and years and
already have plans to incorporate them
intoourjob descriptions, weekly team
communications andwebsite homepage.
42 TB | AR—’22
FASHIONING A BETTER FUTURE
INTRODUCING NEW PLATFORMS TO
SUPPORT OUR TEAMS
As part of creating a more consistent approach
to the way we support, nurture and listen to our
teams, we launched three new platforms this
year, which we will continue to invest in:
Engage at Ted – our employee engagement
platform, launched in September 2021
Thrive at Ted – our digital learning and
communication platform, launched in
April2021
Develop at Ted – our online hub for
teammembers to record and track
objectives, feedback and ratings
launchedinMarch 2021.
Hearing from our employees via
EngageatTed
What our team members think about working
forTed Baker matters to us. Their ideas and
feedback help us evolve our culture and
theirviews and ideas were integral in the
development of our new values.
Thanks to Engage at Ted we have, for the first
time, a global snapshot of how our team members
see our business. The survey revealed areas of
strength like peer relationships and goal setting,
demonstrating the care and support our teams
show one another. And it has highlighted ways
that we can improve, including how we reward
team members, support mental health and
wellbeing and help teams engage with our
purpose and mission. We weren’t surprised to
see these areas come up given the impact of
Covid and the challenges associated with our
growth strategy, and we know we have more
work to do.
While listening is important, we must also act
onwhat we hear. Since the survey closed,
ourExecutive and Senior Leadership Teams
have taken time to respond to feedback via the
Engage at Ted platform and the majority of our
business areas now have action plans in place
to address priorities.
We also look for opportunities for our Board
tohear from team members. Examples include
engagement with the UK employee forum
(known as the Fresh Eyes Forum) by our then
designated Non-Executive Director for
workforce engagement, Helena Feltham.
Topicsexplored included internal
communications, the company culture and the
newly launched values. Some of the Forum
representatives attended theBoard meeting
inNovember, to share their thoughts and
reflections on life at Ted and meetthe Directors.
As Remuneration Committee Chair, Andrew
Jennings hosted a similar session with the Fresh
EyesForum to discuss the Committee’s role
andthe importance of governance, controls
andrewardacross theorganisation.
Engage at Ted
survey highlights
September 2021 launched
aglobal employee engagement survey
78% response rate
16,000 comments to enable goal
setting and forward planning
SR GR FS
43TB | AR—’22
THRIVE AT TED
This is the new digital home for all our learning and development
resources and communications materials. It provides everything from
information to support new season launches and visual merchandising
to training modules and supporting materials for key annual events such
as Pride and Black History month. It also houses a range of support
materials, on subjects like mental health and pandemic-related
furloughing. We can even use the platform to run virtual events, such
asour ‘Time for Tea and a natter’ events which encouraged people
tomeet virtually and chat with team members from other parts of the
organisation who they may never have met previously.
This is our first global people system and while it contains all
ourkeytraining materials, we’ve designed it to allow our 2,000+ team
members to connect and learn from one another. They can do this by
sharing their own content, commenting on other people’s content and
tagging one another. For example, store-based team members share
styling tips and cross-sell opportunities for the new season’s collection.
Our retail teams areembracing it to thefull!
Thrive at Ted has proved invaluable throughout 2021 when some
ofourstores remained closed due to the pandemic. It has allowed
team members to stay up to date and engaged with the business.
And as we’ve geared up to reopen those stores, we’ve used the
platform to runa Retail Revival campaign, outlining how teams
could kickstart store opening activities and providing any training
they need in advance.
Since launching Thrive at Ted, the response from our team members
hasbeen incredible, with 87% of all team members being active
users and 450,000 content views. What’s more, 57% of all the
content now on the platform was created by team members, versus
43% from our Learning and Development team. Itwas also
nominated for an industryaward.
“ The interaction between
different people, countries
and departments creates
aglobal vision of a great
team that is more than ever
united in this great project
of development and
transformation.”
Sandra
Location Manager
DEVELOP AT TED
Develop at Ted is our new platform for
colleagues to use to record and track their
annual objectives. Individuals can also see
feedback from their manager and any other
team members and access their notes from their
regular quarterly check-ins with their manager.
This means that theassessment of an individual’s
performance isbuilt up over the course of the
year and notes and feedback arecaptured
atthe time, rather than relying onthem being
recalled at the endof the year. Thisresults
inafar more comprehensive, accurate and
co-created review that properly reflects the
performance of the individual.
Develop at Ted
highlights
4,359 conversations held for
1,411individuals
Over
4,800 feedback comments
given by over 550 people
2,132 user accounts enabled
44 TB | AR—’22
FASHIONING A BETTER FUTURE
DEVELOPMENT PROGRAMMES FOR
OUR LEADERS AND NEW STARTERS
Our transformation plan isn’t just about new
systems and platforms. We also want to make
sure our leaders have the skills and support they
need to help us grow. This year we launched
two leadership development programmes
sponsored by our CEO Rachel Osborne.
Thefirst programme for the Executive Team
covered a range of leadership attributes such
asaccountability, achieving results, managing
conflict and building trust, all critical components
in building a high performing Executive Team.
Our second programme is designed to support
acohort of 21 current Senior Leadership Team
members and includes a mentoring initiative with
a specific female-to-female focus. This initiative
partners female leaders with more junior female
team members, supporting female talent to move
towards more senior and more highly rewarded
roles. The response to date has been hugely well
received by those participating.
We also created a new online induction
pathway to help our new starters get to know
Ted Baker’s history and values and introduced
anin-person ‘New To Ted’ induction workshop,
where social distancing rules allowed. We also
updated our mandatory new starter training
modules – available via Thrive at Ted –
onequality, diversity and discrimination,
disciplinaries, grievances, appeals and
whistleblowing to help them understand
ourexpectations on these important issues.
Following the relaunch of our Apprenticeship
Levy-funded training via an online hub in 2020,
this year we were able to support 14 new
apprentices across our Finance, Commercial,
Retail and People teams. This is an important
offering which we want to further utilise in the
coming years.
We will continue to roll out new tools
andprocesses throughout 2022, including
anewmanagement development programme
currentlyunder exploration for both new
andexperienced managers.
CREATING A CULTURE OF WELLBEING
One of the best ways that we can demonstrate
our value to be kind is by making sure we support
our team members’ mental wellbeing. This year,
we created a dedicated wellbeing channel,
available on Thrive at Ted with more than
100mental healthand wellbeing resources.
These covered subjects like looking after your
wellbeing, dealing with anxiety at work,
supporting others struggling with burnout,
managing stress, dealingwith uncertainty
andfinancial wellbeing.
In 2021, we also worked with Mental Health
First Aid England to provide training for 30 team
members in our UK office and retail business
tobecome Mental Health First Aiders (MHFA).
Thistraining involved professionally-qualified
tutors explaining the stigma and discrimination
around mental health and depression and
enabled team members to identify, understand
and help someone who may be experiencing
amental health issue.
We will continue to work with this organisation
totrain a member of the People Team in
becoming an MHFA accredited trainer,
sowecan help even more team members
develop theirskills in this area and expand
formaltraining tomanagers of teams.
In our retail operations, we ran mental health
awareness training for all our UK location
managers togivethem the tools and skills they
need tosupport team members who may be
experiencing mental health problems.
We will continue to focus on wellbeing in 2022,
with the launch of our new wellbeing strategy.
We are designing this strategy in direct response
to feedback from our team members during our
first Engage at Ted survey, which told us we were
below benchmark. We also learned that team
members need more support when dealing with
work-related stress.
SR GR FS
45TB | AR—’22
CONTINUING TO DEVELOP OUR
INCLUSION STRATEGY
With a presence in over 50 countries and team
members from 74 nationalities, we’re proud to
call ourselves a truly global business. We want
everyone who works for us to feel like they
belong to a company where diversity and
inclusion are as natural as breathing. To make
this a reality we are continuing to develop our
inclusion strategy and this year asked our team
members to get involved.
Working with external diversity and inclusion
experts, The Unmistakables, we ran a series of
Ted Listens sessions, inviting team members from
around the world to share their views and ideas.
These sessions highlighted areas where we can
improve and while rolling out our strategy has
been slower than we would like due to the
pandemic and competing priorities in this time
frame, we don’t want to rush. We are keen to
create a thoughtful, well-informed approach
toinclusion. This takes time but the result will
include a clear three-year roadmap to help
uscreate cultural change.
In the meantime, we continue to look for ways
tokeep learning. For example, we ran an
Inclusive Fashion workshop in June 2021. This
featured talks from external speakers, including
an influencer with a gender fluid brand, an
ethical fashion activist, a fashion and lifestyle
creator and a TED talk speaker on non-binary
representation. The workshop was designed
tohelp expand our understanding of inclusion
andthe value of taking an inside-out approach.
It helped generate ideas on the future direction
we could take and reinforced the physical and
mental impact on people living their lives, when
inclusion was ignored. In all 75 team members
participated, asking really interesting questions
about inclusion and the importance of belonging.
In March 2021, we also signed the British Retail
Consortium’s Better Jobs Diversity and Inclusion
Charter. The goal was to create retail jobs that
are more productive, higher paid, fit for the
futureand more rewarding for the retail
workforce, something we feel passionately
about at Ted Baker.
74
Nationalities
atTed Baker
46 TB | AR—’22
FASHIONING A BETTER FUTURE
MAKING TED BAKER A REWARDING
PLACE TO WORK
We have taken some important steps in the
pastfew years to create a more consistent
approach to our reward and benefits
programme, and wecontinued to focus
ourattention on this issue during 2021.
For example, we launched a new corporate
bonus scheme that aligns an individual’s reward
with both the Company’s financial performance
and their performance against personal
objectives. While we did not achieve the
financialobjectives element of the scheme,
wedid make a payment linked to performance.
This rewarded team members on the achievement
of their personal objectives part of the scheme.
We re-launched our Sharesave scheme for UK
team members, giving them the ability to save
money each month that they can then use three
years later to buy Ted Baker shares. More than
100 eligible team members (8% of the team)
signed up to the scheme in the first year.
Having rolled out our career-levelling framework
in 2020, we have now externally benchmarked
our UK salaries and are using this information
toensure our pay decisions are market-aligned,
fair and equitable. We have also developed
market-aligned pay frameworks for our retail
store teams.
Following consultation with our UK and
international teams, we launched a new retail
bonus scheme in 2022, which is linked to store
revenue targets. The scheme gives team
members the opportunity to earn more,
asandwhen those targets are exceeded.
GENDER PAY GAP REPORT
As part of our commitment to reducing
thegender pay gap we have:
Signed the British Retail Consortium’s
Better Jobs D&I Charter – we commit
to“increase diversity in the retail
workforce and lead the way to
becoming more inclusive employers”
Adopted ‘inclusive’ as one of our new
company values launched in April 2021
Rolled out our new inclusion strategy.
Through this, wewill grow Ted Baker as
a modern, representative fashion brand,
that creates belonging and invites
people inby giving everyone a voice.
Knock-on effect of Covid on our
genderpay gap
The pandemic has held back our efforts
toreduce the gap. As a result, our headline
mean and median gender pay gap figures
have increased from our previous reporting
years. Our mean gender pay gap at
5April 2021 was 26.8% – although this
calculation only accounts for 60% of
ouremployees because many were
furloughed at the reporting date.
“ We are keen to create a thoughtful,
transparent and well-informed
approachto inclusion.”
Peter Collyer
Chief People Officer
We’ve also introduced new benefits and
revisedsome of our existing benefits policies.
Forexample, we have:
Introduced a new KitTED policy in our Retail
business, giving our retail and wholesale
team members free kit to wear in-store
We introduced a new family leave policy
providing much enhanced maternity,
adoption and paternity leave payments.
Thisalso reduced the time someone must
work at Ted Baker before they are eligible
forenhanced family leave. We have also
introduced paid leave for any team member
if they or their partner suffers pregnancy loss.
This is over and above any required
medicalperiod.
SR GR FS
47TB | AR—’22
Communities and charitypartnerships
We have played an active role in the local community for many
years, creating education-focused challenges, masterclasses,
talksand presentations for local partners and schools.
LAUNCHING TED’S DIPLOMA
As the world begins to move beyond the
immediate impact of the pandemic, we’ve
alsostarted to get back to work on projects
thatsupport education and young people.
Forexample, in early 2022, we launched
ournew Ted’s Diploma and ran a pilot with
120students at a West London Free School.
The Diploma helps secondary school
studentsstudying for their GCSEs get a better
understanding of what it’s like to work in fashion
retail and the kinds of subjects and further
education they’d need for a career in our
industry. We designed the programme with help
from Camden Council’s STEAM Commission
and it includes a series of videos and challenges.
Examples include our Sustainability challenge,
which was to design a sustainable product,
focusing on considerations such as material
type,longevity, location of production and what
production techniques would need to be used.
Our design challenge involved creating amood-
board for Ted Baker’s S/S ’22 collection inspired
by the 1970s.
Once students have completed the tasks,
theyreceive a Ted’s Diploma certificate.
TED GIVES BACK
All team members who work at our head office
in London and our distribution centre in Derby
are entitled to a day off each year to take part
inour volunteering programme Ted Gives Back.
We re-launched the programme in early 2022
to encourage more people to get involved.
Inthe past, anyone taking part in Ted Gives
Back could only volunteer for our nominated
charity partner. However, we recognise that
volunteering is a deeply personal choice,
sowe’ve expanded our charity partner list to
include suggested causes near both offices.
Butthese are only suggestions, so we’re also
giving participants the option to share their skills
and knowledge with a cause close to their hearts.
“ The content for the
Ted’sDiploma is excellent.
Thebroad range of resources
and authentic challenge
assignments will enable
young people to experience
a diverse range of careers
atTed Baker/inthe fashion
industry. The excellent design
briefs will enable young
people to develop business
ready skills and attributes –
supported by expert insights
and criteria from Ted Baker
specialists.”
Richard Donnelly
STEAM Schools Manager
While Covid continued to affect some of this work, we were able to keep
adapting to make sure we keep supporting our partners.
81
Boxes of warm
clothing sent
toCare4Calais
forrefugees
entering the UK
500
Pairs of socks
donated to the
C4WS Homeless
project
UBB
Kitchen equipment
and food from the
Ugly Brown Building
donated to the social
enterprise Cook
forGood for the
Peabody Estate
48 TB | AR—’22
FASHIONING A BETTER FUTURE
Our ethical sourcing programme
We have a responsibility to look after everyone who creates, makes and wears
our products. That means taking a proactive approach in promoting positive
working conditions and protecting human rights. And it means working with
like-minded partners who share our commitment to maintaining safe and fair
labour practices and minimising their impact on the environment.
>160 Factories
19 Countries
approx.
40,000 People
>65% Are female
7,000 Migrant workers
Our top sourcing territories are:
China
Turkey
India
UK
Portugal
Our global supply chain
We work in a complex global supply chain that affects the lives of thousands
of people around the world.
SR GR FS
49TB | AR—’22
STAYING FOCUSED ON STANDARDS
IN A CHALLENGING YEAR
Our Ethical Code of Conduct and auditing
programme are important ways in which we
canbe sure our supply partners meet our
expectations. We ask all our suppliers to adhere
to and implement our Code, which outlines the
minimum standards for safe, fair and decent
workthat we demand from our suppliers.
We also expect any supplier who makes
Ted Baker products to conduct third-party
annual ethical audits of their factories and
processes, to ensure they keep improving their
practices and processes so that their standards
stay up to scratch.
Despite the challenges, we have continued
toraise awareness on key supply chain issues
this year, including introducing mandatory
Modern Slavery training for all our team
members. Available via our Thrive at Ted
platform, it provides guidance on how to identify
the potential signs of slavery and highlights the
role everyone can play preventing it. We also
expect suppliers and new starters at Ted Baker
tocomplete the training as part of our on-
boarding process.
In 2022, we intend to roll out purchasing
practice guidance to all our Sourcing and
Production teams to help them understand the
implications their decisions have on factory
workers. This will cover areas such as how
changes made at product sampling stage
couldpotentially adversely affect working
hours.This means we need to give factories
clear forecasting so they have an earlier and
better understanding of our plans. And since
it’sessential that we stay in regular touch with
oursuppliers, we look for ways in which we
canunderstand each other better to prevent
anydelays.
OUR APPROACH TO ETHICS
ANDCOMPLIANCE
We see ethics and sustainability as
apartnership, helping us develop better
waysofworking and more responsible
businesspractices as we grow. That’s why
weask our sourcing partners and suppliers
toagree to meetTed Baker’s five minimum
ethical and sustainability requirements:
1. Agree and adhere to Ted Baker’s
EthicalCode of Conduct, Animal Welfare
and Responsible Materials Policy, and
Vulnerable Workers Policy.
2. Provide a third-party ethical audit or
certification every 12 months for production
sites. Acceptable standards are: SA8000,
SMETA, BSCI.
1
3. Address any non-compliances found in
theaudit in a timely and open manner.
Workon monitoring, remediation or
buildingcapacity, as requested.
2
4. Provide information on, or certification of,
sustainable materials and environmental
performance, as requested.
5. Be transparent with us
3
and agree to appear
in our six-monthly factory list and provide
details of subcontractors and homeworkers.
Our Ethics and Sustainability Team works
closelywith our Sourcing, Production and
Buyingdepartments to ensure all potential new
suppliers go through our rigorous screening
process. Checking that suppliers adhere to our
Ethical Code of Conduct is also an integral part
of our on-boarding process.
OUR ETHICS AND
COMPLIANCEPOLICIES
We publish our key ethics and compliance
policies online at tedbaker.com, including:
Ted Baker’s Ethical Code of Conduct:
outlines all commitments we require of
ourpartners and factories, based on
international conventions including The
Ethical Trading Initiative Base Code and
The United Nations Universal Declaration
of Human Rights and the Acts. We review
our Code on a regular basis to ensure it is
effective and in line with regulations.
Vulnerable Workers Policy: sets the
standard to protect the most vulnerable
people in our supply chain including
migrant workers, homeworkers, children
and young people, as well as temporary,
casual and agency workers.
Third-Party Policy: outlines our
minimumrequirements for third-party
partners for ethical standards and
sustainable fibre sourcing.
Animal Welfare & Responsible
Materials Policy: underpins our
commitment to responsible sourcing and
fair treatment of animals and includes our
list of banned and restricted materials.
1 SMETA audits can be either 2-pillar (labour and health and safety) or 4-pillar (labour, health and safety, environment and business ethics).
2 All tanneries must complete a Tannery Profile Form and certain high-risk countries are subject to additional requirements.
3 Any subcontractors and/or homeworker information must be disclosed.
50 TB | AR—’22
FASHIONING A BETTER FUTURE
MONITORING AND ADDRESSING
OUR SUPPLY CHAIN RISKS
Complex supply chains come with inherent
problems and we face key issues in two of
ourlargest sourcing countries. The use of
unauthorised subcontractors is a significant
riskinour supply chain, so we take extra care
toreview subcontractor sites to ensure they meet
our ethical and sustainability requirements.
Wedefine a subcontractor site as any facility
ordomestic premises (homeworkers) making
goods or carrying out manufacturing processes
outside the principal factory that supplies
Ted Baker directly. In Turkey, the use of multiple
subcontractors is a key challenge.
To ensure such visibility, in 2020 we engaged
athird-party to conduct an ethical audit for all
sites thatperform cutting, stitching and finishing.
In2021, we continued to map subcontracting
units undertaking all secondary processes,
whichincluded homeworking, to ensure we
havefurther visibility of this area of our supply
chain. We continue to request updated
information on our subcontractors annually to
gain further visibility throughout oursupply chain,
and minimise risk.
Covid has continued to affect our ability to
carryout audits this year, although we remain
committed to this auditing process and review
the situation on a factory-by-factory basis.
Forexample, we have offered some factories
agrace period between audits to keep
workersand auditors safe during the pandemic.
We have also faced ongoing delays in training
and documentation. For example, many
organisations have put regular first aid training
for their employees on hold. Another example
isthe struggle to get copies of documents from
governing bodies following inspections – things
like building permits and fire risk assessments.
In May 2021, we joined Sedex, an organisation
that provides a technology platform, tools and
data and works with businesses to improve
working conditions and responsible sourcing
practices within supply chains. As a member we
are now able to centralise the way we collect
audit information, giving us greater insights into
systemic issues.
Taking a tough stance on forced labour
Forced labour is a particular risk in garment
industry supply chains and Ted Baker continues
to have azero-tolerance policy on this. This is
clearly stated in our Ethical Code of Conduct,
and the independent third-party ethical audits
assess factories on our behalf to ensure they are
not using forced labour.
Our Ethics and Sustainability Team continues
tomonitor all ongoing global claims of forced
labour in our sourcing countries that are
considered critically high risk. This includes
continuing our deep dive analysis of all
manufacturing units and a mapping exercise
across each Tier involved in the production
process, to ensure we are acting with the utmost
due diligence for the protection of workers.
We have not found any evidence of forced
labour in our supply chain this year and we
continue to monitor our factories and mills closely
and work with our trusted suppliers and
third-party partners. Should we discover such
practices, wewould take immediate action and
communicate what we have done openly with
our stakeholders. We are currently documenting
our remediation policy, which we intend to
publish later in 2022.
SR GR FS
51TB | AR—’22
SHARING INFORMATION ABOUT
OURSUPPLY CHAIN
Understanding where and how Ted Baker
products are made is an essential part of our
ethical sourcing programme and we want to
make sure that we share that information with
ourstakeholders.
We update our Tier 1 factory list every six
months and publish it on our website. In 2021,
we started including our licence partners’
factories. We also supply this information to the
Open Apparel Registry (OAR) – a database
ofglobal apparel factories listed in one central,
open-source map. This year we also added this
map, which includes our Tier 1 and Licensee
factories, to our own website. We will aim to
add our unnominated cotton mills by the end
of2022 and begin mapping our Tier 2 factories
toincrease the visibility of our supply chain.
Inthe future, we will also look to add more data
tothe map, such as product type, number of
workers and parent company.
In 2021, we finished mapping the subcontractor
sites that our Tier 1 factories use, which went
beyond cut, make and trim processes to include
homeworkers. This provides us with much greater
visibility across our supply chain. Wewill
continue to monitor all our subcontractors
regularly to ensure we have the most up-to-
dateinformation.
In the future, we aim to disclose more information
about subcontractors in our supply chain.
Weare developing a subcontractor policy
tocreate a consistent standard and clear
process to mitigate the risk of unauthorised
subcontracting, which we aim to publish later
in2022. We also plan to map further down
oursupply chain to build a clear picture of the
suppliers who provide components, hardware,
trims and fabric.
MODERN SLAVERY
STATEMENT
We are committed to ensuring
no modern slavery exists in our
business or our value chain and
publish our Modern Slavery
statement annually to reflect the
risks within the jurisdictions where
we operate today and may
work in the future. Before we
consider entering any new
territory, our Ethics and
Sustainability team conducts
acomprehensive risk review.
Our Modern Slavery
statementis available at
tedbakerplc.com.
52 TB | AR—’22
FASHIONING A BETTER FUTURE
Our planet
Our carbon targets
In 2021, we took a crucial step committing ourselves to reach
100%absolute net zero inour Scope 1 and 2 emissions and
reducingScope 3 emissions by 46% by 2030, using2019 as a baseline.
Our planet at a glance
PROGRESS
50%
Recycled content for all
ofour polythene bags
PROGRESS
26%
Sustainable materials
in all our collections
PROGRESS
65%
Leather from LWG
orequivalent
certified tanneries
PROGRESS
11 %
of our polyester
recycled
PROGRESS
60%
of our cotton is organic, recycled
or Better Cotton-certified cotton
TARGET
100%
Renewable
energy at all sites
(Scope 1&2)
TARGET
30%
road freight
tobe electric
(Scope 3)
TARGET
60%
of our factories to use
renewable energy
(Scope 3)
Single-use packaging, fast fashion and wastefulness have all left their mark on our
planet. We have a responsibility to help address these issues, by lowering our own
environmental impact, incorporating more sustainable and responsible materials
into our collections and carefully managing the materials we use and the energy
we buy. We have made some good progress in recent years. For example, all of
our digital sales and retail bags are now made with FSC paper packaging.
SR GR FS
53TB | AR—’22
Scope 1 0.4k
Scope 2 4.0k
Scope 3 119.0k
Total 123.4k
Upstream T&D 1.2k
Business travel 1.3k
Waste 2.6k
Employee commuting 2.8k
Electricity 4.0k
Capital goods 7.0k
Use of sold products 16.8k
Other PG&S 17.2k
Manufacturing 17.0k
Textiles 50.0k
Our baseline carbon footprint
(
2019) tCO
₂
e
Scope 3 impacts (
tCO
2
e)
Textiles 50.0k
Cotton 3.3k
Polyester 7.5k
Leather 9.0k
Wool 26.0k
Other PG&S 17.2k
Manufacturing 17.0k
Manufacturing of finished goods inclusive of:
waste; energy; machinery; processes.
Purchased goods and services: extraction,
production and transportation of goods and
services purchased of acquired.
Raw materials has the largest emissions impact.
Animal products make up
68% of textile emissions.
Out of all the textiles used by Ted Baker, wool
and leather are the most emissions intensive.
Animal products are the most emissions
intensive due to the animal rearing process
which contributes CO
2
, methane, and other
greenhouse gases to the atmosphere.
These textiles have other harmful impacts,
for example eutrophication of water.
A CLIMATE STRATEGY FOR NET ZERO
Reducing our carbon and waste footprint is
anobvious and pressing challenge and we’ve
continued to work with experts at Carbon
Intelligence to develop our climate strategy,
focusing on areas we can directly influence.
In 2021, we took a crucial step, committing
ourselves to reach 100% absolute net zero
inourScope 1 and 2 emissions and reducing
Scope 3 emissions by 46% by 2030, using
2019 as a baseline, being the most recent
‘normal’ year of trading.
To achieve this, we have also set a series of
supporting targets to reduce our emissions:
100% renewable energy across all our
global sites
30% of all our road freight to be transported
via electric vehicles
60% of the factories our suppliers work with
are to be powered by renewable energy
Embed more sustainable materials and
manufacturing practices in our raw material
and product specifications.
Our climate strategy has been submitted to
theScience Based Targets initiative awaiting
approval. Once approved, this gives us
confidence that we have put the right practices
and processes in place across Ted Baker to
reduce our carbon footprint.
While our strategy gives us a roadmap
betweennow and 2030, we will need to
ensurewe track and report on our progress
against our targets. Our new internal
CarbonSteering Group will help us do that.
TheGroup’s membership is made up of leaders
from across Ted Baker who are now responsible
for delivering our climate strategy. They are also
individually responsible for managing and
addressing climate change risks in their
individual businesses.
And since no one company can address climate
change on its own, we have also signed up
tothe British Retail Consortium’s (BRC) Climate
Action Roadmap, which aims to decarbonise
theretail sector by 2040.
Our baseline carbon footprint
Our Scope 1 and 2 emissions make up just
2%or our entire emissions. By far our biggest
carbon challenges lie in our supply chain,
since97% of all our emissions are classed
asScope 3. We know that the fibres we use
tomake our collections represent our biggest
environmental footprint.
We were able to see exactly howbigby
mapping our baseline carbon emissions. This
process showed us that 41% of our Scope 3
emissions come from the materials we use.
Italsoshowed that animal products make up
68% of our textiles emissions and that wool and
leather are Ted Baker’s most emissions-intensive
materials. Inthe case of leather, this is due to
theintensive cattle ranching associated with
themeat industry, from which all our leather
isaby-product.
While our focus for 2022 was on setting the
baselines for reporting against our new targets,
we did begin to make some progress, with
someearly initiatives to reduce our Scope 1
and2 emissions. One key initiative is that, from
calendar year 2022, all new company cars
willbe hybrid vehicles.
Our focus for 2023: reporting against
ourtargets
In FY23, we want to ensure we have the
processes in place to measure our emissions
accurately. We are working across all key
business areas to collate and monitor the data,
from recording energy usage in stores for
Scopes 1 and 2, to mapping all our transport
and logistics data for Scope 3.
Scope 1 %
Gas 0.3
Scope 2
Electricity 2.9
Scope 3
Textiles (including wool, leather, polyester and cotton) 41.1
Other purchased goods and services 14.0
Manufacturing 13.8
Use of sold products 13.7
Capital goods 6.1
Employee commuting 2.3
Waste generated in operations 2.1
Business travel 1.1
Upstream transportation and distribution 1.1
Packaging 1.0
Fuel and energy-related activities
(notincludedin Scopes 1 or 2)
0.4
End of life treatment of sold products 0.2
54 TB | AR—’22
FASHIONING A BETTER FUTURE
FY22 ENERGY AND CARBON STATEMENT
This statement has been prepared in accordance with our regulatory obligation to report greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions pursuant to the
Companies (Directors’ Report) and Limited Liability Partnerships (Energy and Carbon Report) Regulations 2018, which implement the government’s
policy on Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting.
During the reporting period 1 February 2021 to 31 January 2022, our measured Scope 1 and 2 emissions (location-based) totalled 3,267 tCO
2
e.
Thiscomprised:
FY22 FY21 FY20
Scope UK Rest of world Total UK Rest of world Total Total
1 220 97 318 141 120 261 369
2 – Location-based 1,082 1,867 2,949 797 1,225 2,022 3,553
2 – Market-based 0 2,194 2,194 0 1,328 1,328 3,553
Total Scope 1 & 2 – location-based 1,303 1,964 3,267 938 1,345 2,283 3,921
Total Scope 1 & 2 – market-based 220 2,291 2,512 141 1,448 1,589 3,921
Scope 1 & 2 intensity – market-based 0.00000777
tCO
2
e/£rev
0.001
CO
2
e/sq f t
0.07
CO
2
e/sq f t
0.004
CO
2
e/sq f t
0.009
CO
2
e/sq f t
Scope 3 2, 7 74 N/A N/A 2,600 149
Overall, our Scope 1 and 2 emissions (market-based) have increased by 58% in the year. The impact of Covid restrictions has meant that stores
and concessions have been open for business across the world, increasing worldwide energy consumption.
We have opted for measuring our intensity impact to tCO
2
e per £ revenue on account of this being more accurate than the global floor
spacemetric.
Our measured Scope 3 emissions totalled 2,774 tCO
2
e. Our material contributions are through Ted Baker concessions and fuel- and energy-
relatedactivities.
During the year our total fuel (natural gas) and electricity consumption (not including concessions) totalled 9,888 MWh. The split between fuel
andelectricity consumption is shown in the next table.
FY22 FY21 FY20
Energy consumption (MWh) UK Rest of world Total UK Rest of world Total Total
Electricity – not concessions
5,268 4,619 9,888 3,495 3,151 6,646 11, 410
Fuels
1
984 48 1,032 766 48 814 1,728
1 Natural gas
Methodology
We quantify and report our organisational GHG emissions in line with the World Resources Institute’s Greenhouse Gas Protocol Corporate
Accounting and Reporting Standard and in line with the Scope 2 Guidance. We consolidate our organisational boundary according to the
operational control approach, which includes all our Ted Baker sites. All concession and joint venture (JV) sites are reported under Scope 3.
TheGHG sources that constituted our operational boundary for the year are:
Scope 1: Natural gas, owned or leased vehicle mileage, refrigerants
Scope 2: Location- and market-based electricity consumption
Scope 3: Business travel, fuel-and energy-related activities (FERA), electricity from concession/JV sites.
In some cases, where data is missing, values have been estimated using either extrapolation of available data or data from the previous year
asaproxy.
The Scope 2 Guidance requires that we quantify and report Scope 2 emissions according to two different methodologies (dual reporting):
(i) The location-based method, using average emissions factors for the country in which the reported operations take place, and
(ii) The market-based method, which uses the actual emissions factors of the energy procured.
SR GR FS
55TB | AR—’22
RESPONSIBLE MATERIALS
While the materials we use represent
asignificant part of our carbon footprint,
theycan also have an impact on the
environmentin other ways. This might be
causedby using non-renewable oil sources
toproduce synthetics like polyester or the
intensive water and chemicals needed to
manufacture conventional cotton. It can also
include the risk of deforestation by the cattle
industry where our leather is a by-product.
Thereality is every material has the potential
tocreate an adverse environmental effect
ifitisnot sourced responsibly.
Addressing all these areas is a huge challenge
for our whole industry. But it is a challenge that
Ted Baker is tackling head on with a commitment
to switch to 100% more sustainable materials in
all our collections by 2030.
We made excellent progress this year, reaching
26% more sustainable materials overall. This is
9%higher than 2020 and would not have been
possible without the support of many of our
departments including our Design, Production,
Sustainability, Sourcing and Buying teams.
While we are delighted with this achievement,
our work to source sustainable cotton took
asubstantial knock this year, with the amount
wewere able to source falling to 60%. This
isdown from 69% in 2020 and short of our
internal 2021 interim target of 75%, which
wesetto keep us on track to achieve 100%
by2024. There are a number of reasons for
thisdecline, which we outline on in our cotton
section on page 57. We also provide more
detail on progress against specific targets in our
key materials categories in their relevant section.
TASK FORCE ON CLIMATE-RELATED
FINANCIAL DISCLOSURES
We are at an early stage of considering the
climate-related risks that we face, however our
initial view is that the most material climate-
related risks are likely to be in relation to:
Impact of climate change, such as higher
temperatures and water shortages, on the
price and availability of raw materials, such
as cotton, on which we are very dependent
Increased demands from customers for more
sustainable clothing, which is both a risk
andopportunity – a risk if our sustainability
performance is not seen to live up to our
customers’ aspirations and an opportunity,
ifour sustainability performance is seen
tolead our peers.
Our sustainability strategy is discussed on
pages52-59.
We have set out our progress against the
TCFDguidance and compliance, on a comply
or explain basis, with Listing Rule 9.8.6(8)
atpage170.
PROGRESS AGAINST OUR 2030 SUSTAINABLE MATERIALS TARGET
Interim target
2022
% sustainable
2021
% sustainable
2020
% sustainable
By 2030, we will switch to 100% more sustainable
materials in all our collections 26 17 12
COTTON
Interim target
2022
% sustainable
2021
% sustainable
2020
% sustainable
100% of our cotton is organic, recycled or
BetterCotton certified cotton by 2024 60 69 51
RECYCLED POLYESTER
Interim target
2022
% sustainable
2021
% sustainable
2020
% sustainable
100% of our polyester to be recycled by 2030 11 3 3
LEATHER
Interim target
2022
% sustainable
2021
% sustainable
2020
% sustainable
100% of our leather to come from LWG or
equivalent certified tanneries by 2025. 65 44 26
56 TB | AR—’22
FASHIONING A BETTER FUTURE
HELPING OUR CUSTOMERS MAKE BETTER CHOICES
We want to make it as easy as possible for our customers to shop
moresustainably. At the same time, countries like the UK have
introduced new legislation to hold businesses to account on
misleadingenvironmental claims.
To address both, we refreshed our sustainability messaging across
all our communication channels in 2021, including adding
sustainable swing tickets (certified by the Forest Stewardship
Council – FSC) to all our cotton, wool and polyester products that
contain 50% or more sustainable alternatives, such as recycled
polyester. We also added key messages about our sustainable
sourcing targets to our in-store screens and switched all our retail
bags and digital sales boxes to 100% FSC-certified and
recyclablecardboard.
To equip our retail teams with the knowledge to promote these
sustainable attributes to our customers, we introduced retail
sustainability product knowledge packs in 2021, which are shared
on amonthly basis to the team for any new styles launching.
To continue raising customer awareness of Ted Baker’s ‘Sustainable
Shop’, formerly known as the ‘Conscious Shop’, launched in 2020,
we added new badges to products that contain 50% or more
responsibly sourced materials. This shows customers that these
products were made using smaller quantities of water, energy
orchemicals.
And we continue to add new styles to our collection made from
responsibly sourced materials. For example, we launched our new
puffer bag range made with 100% recycled polyester, backed by
our first sustainable product marketing campaign to our customers
in2021.
In January 2022 we launched our athleisure and magnolia-print
branded products, made with sustainable materials like organic
cotton and recycled nylon. We expect to launch more sustainable
product campaigns later in the year.
“ We continue to add new styles to our collection made
from responsibly sourced materials, for example our
athleisure and magnolia-print branded products,
madewith sustainable materials like organic cotton
and recycled nylon.”
Cat Lee
Ethics, Communities and Sustainability Lead
SR GR FS
57TB | AR—’22
60%
Sustainable cotton
used in 2022
Cotton
Cotton follows an enormously complex journey
from farm to shop floor, passing through many
stages in the supply chain before it is sold as
aproduct.
In 2021, Ted Baker sourced 926 tonnes of
cotton, representing 27% of all the materials
weused in the year. Given that cotton is our
mostused material, it is essential we stay vigilant
to thepossibility of forced labour being used in
oursupply chain. We must also minimise our
reliance on conventional cotton cultivation, which
requires large quantities of water and chemicals.
We are proud of our track record in this area,
having been a member of the Better Cotton
Initiative (BCI) since 2016. BCI is a non-profit
organisation that promotes better standards in
cotton farming and practices. Over the past six
years we have steadily increased the quantity
ofBetter Cotton – the certified cotton we use in
our collections.
However, that quantity fell to 60% this year
(versus 69% in 2020) and is short of the 75%
target we’d set ourselves. This is disappointing
and the fact that we sourced 7%more cotton
than we had originally planned is due, in part,
toan increased use of cotton canvas within
ouraccessories collections.
Sourcing Better Cotton-certified cotton remains
incredibly important if we are going to achieve
our goal to source 100% more sustainable
cotton by 2024. So this year we will be working
closely with our suppliers to set Better Cotton-
certified cotton as a minimum requirement for
2022, delivering training in sourcing Better
Cotton and how they can submit the correct
certification, known as Better Cotton Claim Units
(BCCUs). We also intend to work with our mills
to help spot potential sourcing challenges earlier
on in the production process. We intend to do
this through organising regular check-in meetings
and taking a proactive approach to collecting
BCCUs on a quarterly basis.
Despite these challenges, we increased
theuseof organic cottons in our products
to26%in2021 – up from just 3% in 2020.
Thiswasthanksto the success of our Icon
Menswear Jersey range, made with 100%
organic cotton, as well as the fact that we
makethe majority of our socks with 50% or
moreorganic cotton. InNovember 2021,
wealso introduced linings on our accessories
made with 35% organic cotton.
In 2022, we plan to start training our product
teams on how to source in-conversion cotton
sothat we can begin to incorporate it into our
future collections. We are also a participant in
Textile Exchange’s (TE) organic cotton round
table so we can work with our industry peers
tohelp the organic industry grow.
58 TB | AR—’22
FASHIONING A BETTER FUTURE
WORKING WITH OTHERS TO
ACHIEVE OUR SUSTAINABLE
MATERIALS GOALS
To ensure the integrity of the sustainable
fibres we buy, we collect industry best
practice certification from our suppliers.
We are also exploring options to certify
our own products against sustainable
fibrestandards so that we can be more
transparent with our customers.
We are also a member of the global
non-profit organisation Textile Exchange
(TE) which connects brands, manufacturers
and retailers with the aim of reducing GHG
emissions from textile fibre and material
production by 45% by 2030. As part of
our membership, we participate on
working groups to help accelerate the
useof sustainable fibres in our industry.
Every year, Ted Baker takes part in
TE’sMaterial Change Index (MCI), the
largest peer-to-peer comparison initiative
in the textile industry. It tracks the textile
sector’s progress towardsmore sustainable
sourcing, as well as alignment with global
efforts like the transition toa circular
economy. More than 190 fashion and
textile brands take part. Companies are
scored in performance bands as either
aparticipant, developing, establishing,
maturing, or leading performance once
they have completed the survey.
We are proud of our progress with
ourMCI performance. After gaining
a‘participant’ score in2020, Ted Baker
was scored in the ‘maturing performance’
band in 2021. TE only awards this banding
level to companies that are pioneering
industry transformation with sustainability.
By taking part in the MCI, Ted Baker
candemonstrate our commitment to
transparency and continuous improvement
around our materials sourcing strategy.
Introducing lower-impact styles and
recycledcotton
There are other ways we can address cotton’s
environmental impact. For example, we’re
planning to increase the quantity of low-impact
denim washes from Jeanologia – which uses
smaller quantities of water and chemicals –
inour denim ranges.
Recycled polyester
In all, 11% of the polyester in our collections
came from recycled sources in 2021. This is 8%
higher than 2020, and thanks to our new puffer
bag range, made with 100% recycled polyester.
While we’re pleased with this growth, we still
have plenty of work to do. In 2022, we will
continue to look for ways to switch key product
groups over to recycled polyester. We’ve also
joined the TE recycled polyester round table,
tohelp accelerate industry-wide uptake.
Theround table aims to leverage industry
expertise by bringing together participation
frombusinesses, government, civil society
anddevelopment partners in the sourcing
ofrecycledpolyester.
Leather
This year, 65% of the leather in our products
came from LWG-certified tanneries. This is up
from 26% in 2020, putting us well on track to
hit100% by 2025. Of the tanneries we work
with, 43% received a gold score in their LWG
audit – indicating that they use the best available
methods in water, chemical and waste
management. We achieved this by working
closely with our accessories and footwear
suppliers to switch to LWG-audited tanneries
where possible and in the future we will continue
topush this as a minimum expectation.
In 2021, we used recycled leather for the first
time, incorporating it into selected footwear
styles. Over the next year we will continue to
increase the amount we use throughout our
accessories and footwear products, helping
toensure more of this valuable material does
notend up in landfill.
Tracing the source of our leather
We need to understand where our leather
comes from in order to assure ourselves on key
ethical issues. So, as well as our 2025 LWG
target, we’ve set ourselves a 2030 target to
ensure that 100% of the leather we use in our
products can be traced back to raw hide origin.
In 2019 we mapped all finishing tanneries that
our Tier 1 suppliers worked with and, since 2021,
have collected key information from new finishing
tanneries used for our products each season.
We already collect traceability information for
every tannery site that our suppliers work with.
InBrazil, the tanneries that our suppliers use
musthave an active two-year LWG audit as
aminimum requirement.
As part of the LWG audit protocol, tanners are
assessed on the level of traceability they have
ofthe raw material they purchase. Points are
awarded in the audit based on the traceability
systems a tanner has in place, which could be
either through the physical marking of a hide
orhaving documentation of origin in place.
Ted Baker will continue to make a high
traceability score a preference in a tannery’s
LWG audit. In 2022, the LWG will be
introducing mandatory traceability within its
audit protocol, to be gradually phased in for
tanners. We see this as a good first step in
working with tanners to improve traceability
wherever possible.
65%
Leather from
LWG sources
SR GR FS
59TB | AR—’22
Policy target Progress in 2021
Eliminate sourcing from endangered
specieshabitats and ancient and
endangered forests by 2022
Eliminate sourcing from controversial
suppliers (e.g. illegal logging or areas
reserved for indigenous peoples)
In 2020 we partnered with non-profit
organisation Canopy and committed to two
ofitspolicies
In 2022 we will map all of our Tier 4 fibre
producers used for MMCF fibres to eliminate
Canopy Red Shirt Producers, using the Canopy
Hot Button Report
Use only FSC-certified paper and
packaging for all branded and
unbrandedproducts
In 2021 we switched all digital sales boxes
andretail bags to be made with FSC paper
packaging. All of our new sustainable swing
tickets are also made with FSC paper
Preference for paper/packaging with
high-recycled content, reaching an
overall recycled fibre content in our
paper/packaging of at least 50%
average by 2024
In 2021 we switched our digital sales boxes tobe
made with FSC and recycled paper packaging.
The recycled content is 89%
All polythene bags must contain
aminimum of 50% post-consumer
recycled content
All polythene bags must contain
100%post-consumer recycled
contentby 2025
In 2021 we nominated a packaging supplier
forall of our polythene bags, which contain
50%recycled content
All plastic transit hangers need to be
made from a minimum of 50% post-
consumer recycled plastic
This year we will finalise our nominated supplier
for transit hangers, from which our suppliers will
sourceplastic transit hangers withaminimum of
50% post-consumer plastic
An update on using alpaca wool in
ourproducts
Ted Baker is committed to promoting the humane
and responsible treatment of animals, based on
the internationally recognised ‘Five Freedoms
and Provisions of Animal Welfare’.
As part of our Animal Welfare & Responsible
Materials Policy, launched in 2020, we banned
the use of conventional alpaca in our collections
due to documented concerns over animal
cruelty. In May 2021, the TE developed the
Responsible Alpaca Standard (RAS) to address
these concerns and ensure that the land where
alpacas graze is managed sustainably. In light
ofthis new standard, we have decided to allow
sourcing of RAS-certified alpaca. We work
closely with our suppliers to ensure they are
certified and continue to stress that conventional
alpaca remains a banned material in our
supplychain.
We also introduced a new Paper and
Packaging Policy in 2020, which contains
aseries of additional targets to help reduce our
packaging footprint. These include eliminating
any product sourced from endangered species
habitats and ancient and endangered forests
by2022, and ensuring all our polythene bags
contain a minimum of 50% post-consumer
recycled content, rising to 100% by 2025.
Supporting a circular textiles industry
The fashion industry has grown rapidly in the
past 20 years, but the corresponding rise in fast
fashion means people aren’t wearing clothes as
often or for as long before throwing them away.
As a result, only 1% of clothing is currently
recycled. The majority then ends up in landfill
oris incinerated. This has left a big problem with
waste, where the quantity of clothing that ends
up in landfill has grown dramatically.
We want to change that and are currently
developing our 2030 circularity roadmap,
based on the Textiles 2030 roadmap template.
This will define key milestones to help embed
circular principles into every aspect of our
business and set out the circular design
standardsand business models we’ll need
toadopt to help divert our products away
fromlandfill.
In the meantime, we continue to combat product
waste by donating our end-of-life stock to
reputable charities and partners. For example,
in2021, we donated 3.6 tonnes of end-of-life
stock to New Life, a charity that helps children
with disabilities and terminal illness. Through
much end-of-life stock now being repurposed
through sample sales in our head office,
wearepleased to see an ongoing decline
inourtonnage of unused stock.
Another way we have addressed product waste
in the wider industry is through taking part in
London Repair Week in March 2022. This is an
annual event that brings together a wide range of
businesses, not-for-profits and individuals to share
their repair expertise through events and
workshops. At the same time, it encourages
Londoners to grow their repair skills and
understand where they can get things repaired.
As part of this event, we hosted a two-day repair
shop for our team in our London head office.
People could bring in an item of clothing for
repairby a skilled repairer on site.
Creating a more circular textiles industry will
alsorequire collective effort. In April 2021,
webecame a founding signatory of UK waste
recycling charity WRAP’s Textile 2030 initiative.
This aims to reduce GHG emissions, shrink the
textiles industry’s water footprint and inspire
morecircular business models.
60 TB | AR—’22
RISK REPORT
Embedding our approach to risk
As the world becomes more uncertain, our approach to risk must be agile
and responsive. Two years ago, no one imagined the devastating effects
Covid would have – personally, socially and economically – and its fallout
will continue to affect us all for years yet. Equally, the sudden geopolitical
upheaval following the invasion of Ukraine has had a significant knock-on
effect on the global economy and means more disruption to supply chains.
Not surprisingly, managing risk well continues to be a key
element of Ted Baker’s business strategy and success.
Thetraditional idea of reviewing risk registers once a year
isno longer enough to adequately protect our brand and
business operations from the increasingly challenging and
unpredictable environment we operate in. We now constantly
monitor inherent risks and evaluate potential new risks as
theyarise, along with the actions we can take to reduce or
eliminate them where possible. It’s not an exact science but,
by embedding our approach to risk across the business, we
can be as prepared as possible to react to whatever the
world throws at us.
With all this in mind, we’ve continued to review our approach
to risk throughout the year. We’ve taken some important
actions, including:
Embedding a quarterly risk committee to define specific
risks and understand key challenges and associated
mitigating actions
Maintaining a corporate risk register, containing all
Group-level risks, prioritised by risk level
Establishing an Internal Audit team to bring a systematic,
risk-based approach to evaluating and improving
corporate governance, risk management and
internalcontrols.
The Board and the Audit & Risk Committee work together
with the Management Risk Committee to deal with different
aspects of the process. This includes:
Assessing and challenging the Group risk register
Reprioritising risks as new ones emerge or existing ones
are mitigated to an appropriate extent
Influencing mitigating actions
Escalating findings to the appropriate audience within
thebusiness.
We have a robust, ongoing process for identifying,
evaluatingand managing the significant and emerging
risksthe Group faces.
The tables that follow outline our principal risks and their
potential impact on the business, along with how we
managethem and how they’ve changed over the past year.
plc Board
Ultimately responsible for risk management
Executive Board
Oversees the Group’s risk management
processes and monitors mitigating actions
Audit & Risk Committee
(i) Monitors the effectiveness of the system of
risk management and internal controls and
(ii) Reviews and challenges key risks, associated
controls and management action plans
Management Risk Committee
Ensures consistent approach across the Group
Wider business
Internal Audit
SR GR FS
61TB | AR—’22
BOARD The Board is ultimately responsible for our approach to risk management and internal controls. It is also responsible
for reviewing how effective our management and controls are, and for setting the Group’s risk appetite. This is done
regularly, helping us to identify emerging risks and assess the status of existing risks. Risk management will continue to
be a key focus for the Board in the coming year.
AUDIT & RISK COMMITTEE The Audit & Risk Committee is responsible for overseeing and reviewing how effective the Group’s internal control
and risk management systems are. It reports its findings to the Board regularly during the year. The Committee also
assesses the findings and recommendations of the Management Risk Committee and of the Group’s external and
internal audit processes, and then looks critically at how the business responds.
EXECUTIVE TEAM The Executive Team is responsible for identifying and evaluating the significant risks that apply to its areas of the
business, along with designing and operating suitable internal controls. These risks are assessed regularly during the
year and may come from a variety of internal or external sources.
MANAGEMENT RISK
COMMITTEE
The Management Risk Committee was re-established in the past year. It reviews risk management and control
processes for each of our key business areas. Its members include relevant people from the Executive Team, heads
of department and functional experts. This helps to establish and encourage ownership of risk across the business
and to keep risk front of mind every day.
OVERSIGHT
Our risk oversight approach is designed to give a clear picture of risk from every angle – from external factors that could impact
the Group to how risk affects our strategy, business model and operations.
OUR WORK THIS YEAR
The leadership team did a full business risk
assessment in December 2021, as part of our
continuing process to develop a robust internal
control structure within Ted Baker and its
operating subsidiaries. This risk assessment
process makes sure that management has
considered the major risks that affect or could
affect our ability to deliver our objectives
effectively and developed strategies to minimise
or monitor the impact of these risks. This means
we can protect the interests of our individual
businesses, the Group and its shareholders.
These risks largely fall into one of four categories:
Market and economy risks – these are risks
in the external market environment that could
affect our business’s strategic direction and
financial performance, such as reduced
consumer demand in key target markets or
significant disruption to our operations
Brand, reputation and market position
– these are risks of damage to our most
important asset, the Ted Baker brand, which
could adversely affect our market position
Operational – these are risks that are
inherent to the way our business operates,
such as losing a key facility or a business-
critical system, key personnel risks and
disruption to a supply chain
Finance, legal and regulatory – these
are risks that are directly linked to the
financial and legal management of the
Company, such as liquidity management,
financial commitments, credit default and
internal controls.
Each risk is then assessed against two criteria:
Likelihood – the likelihood that such an event
could occur in the coming three years
(weassess all risks in the context of delivering
our three-year plan)
Impact – the higher of either the direct
financial impact or the reputational impact
ofthe risk occurring.
We’ve also created a new Internal Audit team to
support risk management within Ted Baker, and
the Internal Audit Charter has been presented
and approved by the Audit & Risk Committee.
This Charter defines how the team supports
management to protect Ted Baker’s assets,
reputation and sustainability by independently
and objectively evaluating the design,
implementation and effectiveness of our
internalcontrols and risk management and
governance processes.
The Management Risk Committee does ‘horizon
scanning’ to identify emerging or elevated risks
for the coming year and beyond. We closely
monitor and evaluate these emerging risks and,
where necessary, implement mitigation activities.
Our emerging risks now include:
Takeover offer for Ted Baker – the Board
received a takeover approach in the new
financial year and, since then, a formal sales
process has been launched. A process like
this creates risks around brand and
reputational damage, disruption to
management and loss of key talent
Climate – the wider implications of climate
change, including rising temperatures and
regional water scarcity, create risks around
our business operations and for our key
suppliers. Regulatory and reporting
obligations are also increasing at pace,
asare stakeholder expectations
Inflation and cost of living – rapidly rising
living costs across our key retail markets could
dampen consumer demand and so slow the
recovery of retail markets already challenged
by the disruption of the pandemic
Data management and digital marketing
capabilities – as we increase our focus on
customer relationship management and
growing our digital sales channels, we risk
not having sufficient capabilities to deliver
thisstrategy or enough control over customer
data management.
62 TB | AR—’22
RISK REPORT
Principal risks
We are evolving the way we categorise different drivers of risk so, this year, we have restructured our
principal risk categories. We’re now considering external market risks first, and then focusing on internal risk areas:
brand and reputation, operations, and financial, legal and regulatory. The Management Risk Committee classifies risks
across more subcategories, to reflect the business’s different functional areas and operational value chain.
MARKET AND ECONOMIC RISKS
Risk and impact How we seek to mitigate the risk Movement in the year
COVID
The Group remains exposed to future waves of
Covid, which could again see measures like
lockdowns, enforced store closures, travel
restrictions and disruption to business operations
and supply chains as well as impacting consumer
shopping behaviours with reduced city centre
footfall and demand for formalwear.
Our response to the disruption felt by our people,
operations and supply chains in the past two years
gives us a clear and well-tested set of responses to
quickly:
Minimise future impact on our operations
Maximise sales through those channels, partners
and markets less impacted by restrictions.
The global rollout of effective
vaccines appears to be reducing
the need for government-
enforced restrictions.
Meanwhile, we have taken steps
to reduce our fixed cost base
and continued to diversify how
we source our products globally.
COST OF LIVING
Rising cost of living and declining real wages for
many people will mean less disposable income
and reduced demand for non-essential items. This
could mean we need to discount surplus stock,
which would affect profitability and cash flow as
well as damage the Ted Baker brand.
The Ted Baker brand is directed to a customer
demographic that may be somewhat insulated from
economic downturns. We carefully monitor daily
and weekly sales data and update our trading plans
and stock purchases accordingly. Members of the
Executive Team review and sign off markdowns or
price reductions.
The rising costs of fuel, utilities
and food mean we’re seeing
increased consumer ‘cost of
living’ across our markets.
PRODUCT COST INFLATION
Increasing fuel, energy, labour and supply chain
costs are likely to put pressure on the cost price of
our products. This could lead to tighter selling
margins and lower profitability.
We place orders with our suppliers several months
ahead of delivery dates, helping us to lock in prices
and react to future price increases. We look at many
options – including selective price increases,
sourcing location and production efficiencies – to
mitigate the impact of increased costs.
The rising costs of fuel, utilities,
labour, commodities and freight
are likely to increase the cost of
goods purchased.
CUSTOMER BEHAVIOUR CHANGE
We fail to understand and respond to changes in
customer preferences – for example, lack of
product diversity, preferred shopping channel or
influencer recommendation – which sees
Ted Baker lose its competitive edge. This could
lead to a loss of sales, reduced margins, missed
opportunities for growth and brand dilution.
We maintain a high level of market awareness and
an understanding of consumer trends and fashion –
including using a leading trends agency – so we can
respond to changes in consumer preference. We use
customer data to develop targeted marketing and
promotional activity. We continue to focus on
product design, quality and attention to detail.
After the year end we launched our new web
platform to enhance our digital sales capability.
FX RATES
We purchase our products primarily in US dollars
and euros but generate the largest proportion of
our sales in sterling, followed by US dollars.
Adverse movements in FX rates could mean higher
cost prices for products and lower margins and
profitability.
We maintain a regular and rigorous forecasting
cycle for purchases and sales. With this, we apply
our hedging policy under which we may enter
forward contracts to hedge expected FX risks and
manage cost variations.
FX rate volatility has increased,
given countries’ different
responses to and recovery
expectations from Covid and
since the invasion of Ukraine.
REGULATORY AND POLITICAL CHANGES
Changes to regulation, duties, taxes and related
reporting requirements increase the cost and
complexity of doing business globally – for
example, Brexit and the increased focus on
sustainability and carbon reporting.
If we fail to comply with regulations, we could
receive material fines that would affect cash flow
and profitability.
We maintain a monitoring programme for new rules,
regulations, taxes and duties that could impact our
products, packaging, supply chains, people, data,
other business activities and reporting requirements.
The monitoring is done by internal subject-matter
experts and external advisers.
SR GR FS
63TB | AR—’22
BRAND, REPUTATION AND MARKET POSITION
Risk and impact How we seek to mitigate the risk Movement in the year
BRAND DAMAGE OR DILUTION
The Ted Baker brand is our biggest asset. Any
action or event that damages the brand with our
customers could significantly affect shareholder
value and lead to lower sales.
This could happen through a specific unforeseen
or mishandled event, or more gradually over time
through insufficient focus, tracking and stewardship
of the brand across our channels, partners and
product assortment.
We have a crisis management protocol in place,
supported by external advisers, to rapidly
communicate internally and externally about
potentially brand-damaging events.
We have a team of internal stakeholders and
external consultants dedicated to protecting
Ted Baker’s reputation. We deal with reputational
issues swiftly and in a considered way.
We carefully consider each new partner we do
business with. All our existing partners are subject to
due diligence and ongoing monitoring to make sure
they remain appropriate for the brand. New product
extension areas, including through licensed partners,
are agreed by the Board.
The impact of the global
pandemic on business
operations and our supply
chains, together with more
geopolitical uncertainty,
increases the complexity of,
and inherent risk within, our
operating environment.
Consumer expectations from
brands they engage with have
also increased, so our
responses to external events
and underlying social trends
are increasingly scrutinised.
PRODUCT DESIGN
A revitalised product mix with new product
categories, combined with a change in focus on
target audiences, could send mixed messages to
consumers. This could mean losing loyal core
customers and failing to engage new customers
and influencers.
We have in-house design teams for all categories
to make sure the Ted Baker DNA is reflected in
new products.
The critical path for product design includes
prototypes and samples, as well as a ‘sell-in’
process to wholesale buyers. This process gives us
rich feedback on the likely success or failure of new
product designs.
As we refresh the Ted Baker
product range across
categories to make it more
contemporary, we increase the
risk of product-design failures
within a seasonal range.
STRATEGY
Failing to deliver an effective strategy could mean
Ted Baker doesn’t realise its long-term ambitions.
This could be caused by:
Failing to implement the strategy because of
poor prioritisation or communication
Designing and implementing the wrong strategy
Failing to respond or pivot the strategy quickly
enough if the operating environment changes.
The Group’s Directors and Executive Team regularly
monitor and assess how well our strategy and
supporting execution plans are being delivered.
These plans are designed to successfully
communicate and deliver the strategy while
mitigating any risk.
We monitor the external environment to get regular
insights into and analysis of the market, our
competitors and our own brand strength among our
target customers. If this monitoring highlights a
significant change or trend, we review this at Board
and Executive Team level to work out if we need to
adjust or add to our strategy.
DIVERSITY AND INCLUSION
Without a sufficient focus on inclusion across all
areas and levels of the business, we risk not
maximising the potential from a truly diverse and
inclusive team and not being representative of
either the communities in which we operate or our
customer base.
Not addressing diversity and inclusion in an
authentic and focused way could result in
adverseemployee and customer reaction and
reputational damage.
The business has engaged a specialist consultancy
to support us as we build our inclusion strategy.
Wehave held listening sessions across the Group
and are building a clear plan to recognise inclusivity
as a global business.
Although the underlying
importance and risk has not
changed from previous years,
our awareness of its importance
to employees and customers
has increased.
64 TB | AR—’22
RISK REPORT
BRAND, REPUTATION AND MARKET POSITION
Risk and impact How we seek to mitigate the risk Movement in the year
CUSTOMER DATA
With a large and growing customer database and
multiple touch points for our customers, it’s
imperative that customers trust us with their
personal data.
An accidental or cybersecurity breach of customer
data is likely to lead to reputational damage as
well as significant fines from relevant data
authorities.
We maintain customer data in a secure data
environment. All employees involved in customer
data activities receive training in the requirements –
for example, in cybersecurity and GDPR.
We only provide customer data to a third-party
processor where it’s specifically allowed in our data
policy – and where the third-party has been
evaluated for their data-security protocols.
You can find more information in the next table under
Critical business systems failure and cybersecurity.
Cybersecurity attacks continue
to increase across all networks,
with a notable step-up from the
time of the invasion of Ukraine.
SUPPLY CHAIN
We source product from third-party factories
across many markets, including China, Turkey,
India and the EU. If our suppliers fail to comply with
ethical standards, it could be damaging to our
brand and reputation.
All product suppliers are required to sign up to our
Code of Conduct and are regularly audited to make
sure they are compliant with our ethical standards
and guidelines.
We added several new
suppliers in new markets
during the year as we aimed to
reduce the risk of concentrating
our supply chains in a
single market.
OPERATIONAL
Risk and impact How we seek to mitigate the risk Movement in the year
SIGNIFICANT BUSINESS DISRUPTION
A lack of resilience or business continuity planning
could mean failing to withstand shocks or not
adapting during a crisis – for example, failing to
take more sales online when shops are forced to
close, or not adapting and communicating
effectively during Covid-related lockdowns, store
closures and work from home mandates.
The severe disruption caused by the pandemic
during the past two years means we have well-
rehearsed crisis management and business
continuity plans in place for a wide range of
operational and business disruption scenarios.
Our Board and Executive Team have developed
agile ways of working to rapidly identify, evaluate
and respond to significant business disruptions.
Our diversified sales channels across owned and
partner, physical and digital channels in several
markets provides us with some inbuilt mitigation.
We launched a new cloud-
based web platform to increase
resilience and support digital
sales in case of more store
closures.
We continued to reduce our
fixed cost base and financial
commitments, such as through
store leases with shorter terms
and lower rents.
SUPPLY-CHAIN DISRUPTION
Supply-chain disruption can mean a delay in
receiving seasonal product and/or increased
freight costs. We may need to use higher-cost air
freight to make sure product is delivered on time.
Significant product delays can lead to late
deliveries to our retail channels and wholesale
partners, which could result in higher markdowns.
Higher freight costs will affect our product margins
if no action is taken.
We restructured and upskilled our in-house
global shipping team and established new
freight-forwarder relationships to provide more
options and agility in sea-freight bookings and
freight-cost management.
We have worked to secure freight bookings in
advance at committed rates and, where necessary,
used air freight to make sure key products are
received on time.
We’ve seen continued high
sea-freight costs and shipping
delays because of Covid and
geopolitical upheavals. This has
led to HGV-driver shortages
and increased costs to inbound
land freight.
CONTINUED
SR GR FS
65TB | AR—’22
OPERATIONAL
Risk and impact How we seek to mitigate the risk Movement in the year
CRITICAL BUSINESS SYSTEMS FAILURE
AND CYBERSECURITY
The loss of a critical business system for an
extended period through general failure or a
cyberattack could prevent us from delivering sales
through our retail channels or prevent our
employees from being able to undertake key
activities to operate our business and safeguard
our assets.
Development and implementation of new systems
and interfaces can result in increased risk.
The Audit & Risk Committee periodically reviews
cyber risk as a specific topic and tracks how our
agreed improvement actions are progressing.
During the year we introduced a new security
manager role and adopted new security measures.
We have mandatory training modules for all
employees and regularly test our cyber defences at
the network, system and individual level.
The Group also has a clear and robust approach to
change management, with project managers to
oversee major projects with key business
stakeholders.
We have a steering committee – which includes
senior team members across IT, legal and
procurement, and external professional advisers as
required – to review major IT projects.
As the frequency of attempted
cyberattacks has increased
across the internet, so we have
continued to invest in and
develop our cyber defences.
NEW SUPPLIERS
A failure to adequately evaluate suppliers, set up
suitable commercial contracts or establish supplier
management protocols (including ongoing
monitoring) could leave Ted Baker exposed to
supplier failure, an inability to source goods,
product quality issues and/or reputational risks.
These could manifest as missed sales opportunities,
excess stock and adverse margin, profitability and
cash effects.
We have rigorous supplier evaluation processes
and have reduced the number of suppliers
we work with globally, concentrating on our
strongest partnerships.
All the product we receive from new suppliers is
subject to quality-control checks.
TALENT MANAGEMENT
Failing to attract, motivate and retain great talent
could mean we can’t achieve our strategic goals
because we lack the innovation, capabilities and
diversity to deliver our strategy and respond to
customer and market needs.
Failing to attract new team members with the
right capabilities or to be competitive in the market
(salaries, benefits and flexible working) could
also make it harder for us to deliver our
transformation strategy.
Each year the Remuneration Committee reviews our
people strategy and performance metrics, including
employee retention, diversity and inclusion, and
reward benchmarking.
An annual benchmarking review makes sure we
offer competitive remuneration and total reward
packages. We also use long-term share-based
incentive schemes to retain key talent.
We drive employee engagement through our
culture, values and working environment, and
measure this with an annual survey. Specific action
plans are developed for any areas of improvement
identified in the survey.
Succession plans are in place and have been
reviewed during this reporting period.
The Group has put policies and procedures in place
to detect and deal with any issues our people raise.
This includes an independent helpline.
CONTINUED
66 TB | AR—’22
RISK REPORT
FINANCIAL, LEGAL AND REGULATORY
Risk and impact How we seek to mitigate the risk Movement in the year
FINANCIAL COMMITMENTS AND
CAPITALEXPENDITURE
Poor management of our financial commitments,
including longer-term liabilities and capital
expenditure, could mean we’re not as flexible or
responsive in adapting to external market challenges
like Covid restrictions, supply chain disruption and
cost inflation, or to specific changes affecting the
retail sector.
The Board approved a ‘capital-light’ growth strategy,
growing our brand presence and sales through
third-party partners and reducing our capital investment.
To help deliver against this strategy and give us control,
we have an Investment Committee that reviews and
approves all capital expenditure and longer-term
financial commitments, including new or renewing
leases and partnerships.
Store leases make up a significant proportion of our
longer-term liabilities. We have a programme to reduce
store lease commitments through shorter leases and
reduced and turnover-only rents. We will only enter into
a new lease or renew an existing one if it meets our
financial return and pay-back criteria.
We make sure that appropriate depreciation and
amortisation periods are used to reduce the risk of
unexpected (non-cash) write-offs, and we do asset
impairment reviews twice a year.
We have made good
progress on our store
lease programme,
reducing lease
commitments and
increasing lease flexibility.
FINANCIAL BORROWINGS, LIQUIDITY
ANDCREDIT RISK
We rely on financing from banks and/or capital
markets to fund working capital and business
operations over the short and medium term.
We are exposed to credit risk and financial loss
through non-payment from our wholesale customers.
Ted Baker has a central treasury function that oversees
liquidity, FX, financing costs and lender relationships.
We maintain regular and active contact with our
lending banks.
Short-term and long-term cash flow and liquidity
forecasts are updated on a regular basis and made
available to the Board. Two members of the Board,
including the Chief Financial Officer, review and
approve the short-term cash flow forecast each month.
Debtor balances are reviewed each month too, and
any past due balances are followed up. We establish
and maintain credit limits for all trade customers.
In May 2021 we extended
our revolving credit facility
to November 2023 and
amended the covenants.
This was further amended
in April 2022, to provide
sufficient headroom for
the severe but plausible
projections as outlined
in the going concern
assessment.
SR GR FS
67TB | AR—’22
FINANCIAL, LEGAL AND REGULATORY
Risk and impact How we seek to mitigate the risk Movement in the year
INVENTORY LEVELS
Inventory purchase commitments are made several
months before the finished products arrive at our own
and third-party distribution centres and stores for sale
to end customers.
Inaccurate forecasting, lack of relevance to customers
or other market conditions could leave us with
excessive stock that we’d have to discount or write
off. This would impact our profitability and cash flow.
Poor inventory controls, and complexity in accounting
for duty and freight and other related costs of goods,
could result in a write off that damages profitability
and asset values.
We use data to forecast demand on a rigorous and
regularly updated cycle. This allows us to order the right
amount of stock. Budgets to buy inventory are signed off
at Executive level each season.
We hold weekly and monthly trading review meetings
to look at sales and stock levels at a granular level. This
means we can take swift action if we’re selling less of
some products than expected and so minimise the
amount we might have to discount.
We do regular stock counts across our stock-holding
locations and apply an inventory-obsolescence policy
to older items.
CONTROL ENVIRONMENT
Insufficient or inadequate checks, controls and
processes could result in limited financial oversight,
leading to errors, misstatement or fraud.
A weak control environment could lead to poor
business decisions or decisions made by team
members who do not have adequate insight or
authority – for example, changing supplier or
customer payment terms, or making decisions around
the stock we hold or need to buy.
A weak control environment could also make it
harder to forecast revenues and profits and lead
toinaccurate accounting.
During the second half of the year we established an
Internal Audit team. The team is developing a plan to
review and report on the priority control areas for the
Audit & Risk Committee.
CONTINUED
68 TB | AR—’22
GOING CONCERN AND VIABILITY DISCLOSURE – FY22
BACKGROUND AND CONTEXT
The retail sector globally has been through
aperiod of unprecedented challenge over
recent years. Prior to the global pandemic the
sector was experiencing an underlying shift in
consumer behaviour with more purchases being
made online and a reduction in footfall in many
physical store locations. The global pandemic
resulted in an extended period of extreme stress
for many consumer and retail businesses with
enforced store closures, supply chain disruption
and high volatility in traditional demand patterns.
With the successful roll-out of vaccination
programmes worldwide and restrictions being
eased or fully removed, there are signs that
consumers are starting to revert to pre-pandemic
behaviours of travel, work, socialising and
shopping – albeit that footfall levels remain
below pre-pandemic levels in many traditional
shopping locations. The knock-on effects of the
global pandemic continue to be felt with
continued disruption to supply chains, input price
inflation pressures and the consumer facing rising
increasing inflation resulting in a higher ‘cost of
living’. These factors, that were already creating
uncertainty and forecasting challenges, have
been exacerbated by the invasion of Ukraine
inearly 2022.
Considering the above, the focus on businesses
ability to continue to trade whilst meeting their
financial commitments over future periods is
understandably high.
Given this context, the Directors have undertaken
a comprehensive assessment to consider the
going concern and longer-term viability of the
Group and Company. In making their
assessment the Directors have considered
thefollowing:
Brand and trading model – Ted Baker is a
global lifestyle brand with a large and loyal
customer base. Brand awareness and brand
strength remains at high levels in the Group’s
priority markets of UK, North America,
Germany and the Middle East. The Group
operates across diversified channels
including its own stores and tedbaker.com
website; franchise stores; third-party
concession stores and online platforms and
via wholesale partners. The Group also has
an important product licensing business
reflecting the potential for the Ted Baker
brand globally. These areas are detailed
more fully in the Strategic Review
Current trading performance and
financialposition – as detailed within this
Annual Report
Financial commitments – including capital
commitments, lease commitments, stock
purchases and other non-variable/
non-discretionary costs. The Directors note
the relatively short store lease commitments
– less than three years on average, and the
progress made on renewing leases on
favourable terms
Committed borrowing facilities – as detailed
further below
Sources of liquidity – including permanent
and temporary measures to improve the
liquidity position of the Group. These
measures are not included in the Base Case
or Downside Case forecasts noted below.
The Directors note that the Group has made
good progress in the second year of its
three-year transformation plan, reducing fixed
costs in the retail channel and head office and
reducing the capital intensity of the Group.
Furthermore, the Directors note that the Group
has recently launched its new digital platform
following investment made over the 18 months
preceding the going concern period.
INTRODUCTION
The consolidated financial statements have been
prepared on a going concern basis. The
Directors have prepared a going concern
assessment covering the 12-month period from
the date of signing these financial statements,
which demonstrates that the Group can operate
within its existing facilities and can meet its
financial covenant tests during this period.
The Directors’ assessment considers the
principal risks facing the business and an
evaluation of financial forecasts prepared by
management. Two primary financial forecasts
have been evaluated:
Base Case – reflects a detailed three-year
period to January 2025, incorporating the
Board approved budget for the current
financial year (FY23)
Downside Case – based on ‘severe but
plausible’ assumptions for the level of sales,
gross margins, operating costs and cash
generation prospects of the Group over the
same period.
The Group’s going concern assessment has
been based on the 12-month financial forecast
derived from these longer-term forecasts.
The Group holds an £80 million Revolving
Credit Facility (RCF) maturing in November
2023. Atyear end, the RCF had been drawn
down £8.0 million and the Group had a net
cash position of £3.1 million. On 22 April 2022,
the Group agreed with its lenders to adjust the
covenant tests over the remaining life of the
facility to provide more headroom for the Group
given the prolonged disruption of Covid and the
impact of the Omicron variant on the Group’s
trading in the final weeks of the last financial
year. The RCF facility size remains the same, with
financial covenants reset to levels that reflect the
levels of disruption modelled within the
Downside case.
SR GR FS
69TB | AR—’22
In forming their assessment on going concern the
Directors have considered the Group’s ability to
meet its covenant tests and operate within the
liquidity headroom provided by the RCF under
the Downside Case forecast. The Directors
believe that, with due consideration to the
forecasts, the underlying strength and appeal of
the Ted Baker brand alongside the positive and
supportive relationship that the Group has had
with its lender banks, the Group will be able
toagree an extension of its borrowing facilities
atan appropriate level and terms prior to the
maturity of the current facility in November2023.
BASE CASE
The Base Case forecast is centred on an
assumption of progressive recovery from the
impact of Covid on our own and third-party
physical retail channels, and on strong growth in
our own eCommerce sales in the second half of
the year following the launch of our new digital
platform in the first quarter and reflecting the
subdued performance of our eCommerce
salesin equivalent periods of the prior year.
Areduction in the Group’s fixed cost base is
incorporated based on efficiencies delivered
through the transformation plan. The Base Case
assumes that no further lockdowns, social or
travel restrictions are implemented over the
going concern period.
Significant assumptions within the Base Case are:
Store sales recover to 80-85% of pre-
pandemic levels, with the removal of social
and travel restrictions and a return to city
centre shopping locations. A full year of
physical store operations is assumed, with no
enforced closures. Store sales are forecast at
an individual store level reflecting the country,
type of location and performance trends
when restrictions were eased in the prior year
eCommerce sales are forecast with strong
growth in the second half of the year driven
by i) an increase in sales through 3rd party
concession channels where we have
increased the product range and availability
on key partner platforms and, ii) increased
sales on tedbaker.com, following the launch
of our new platform and reflecting the
weaker comparable period.
Wholesale sales are forecast to increase at
low double digits levels but remain at less
than 80% of pre-pandemic levels. Although
our wholesale partners are subject to the
same footfall recovery assumptions as for our
own retail stores and concessions, we have
applied a more conservative recovery
assumption due to the globally diverse nature
of our wholesale partners.
Product licence income is projected to
recover in line with the growth of physical
retail channels, as retail footfall returns and
travel restrictions are eased
Operating costs include variable costs (such
as distribution costs and digital marketing)
that are based on contracted or expected
market rates and the sales forecast by
channel. Fixed costs (such as payroll and
rent) are modelled with an inflationary
increase and include the benefits delivered
from the Group’s transformation programme,
such as a reduction of approximately
£30 million in the Group’s payroll cost,
relative to the pre-pandemic year. Store
lease costs include agreed rent reductions
plus reductions assessed as having a high
probability of being delivered in the
financialyear.
The Base Case scenario provides material
liquidity and covenant headroom throughout the
going concern period of assessment.
DOWNSIDE CASE – “SEVERE
BUTPLAUSIBLE”
The Downside Case forecast is predicated on
avery challenging trading environment, with
significant reductions to the sales growth rate
assumptions used in the Base Case to reflect
amore prolonged recovery post-pandemic,
lower growth in eCommerce sales and a more
subdued consumer retail spending environment
given the potential impact of the increased cost
of living as well as uncertainty arising from the
invasion of Ukraine. An increased level of cost
inflation has been assumed relative to the
BaseCase.
The Downside Case scenario reflects the
following assumptions compared to the
BaseCase:
Lower store sales growth rates to reflect
aslower than anticipated post-pandemic
recovery. This includes a slower return to city
centre shopping locations and international
travel, combined with a more subdued
consumer retail spending environment.
Store sales in the downside case only
recover to approximately 65-70% of
pre-pandemic levels
Significantly lower growth in eCommerce
sales, reflecting an extended period of
disruption following the launch of the Group’s
new digital sales platform as well as the
macro-economic factors noted above –
inthe Downside Case the Group’s
tedbaker.com eCommerce sales are 2.5%
higher than FY22 and 11% higher than FY20,
the pre-pandemic year
Wholesale sales and licence income
growthrates reduced to reflect the same
macro-economic factors as our own retail
sales channels
Gross margin rate reduced by approximately
50 bps to reflect impact of further supply
chain disruption and inflationary pressure
oninput prices
Fixed cost inflation increased by 200 basis
points, to reflect greater than forecast
inflationary pressures
Variable costs reduce in line with reduced
sales to partly offset the impact of the
reducedsales growth
70 TB | AR—’22
The Group has adequate liquidity and covenant
headroom throughout the going concern period
under the Downside Case scenario. At the
lowest point – the covenant test at the end of
Q3FY23 – the Group has EBITDA headroom
of£5 million.
REVERSE STRESS TEST
In addition to the scenarios described above, the
Directors have performed a Reverse Stress Test,
applying further reductions to eCommerce sales
and a higher rate of cost inflation – with an
addition to certain areas of the Group’s cost
base relative to the Downside Case to quantify
the level of sales decline and cost increases that
can be absorbed until financial covenants
arebreached.
The Reverse Stress Test scenario only considers
cost savings from directly attributable variable
costs associated with the reduction in sales. No
other cost savings are assumed to be delivered.
The Directors note however that the Group was
able to make significant cost savings with short
leads times in response to the initial lockdowns
atthe start of the global pandemic.
Under the Reverse Stress Test scenario, Group
revenues for the going concern period are
£446 million, 2% above the financial year ended
29 January 2022, a period that wasimpacted
by significant Covid disruption with extended
store lockdowns, travel restrictions, work from
home guidance and theOmicron variant.
The Reverse Stress Test scenario results in the
Group’s level of EBITDA breaching the covenant
test in Q1 FY24. Liquidity under the facility is
adequate, even under the Reverse Stress Test.
The Directors consider that the likelihood of the
scenario envisaged under the Reverse Stress Test
arising is low and, that in the event it did arise,
the Group has demonstrated its ability to deliver
cost savings when facing such extreme situations
as envisaged under the Reverse Stress Test.
MITIGATING ACTIONS
If performance deviates materially from the Base
Case and is trending towards or worse than the
Downside Case there are several actions that
the Group could undertake to mitigate the
liquidity and profit impact. These include:
Cost savings initiatives with a focus on areas
of discretionary spend such as marketing,
travel, and certain professional fees. These
cost savings are not included within the
existing forecasts
Reduction in stock intake of new season stock
to reflect the lower sales projections
Reduction in project and capital expenditure
– noting that the Group has recently
launched its new digital platform so such
areduction in capital expenditures for
aperiod of time would not adversely
impactour enhanced digital sales and
customerproposition.
SUMMARY – GOING CONCERN
Having considered the forecasts noted above,
the mitigating actions available to management,
recent trading performance and having regard
to the macro-economic risks and uncertainties to
which the Group is exposed, the Directors have
a reasonable expectation that the Group and
the Company has adequate resources to
continue operating for the foreseeable future,
and to operate within its borrowing facilities
andcovenants for a period of at least 12 months
from the date of these financial statements.
Accordingly, the financial statements have been
prepared on the going concern basis.
VIABILITY STATEMENT
The Directors have considered the Group’s
prospects and viability over a three-year period
to 25 January 2025. This three-year period is
considered appropriate as this is the Group’s
longer term strategic planning period.
As set out above, the Directors have produced
and reviewed forecasts which consider a Base
Case and a Downside case that reflects severe
but plausible assumptions
Under the Base and Downside case scenarios,
the Group will remain within its available
committed borrowing facilities and in
compliance with covenants throughout the term
of the Revolving Credit Facility maturing in
November 2023. The viability and prospects of
the Group are dependent on the ability to renew
existing debt facilities or execute alternative
forms of financing arrangements. The Directors
believe that the Group’s ability to refinance the
facility in advance of maturity is strong, given the
forecasts. The Directors expect that at renewal,
the facility will reduce in size, and covenants will
revert to levels that reflect a pre-pandemic level
of trade, that will be met under both the Base
Case and Downside Case scenarios modelled
within the three-year plan.
Based on this assessment, the Directors have
areasonable expectation that the Group will
continue in operation and meet all its liabilities
asthey fall due during the period up to
25 January 2025.
The Board approved the Strategic report
onpages 1-70 of this Annual Report on
26 May2022.
By order of the Board
Rishi Sharma
Group General Counsel & Company Secretary
26 May 2022
GOING CONCERN AND VIABILITY DISCLOSURE – FY22
SR GR FS
71TB | AR—’22
72 Board of Directors
74 Executive Team
76 Interim Chair’s introduction to governance
78 The Board’s year
81 Stakeholder engagement s172 compliance
84 Audit & Risk Committee Report
88 Nominations Committee Report
92 Compliance with the Code
96 Remuneration Committee Report
99 Directors’ Remuneration Policy in summary
101 Annual report on remuneration
111 Directors’ Report
114 Statement of Directors’ responsibilities
GGOVOVEERRNNAANNCCEE
RREEPPOORRTT
72 TB | AR—’22
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
Jon Kempster
Independent Non-Executive Director
Nationality British
Appointment Appointed to the Board
on 17 December 2019.
Skills and experience
Jon’s career has included CFO board
positions at Delta Plc, Fii Group Plc,
Linden Plc, Low & Bonar Plc, Frasers
Group Plc, Utilitywise plc and
Wincanton plc. He qualified
asachartered accountant with
PriceWaterhouse in 1990 and has
aBA(Hons) in business studies from
theUniversity of Liverpool. Jon brings
hisbroad experience and financial
background to the work of the Board
and to his role as Chair of the Audit &
Risk Committee.
External appointments
Jon is a NED and Chair of the Audit
&Risk Committee at Redcentric plc,
BonhillGroup plc and Serinus Energy
plc, and a trustee of the Delta plc
pension scheme. Jon is also a NED
ofFireAngel Safety Technology Group
plc and advises other private groups
onan ad hoc basis.
Committee membership
A
N
R
Helena Feltham
Interim Chair
Senior Independent Non-Executive
Director
Nationality British
Appointment Appointed to the Board
on 1 May 2019, as Senior Independent
Director on 17 December 2019 and as
Interim Chair on 6 December 2021.
Skills and experience
Helena has more than 30 years’
experience in retail and human capital
leadership. She was formerly People
Director at B&Q and, before that,
Human Resources Director at Marks &
Spencer, Woolworths South Africa and
Jack Wills. She also spent several years
working in executive search with Odgers
Berndtson, covering senior appointments
across the public and private sectors.
Helena has served as a Non-Executive
Director (NED) in the NHS, as an
independent director for the Assembly
ofWales and as a justice of the peace.
External appointments
Helena is a NED and trustee for the
Retail Trust, where she chairs the
Wellbeing Committee. She is also a
director and advisor at Dogwoof, a film
production and distribution company.
She’s also a NED at Redcentric plc.
Committee membership
A
D
N
R
Designated NED for workforce
engagement.
Rachel Osborne
Chief Executive Officer
Nationality British
Appointment Joined Ted Baker as
Chief Financial Officer on 11 November
2019, and appointed Acting Chief
Executive Officer on 10 December 2019
and Chief Executive Officer on
30 March 2020.
Skills and experience
Rachel qualified as a chartered
accountant at KPMG and has more
than20 years’ brand and retail sector
experience. Rachel joined Ted Baker
from Debenhams Retail Limited, where
she was Chief Financial Officer (CFO).
Rachel has broad experience of
consumer-facing brands from her
previous roles as CFO at Domino’s Pizza
Group plc, Finance Director of Group
Enterprise at Vodafone, and Finance and
Strategy Director at John Lewis. She has
also held senior positions with Sodexo,
Kingfisher and PepsiCo.
External appointments
N/A
Committee membership
D
Andrew Jennings OBE
Independent Non-Executive Director
Nationality British
Appointment Appointed to the Board
1 February 2014.
Skills and experience
Andrew has invaluable experience in
international retail, having spent more
than 45 years at some of the world’s
most respected high-end specialty
anddepartment stores. Prior to joining
Ted Baker, Andrew has held many
prestigious leadership roles including;
CEO of Karstadt, Germany, Group MD
of Woolworths, SA, President of Saks
Fifth Avenue, USA, CEO of House of
Fraser, (UK) Deputy Chairman of Brown
Thomas, Ireland and General Manager
of Harrods, London. Andrew is also an
advisor in private equity and to start-ups.
External appointments
Andrew is Chair of the Prince’s Trust
Retail, Leisure and Hospitality Board.
Heis also Chair of Boschendal SA,
aboard member of Alpha SA and
Chairof 42 Acres Retreat and Farm.
Committee membership
A
N
R
Our Directors and Non-Executive Directors bring a depth and breadth of
experience and expertise that is successfully driving Ted Baker forward.
Their constructive and supportive approach is a key part of the progress
we have made with our transformation.
Meet the Board
SR GR FS
73TB | AR—’22
Fumbi Chima
Independent Non-Executive Director
Nationality British
Appointment Appointed to the Board
on 4 August 2021.
Skills and experience
Fumbi brings valuable experience
implementing digital transformation
strategies in high-growth environments
and across a range of industries.
Shehasserved in technology roles at
adidas,Fox Network Group, Burberry,
Walmart and American Express.
Shehasa BA inpolitics and philosophy
fromthe University of Hull and studied
executive management at Harvard
Business School.
External appointments
Fumbi is Executive Vice-President and
Chief Information Officer at BECU,
theUS-based credit union. She also
serves as a NED of Whitbread plc.
Committee membership
N/A
Meg Lustman
Independent Non-Executive Director
Nationality British
Appointment Appointed to the
Boardon 4 August 2021.
Skills and experience
Meg has worked in fashion for over
30years and her experience spans
thesize and growth spectrum where
shehashelped businesses grow
profitably and sustainably. Meg led
theturnaround and growth of many
well-known British brands, most
recentlyas CEO of Hobbs. Meg also
worked at John Lewis and spent more
than a decade with Mosaic/Aurora
Fashions, parent of Oasis, Warehouse,
Karen Millen, Coast andWhistles.
External appointments
Meg is Vice Chair of Glasgow
Caledonian University.
Committee membership
N/A
Colin La Fontaine Jackson
Non-Executive Director
Nationality British
Appointment Appointed to the Board
1 September 2020.
Skills and experience
Colin brings strong corporate finance
andlegal experience to the Board,
having spent more than 25 years
advising clients across a range of
industries. Before founding boutique
corporate finance firm Hopton Advisers
in 2014, Colin worked atQuayle
Munro, ING Barings and Charterhouse
Securities. He qualified asa solicitor
withClifford Chance.
External appointments
Colin is a partner at Hopton Advisers LLP.
He is also a NED of Ivory Worldwide
(Holdings) Limited and MAIA
TechnologyLimited.
Committee membership
None
David Wolffe
Chief Financial Officer
Nationality British
Appointment Joined as interim
CFOon2 January 2020 and
appointedCFOon 18 May 2020
andleft 7 March2022.
Skills and experience
David has more than 20 years’
experience in finance roles for public
and private businesses, including
asGroup CFO at HMV Group Plc.
Hehasheld senior financial and
executive positions at leading global
consumer and media businesses,
including as Finance Director of ITV
Studios, CFO at AOL Europe, and
Finance Director at BBC Magazines
andConsumer Publishing. From 2018
until joining Ted Baker, David was Interim
CFO in a series of private-equity-backed
retail and technology businesses.
External appointments
N/A
Committee membership
D
D
A
Disclosure Committee
Audit & Risk Committee
R
C
Remuneration Committee
Chair
N Nominations Committee
Other Directors during the year
John Barton Chair
John served as our Chair during the year until his untimely death in December 2021.
Appointments after year end
Marc Dench Chief Financial Officer
Marc was appointed in March 2022.
74 TB | AR—’22
EXECUTIVE TEAM
Rachel Osborne
Chief Executive Officer
Appointment March 2020
Skills and experience
Rachel qualified as a chartered accountant
atKPMG and has more than 20 years’ brand
and retail sector experience. Rachel joined
Ted Baker from Debenhams Retail Limited,
whereshe was Chief Financial Officer (CFO).
Rachel has broad experience of consumer-
facing brands from herprevious roles as CFO
atDomino’s Pizza Group plc, Finance Director
of Group Enterprise at Vodafone, and Finance
and Strategy Director at John Lewis. She has
also held senior positions with Sodexo,
Kingfisher and PepsiCo.
Marc Dench
Chief Financial Officer
Appointment March 2022
Skills and experience
Marc is an experienced retail and brand leader
with significant experience in international,
multichannel data-led businesses. Six years
asCFO at Joules Group plc saw Marclead
thecompany through IPO and its subsequent
international growth and digital transformation.
Prior experience includes roles asCFO of
Global Brands & International Retailat Alliance
Boots (WBA), and Corporate Development
Director UK at Experian plc. Marcis a qualified
ACA (Arthur Andersen) and has an MBA from
Sauder School of Business, Vancouver.
Skills and experience
With their skills and extensive experience developed at Ted Baker
andother leading brands, our Executive Team is well placed to steer
thebusiness and overcome new challenges.
Jason Beckley
Chief Customer, Marketing and
Digital Officer
Appointment January 2022
Skills and experience
Jason joined Ted Baker in January 2022 from
hisrole as Interim Chief Marketing Officer
atEsprit. There he was responsible for brand,
marketing and customers, and for leading
Esprit’sconsumer engagement across all
channels. Jason has worked with some of the
world’s most recognisable brands in sports,
fashion and luxury goods including YSL, Nike,
Ralph Lauren, Dunhill, Puma, Clarks and
Alexander McQueen.
Peter Collyer
Chief People Officer
Appointment January 2020
Skills and experience
Peter’s remit includes everything related to our
people and culture. Our Ethics and Sustainability
team also reports to him. His career spans
30years in human resources, including 25 years
in retail, hospitality, leisure, investment banking
and consumer products. He has held the roles
ofPeople Experience Director at ASOS.COM,
SVP Global HR at Claire’s Inc., VP HR Retail &
Licensing at The Walt Disney Company Ltd,
Director People & OD at Oasis Stores Plc
andwas a Senior HR Executive at Yamaichi
International. He began his career as an
apprentice chef and he gained broad
experienceworking in hospitality for ten years.
He is an accredited coach and a Chartered
Fellow ofCIPD.
Helen Costello
Group Commercial and Business
DevelopmentDirector
Appointment December 2020
Skills and experience
Helen is responsible for wholesale, retail,
territory franchise and joint ventures outside
North America as well as overall product
licensing. She has held key commercial and
executive appointments at several high-profile
global fashion brands including, most recently,
as Managing Director International at rag &
bone and, previously, as Wholesale and
Franchise Director at Bottega Veneta and
General Manager of Prorsum at Burberry.
Anthony Cuthbertson
Global Creative Director
Appointment November 2020
Skills and experience
Anthony has more than 20 years’ creative
experience in the fashion industry, developed
from his roles as Global Creative Director and
Design Director at Topshop/Topman, Roberto
Cavalli, Sass & Bide, Joseph, René Lezard,
RalphLauren, Burlington and DAKS. He has
alsoconsulted for Mulberry, Victoria Beckham,
Donna Karen, Amanda Wakeley, Moncler
andMax Mara.
SR GR FS
75TB | AR—’22
Tikki Godley
Group Trading Director
Appointment May 2005
Skills and experience
Having worked as a denim merchandiser
atDiesel, Tikki joined Ted Baker as a junior
merchandiser in 2005 and worked up through
the Group to become Trading Director in 2014.
With more than 20 years’ experience in
merchandising, she has been responsible for our
Buying and Production departments since 2020.
Ari Hoffman
CEO – North America
Appointment December 2019
Skills and experience
Ari has spent his decades-long career in retail
and fashion, and is responsible for Ted Baker’s
North America market. Before joining Ted Baker,
he led and managed the Americas business for
respected international brands, including as
CEO of Scotch & Soda, CEO of Gant, President
of Yves Saint Laurent and President of Lacoste.
Rishi Sharma
Group General Counsel and
CompanySecretary
Appointment December 2021
Skills and experience
Rishi is responsible for our governance and how
we manage risk, and for supporting the Board
and our executive team on commercial strategy.
He started his career as a corporate lawyer
atFreshfields Bruckhaus Deringer and
continuedat Skadden, specialising in mergers
and acquisitions. He has extensive in-house
experience, including at InterContinental Hotels
Group plc and Purplebricks Group plc.
Leon Shepherd
Chief Information Officer
Appointment November 2017
Skills and experience
Leon is accountable for technology strategy
anddelivery, and leads the overall business
transformation programme at Ted Baker. His
extensive experience is drawn from his senior
leadership roles at several large-scale global
organisations, including Marks & Spencer,
FatFace and Vodafone. He is a strong
advocateof technology innovation, especially
incloud technology, AI and cybersecurity.
76 TB | AR—’22
INTERIM CHAIR’S INTRODUCTION TO GOVERNANCE
Building reassurance through
goodgovernance
Over the last two years, good governance has been particularly
important to the roll out of our transformation plan. In last year’s
Annual Report, our late Chair, John Barton, set out his views on
the importance of good governance. These principles were our
guiding light through the last year, and ones we will continue
tofollow in the years to come.
The key principle John highlighted in his review
last year was the idea of ‘doing the right thing’.
This means going beyond a mere box-ticking
exercise of implementing ever-evolving
regulations and legal standards. We aim to
godeeper and ensure these important elements
are embedded in the way we run our business
day-to-day. We’ve seen this idea in action
overthe last 12 months, at every level, from
theretail team to the Board. People are looking
for brands they can believe in, and brands must
earn that trust. The solid foundation of good
governance we have in place will build
ahighlevel of reassurance about the way
Ted Baker does business to all our stakeholders.
It helps grow trust and creates long-term value
for everyone involved – particularly our
shareholders, our people and our customers.
The Board’s broad experience and deep
expertise has proved invaluable over the last
12months as the business has ridden the ups
and downs of the pandemic. Consistency has
been particularly valuable in an uncertain year,
and we have enjoyed the ongoing support
andinsights of long-standing Non-Executive
Directors (NEDs) Andrew Jennings and Jon
Kempster, who chair the Remuneration and Audit
& Risk Committees respectively. We will be sorry
to lose Andrew’s vast retail experience when he
retires at the 2022 AGM in July.
It is important to bring in new ideas and different
perspectives when a business is in transformation.
So we were delighted to welcome two new
NEDs to the Board last year. Fumbi Chima’s
experience in digital transformation across sports
apparel, TV networks and finance, amongst other
sectors, will be invaluable as we enhance the
digital side of the business. Meg Lustman’s long
involvement in retail at the highest level, most
recently as CEO of Hobbs, adds a unique
perspective on our approach to transforming the
Ted Baker brand. As well as bringing in valuable
new skills and experience, I am delighted to
report this has also allowed us to balance the
Board with an equal number of male and
femaleDirectors.
“ It is important
tobring in new
ideas and different
perspectives when
a business is in
transformation.”
Helena Feltham
Interim Chair
SR GR FS
77TB | AR—’22
The tone of the Board’s approach continues
tobe very collegiate, creating an open and
supportive environment that makes for objective
and considered decisions. We have worked
closely with the Executive Team, continuing the
well-balanced approach of challenge and
support advocated by John. Every decision
goesthrough robust questioning and
benchmarking against the interests of everyone
involved in the business – from customers and
suppliers to our team members, shareholders
and our wider communities. This positive and
constructive approach has helped keep up the
momentum of the transformation plan as it moves
into its third year.
Employee engagement has been high on the
Board’s agenda. It has also been a big part of
my involvement over the year, supported by our
Chief People Officer, Peter Collyer. Last year,
wecontinued to strengthen the trust between
theBoard, the Executive Team and the wider
Ted Baker team which is at the heart of good
governance, because it enables openness and
challenge. I am delighted that Meg Lustman has
agreed to take over the role of designated NED
for workforce engagement from me, and we
look forward to seeing more positive progress
with her input over the coming year.
The Executive Team also recognised the
importance of employee engagement with
thelaunch of the first Ted Baker employee
engagement survey. This saw very high response
levels from across the business and the team is
already taking steps to address the key findings.
The independent Fresh Eyes employee listening
groups have stepped up and come into their
own. A number of their members joined us at
aBoard meeting in November and shared their
insights and perspective on the business from
theteam’s viewpoint.
The ongoing challenges of the pandemic have
placed heavier-than-usual demands on the time
of our NEDs. Although the world seems to be
starting to move on from the threat of Covid,
there are clearly many other challenges that
willaffect global and local economies over the
coming year. Despite online meetings now being
the new normal, we will continue our return to
face-to-face Board meetings. These meetings
are very productive and have helped cement
strong relationships on the Board as well as
moving the transformation plan forward.
As always, none of this would be possible
without the continuing dedication and
commitment of the Board, the Executive Team
and everyone in the Ted Baker team. Thank you
for all your support and hard work. I look forward
to seeing more progress over as we build on the
achievements of the last financial year.
Helena Feltham
Interim Chair
TB | AR—’2278
A fresh perspective
We had another busy and productive year at Ted Baker, introducing two
new Non-Executive Directors (NEDs) to the business, searching for a new
Board Chair, managing the Company’s ongoing response to Covid and
establishing an employee voice forum. Here we’ll take a closer look at
some of the key issues the Board considered – particularly communication
between the Board and our people, and our response to the challenges
ofthis year.
OUR RESPONSE TO COVID
Like everyone everywhere, we look forward
tothe day when Covid is behind us. Until then
we continue to oversee how the Company is
responding to the challenges Covid poses to
how we live and work, and to make sure we’re
looking after our people, our customers and our
business. Jon Kempster, Chair of the Audit & Risk
Committee, said of the Board’s approach:
“Wetried to get things working for the team –
you could see our business knitting together well.”
The pandemic has undoubtedly accelerated
business trends that have been emerging in
thepast few years: take the move online and
ourcustomers’ growing interest in experiences
over tangible goods as examples. That’s why
we’ve continued to invest in our online presence,
so that our customers can browse and make
purchases easily. That’s also why we’ve continued
to support our in-store teams to give customers
the best possible experience the moment they
step through our doors. We pride ourselves
onmaintaining high standards, and not from
adistance – our NEDs like to wander around
our stores anonymously.
This attention to detail starts at the Board and
can be seen throughout the business, in all our
employees. We’ve maintained close contact
with our people in the past year, with monthly
online town hall meetings and one-to-ones
where possible – because there’s no substitute
for face-to-face interaction.
When it comes to working from home and
returning to the office, Interim Chair Helena
Feltham highlights how, as a Board, we aspire
tobetransparent: “we communicate really well
about the why, not just the what”, so that our
employees have the information they need
tofeel in control of their working environment.
Aswe resume working in person again, we want
to acknowledge what our people have achieved
in difficult circumstances in the past year, and
look forward to the coming year.
BUILDING MORE TRUST THROUGH
EFFECTIVE TEAM ENGAGEMENT
Since joining Ted Baker in May 2019,
Helenahas established strong channels
ofcommunication between different levels
ofthebusiness, getting the team’s voice heard
and building trust between the team and the
Board and Executive Team.
Last year, we launched our first employee
engagement survey with Peakon to understand
what we do well and what issues the team felt
needed addressing. There was a big response
from across Ted Baker and we are in the process
of addressing the findings and embedding
changes in the business as a priority.
“ We tried to get
things working
forthe team –
youcould see our
business knitting
together well.”
Jon Kempster
Chair, Audit & Risk Committee
THE BOARD’S YEAR
SR GR FS
79TB | AR—’22
Fresh Eyes goes from strength to strength
One of Helena’s first initiatives in 2019 was
toengage an independent body to conduct
listening groups and provide a safe space where
employees could speak candidly– about their
experiences at the Company, what they liked
about the business and what needed improving.
From their feedback, we built our employee
engagement strategy in 2020 – andthe Board
can now look at how that strategy is working.
In 2020 we brought Peter Collyer on board
asChief People Officer. With his substantial
experience building people strategy and
embedding values, Peter has provided
invaluable support to Helena in her role as
designated NEDfor workforce engagement.
Together, Peterand Helena have worked with
the businessto create Fresh Eyes, an employee
forum representing people in our head office
and in our stores. Members of the forum have
been given support and training and the forum
itself has proved to bea great resource for
guiding our work to build a more inclusive
workforce and implementing ESG values.
As we reported in our 2021 governance report,
our senior management has increasingly turned
to Fresh Eyes to gather feedback about the
business. And the Board has encouraged this –
particularly our late Chair, John Barton, who
created a warm and encouraging environment
in which employees could speak up. Last year in
November, members of the forum attended and
contributed to a Board meeting, representing
how far our employee engagement has come.
Helena says, “what I’m really proud of is how
much the Fresh Eyes members care about the
organisation”, observing that “they make
recommendations with very good back up
andfacts”. This directly benefits Ted Baker and
our people by bringing employee voices into
thedecisions we make on the Board. A good
example of this is the way learning and
development opportunities have improved,
inspired by Fresh Eyes’ recommendations.
Meg Lustman will soon be using her
considerable retail and people experience
asour new designated NED for workforce
engagement. We hope to roll out Fresh Eyes’
work to our business in North America and
elsewhere overseas, and to involve the forum
inbusiness strategy and innovation. This, plus
monthly interactions with the Board, will help
cement itsrole as a voice for productive
changeatTed Baker.
TWO NEW NEDS
At all levels of our business, we’re focused on
getting the right people in the right places. Last
year we started the search for two new NEDs,
aiming to widen the diversity of thought and
skillsat the very top of the business. We were
delighted to welcome Fumbi Chima and Meg
Lustman to the Board in summer 2021, both
strong additions who bring wide experience
anda talent for innovation to Ted Baker.
You can find more information about Fumbi
andMeg in their biographies from page 73
andinthe Nominations Committee Report
frompage 88.
We tailored induction programmes for each
ofthem to introduce them to our business,
focusing on the following areas to make sure
they had a well-rounded and informative
induction experience.
Meetings and briefings
Our new NEDs met with our Chair, members
ofthe Board and senior leaders – including
Chief Executive Officer Rachel Osborne and
then Chief Financial Officer David Wolffe,
aswell asthe rest of the Executive Team to
understand our corporate history, local, regional
and global operations, our overall performance
and our culture and values.
Site visits and stakeholders
Within the limits of Covid, Fumbi and Meg
visiteda selection of Ted Baker’s retail stores,
concessions and outlets, and our Derby
warehouse and customer service centre.
Theymet stakeholder representatives from
different levels of the business, including the
senior leadership team and our in-store and
distribution centre teams. This gave them the
chance to get themselves up-to-speed on the
business and build similar experience and
knowledge as theother NEDs.
Fumbi commented that “anyone joining the
Board during the pandemic would have to
adjust… I met with all the executives for one-on-
ones… the Board and management are pretty
open, so I think it’s not a case of only telling you
what they want to tell you, they really want
people to share their perspective”. For Fumbi,
herinduction was effective because “in spite
ofthe pandemic, I was still able to go to the
distribution centre, I was still able to visit stores…
that’s been successful”.
Meg’s induction experience was similarly
positive. She noted that “I really had the
opportunity to ask any questions…I met a broad
range of stakeholders, not just the Executive
Team, but also the senior leadership team. I did
a visit to the distribution centre… and store visits”.
We’re so pleased that, even against the
backdrop of the pandemic, we’ve successfully
brought new people into our business. Access
has been possible and encouraged at every
level and we’ve been delighted to see such
open communication.
80 TB | AR—’22
THE BOARD’S YEAR
THE SEARCH FOR A NEW CHAIR
Since 2020, as part of our workforce
engagement drive, we have put a succession
pipeline in place to make our business more
resilient to the unexpected. This gave us plenty
ofexperience and support to draw on as we
searched for a new Chair, following John Barton’s
death in December 2021. We especially thank
Andrew Jennings and Helena Feltham for offering
the Board support and continuity atshort notice.
As Helena says, “we did do a lot of succession
planning last year, and I’m very happy we had
the processes and plans in place. The biggest
thing was the recruitment of two new Non-
Executive Directors, as well as how we recruited
at management levels.”
We appointed consultants Spencer Stuart to
work with us to recruit a new Chair. We kept
ourcommitment to diversity and inclusion front
ofmind, alongside the commercial expertise we
need to steer and develop the Company and its
strategic plans, and the Board. And, we needed
someone with the capacity to devote the time
tothe role it needs.
We built a solid candidate profile, which
included these desired qualities:
Proven experience and competence as
achair, ideally within a listed company
Strong personal track record of shareholder
value creation and business achievement
A deep understanding of retail and
consumerbrands
Strong strategic skills with an ability to guide
and facilitate debate on critical issues, and
toprovide ‘bigger picture’ perspective
Skilled in communicating clearly and
effectively at all levels.
While we had made good progress on the
search for a new Chair, on 18 March 2022
Sycamore Partners Management LP announced
that it was considering a possible offer for the
Company and we consequently announced
on4 April 2022 that we had commenced
aformal sale process. The Board considered
that continuity and experience was key to the
Company successfully negotiating this period,
and we accordingly paused the search for
anew Chair pending the outcome of the
formalsale process.
BOARD EVALUATION
The Board runs an externally facilitated Board
performance evaluation at least every three
years, in line with the UK Corporate Governance
Code. Our last external evaluation took place
two years ago and, following changes to the
Board, we decided to bring forward the external
evaluation by a year.
We considered five Board evaluation services
providers. Helena Feltham, JonKempster and
theCompany Secretarial teamhad initial
discussions, then reviewed eachproposal and
interviewed the providers. Asa result, Milena
Djurdjevic of Calibro was selected to run the
external Board evaluation. She has no other
connection with the Company or any
individualDirector.
Milena attended and reviewed the paperwork
relating to the Board and Audit & Risk
Committee meetings held in November 2021,
and arranged individual working sessions with
each of the NEDs, Chair, CEO and CFO.
She also met with the Company Secretarial
teamand had individual meetings with all the
seven other members of the Ted Baker Executive
Team. Milena met Ted Baker’s remuneration and
investor relations consultants. Her evaluation
alsoincluded a review of other Board
paperwork, including those relating to the
Boardstrategy day, Remuneration Committee
papers and NED induction documentation.
Findings and recommendations
Milena found the Ted Baker Board to be well
run, with highly committed and engaged Board
members who were well-prepared for Board
meetings. They have good relationships with
themembers of the Executive Team. There is
apositive Board culture and Board members
areencouraged to contribute to discussions.
There is mutual respect between Non-Executive
and Executive Board Directors.
All the NED Board members actively enjoy
being part of Ted Baker and are happy to have
been able to play a critical role in ensuring the
company’s survival, as well as supporting the
strategic plan for its future success. They do see
areas for improvement but these do not detract
significantly from their overall positive experience
as Board members.
Key recommendations for next year
Strategy – focus on a smaller list of strategic
priorities for updates at every Board meeting
Leadership succession – continue the
focuson Leadership team succession and
development of this as a Board focus.
Executive Team members should continue
topresent to the Board, allowing sufficient
time to debate topics thoroughly
Board papers – Board papers should be
streamlined, with greater use of one-page
summaries
Board agenda – Review Board agenda
andstructure of Board meetings to focus
onasmaller number of current issues
Appraisal process
We review the expertise and performance
oftheDirectors each year.
The annual appraisal of the Chair is led by
theSenior Independent Director. The Chair
leads the appraisal of the CEO, discussing
theirperformance at a meeting with the
NEDs,andleads the appraisals of the NEDs.
The CEOassesses the performance of the CFO,
with feedback from NEDs where appropriate.
As Interim Chair, Helena Feltham undertook the
Chair’s duties this time.
The Board is satisfied that all our Directors
haverelevant experience. And, in line with
therecommendations of the 2018 Code,
allDirectors will stand for re-election at the
2022 AGM.
Directors’ time commitment
Each year the Nominations Committee reviews
the time needed from the Chair, SID and NEDs
to perform their duties. This includes a review of
Directors’ attendance at scheduled meetings
and their availability at other times.
In FY22 Directors made themselves available for
Board and Committee meetings as appropriate.
Ina normal year, we expect the Chair of the
Board to spend two days a week working with
the Company. Other NEDs are expected to
spend around 15 days a year on Company
matters. Wealso review our NEDs’ other
commitments to make sure they have enough
time to fulfil their role.
SR GR FS
81TB | AR—’22
Our stakeholders and our s172 statement
The Board recognises the importance of engaging with our
stakeholders and other aspects of s172 such as the environment.
Here we outline how we’ve done this and also highlight some
keydecisions we’ve made this year.
This section shows how our Directors performed their duties under Section 172 (s172)
ofthe Companies Act 2006 to the highest standards of business conduct – and how
they have upheld and celebrated the Ted Baker culture, values and brand this year.
S172 sets out the requirement for Ted Baker’s Directors to promote the success of the
Company for the benefit of its shareholders, while considering the interests of our other
stakeholders and the environment in which we operate.
Some of the information here comes from other sections of the Annual Report and has
been cross-referenced.
KEY STRATEGIC DECISIONS IN FY22
It has been a busy year and the Board has
made a number of key strategic decisions that
affect the business as it moves forward.
Dividend
The Board considered the Company’s capital
allocation policy and concluded that it would not
be appropriate to pay a dividend during 2021.
The Board carefully considered the Company’s
financial performance, market expectations,
shareholders’ interests and relationships with
lenders and also the interests of other
stakeholders such as employees, licensees
andpartners. The Board concluded that it
wouldnot be appropriate for the Company to
pay a dividend during the year, but that it would
review this decision during the financial year.
Board constitution
Following the passing of the then Chair,
JohnBarton, the Board acted quickly to
ensurethat the Company maintained stability
while a new Chair was found.
The Board quickly recognised the importance
toshareholders and employees to maintain
short-term expertise and continuity and decided
that Helena Feltham would act as Interim Chair
until a new Chair was found, and Andrew
Jennings also decided to postpone his planned
retirement. Meg Lustman attended Remuneration
Committee meetings and Fumbi Chima attended
Audit & Risk Committee meetings to ensure that
there was a succession plan for Andrew’s
departure. The Board also considered the
importance of employee feedback and
approved the transition of responsibilities from
Helena to Meg as the designated NED for
workforce engagement.
Move to Fitzrovia
The Board reviewed the options for a new
UKcorporate headquarters and approved
themove to a new office in Fitzrovia.
In considering the various options for a new
corporate headquarters in the UK, the Board
had regard for the impact of the relocation on
employees, the environment and the community.
The Board further considered the financial
effects of the relocation and the impact this
would have on the Company’s shareholders
andlenders.
The next table sets out more details about how
we, as a Board, engaged with our stakeholders
during FY22.
STAKEHOLDER ENGAGEMENT S172 COMPLIANCE
82 TB | AR—’22
STAKEHOLDER ENGAGEMENT S172 COMPLIANCE
HOW THE BOARD CONSIDERS
THE INTERESTS OF EMPLOYEES
Stakeholder Why they matter How we engaged
TED BAKER TEAM MEMBERS The commitment of Ted Baker’s team
membersis essential to the success
of the business, to deliver our
strategy for our customers and
products.
Through the Fresh Eyes forum, town hall meetings, internal communications,
and informal meetings with the Board and Executive Team
Through Fresh Eyes forum members who:
ɣ met with Helena Feltham, designated NED for workforce engagement,
to discuss concerns and ideas for improvement, which were fed into
theBoard
ɣ attended and contributed to a Board meeting
By establishing digital platforms for development and training
By having employees share in the business through Company share plans
Through the Leadership Development programme and mentor programme
for our female leaders
THE NEED TO FOSTER THE COMPANY’S BUSINESS RELATIONS WITH SUPPLIERS, CUSTOMERS AND OTHERS
Stakeholder Why they matter How we engaged
SUPPLIERS Ted Baker works with a wide
rangeof suppliers across the globe,
from product manufacturing to
support services and many other
third-party businesses.
It is vital to build trusted working
relationships with all our partners
tohelp us deliver great products
andservices to Ted Baker
customersand team members.
By working closely with a wide range of manufacturing suppliers
tobuildstrong relationships and deliver on our promise of Fashioning
aBetter Future
By reviewing the actions taken to prevent modern slavery across our
supply chain, including how we inspect premises
By communicating with new and existing suppliers to make sure they
understand the Company’s culture, ethical standards and the requirements
set out in our supplier manual
CUSTOMERS Ted Baker’s ambition is to be the
most engaging global British lifestyle
brand. It is why we exist for our
customers and as a business.
It is essential we understand our
customers and ensure that we
deliverwhat they are seeking.
By receiving regular details on customer service and detailed analytics
tounderstand customer satisfaction, including Net Promoter Scoring and
other metrics
By making sure governance of customer data and other information
isprotected, together with scrutiny of all customer-related areas
By thoroughly reviewing and updating the web platform to enhance the
customer experience and journey
By taking care of customer safety in our retail stores during the on-going
pandemic to ensure government guidelines and rules were implemented
and supported by our teams
CHANNEL PARTNERS Ted Baker is not able to serve all its
potential customers in all places and
channel partners help the Ted Baker
brand appear in more places.
Channel partners help Ted Baker to
adopt a capital-light approach and
be more agile and efficient in
serving our customers.
By ensuring that we choose to work with reliable and ethical channel
partners who share our passion for looking after our customers
By ensuring that channel partners deliver true incremental business
toTed Baker
By ensuring that channel partners value their relationship with Ted Baker
and represent the Ted Baker brand appropriately
By taking care of customer safety in our retail stores during the on-going
pandemic toensure government guidelines and rules were implemented
and supported by our teams.
SR GR FS
83TB | AR—’22
THE IMPACT OF THE COMPANY’S OPERATIONS ON THE COMMUNITY AND THE ENVIRONMENT
Stakeholder Why they matter How we engaged
COMMUNITIES
We must be mindful of how we
affect the communities we operate
inand be fully engaged in
contributing to our communities
andproviding long-term support.
By supporting the Company to create and deliver education-focused
challenges, masterclasses, talks and presentations to local partners
andschools
By partnering with five carefully-selected local charity partners, all focused
on social mobility
THE ENVIRONMENT
We need to manage how
ourbusiness impacts on the
environment.
By challenging and supporting the sustainability team in setting targets
By seeing regular updates on progress against our sustainability targets
By reviewing developments in the marketplace, and bringing insights to
management to continue developing our sustainability programme
HIGH STANDARDS OF BUSINESS CONDUCT
Business conduct Why it matters How we engaged
ETHICS AND POLICIES At Ted Baker, we hold ourselves
tothe highest standards by making
sure we operate a fair business
environment. We are geared
towards achieving the best outcome
for our team, customers, shareholders
and the wider commercial landscape.
By reviewing and approving updates to key workplace and
companypolicies
By commissioning a global risk analysis from a third-party, which included
a review of fraud and internal compliance policies and processes
OUR SHAREHOLDERS
Shareholders Why they matter How we engaged
TED BAKER SHAREHOLDERS Ted Baker retail and institutional
shareholders are owners of the
Company so we must make sure we
work to deliver our strategic goals.
By seeking to build on a mutual understanding of objectives between
theCompany and its institutional shareholders
By sustaining an active dialogue with shareholders through presentations,
face-to-face meetings and the Company’s investor relations programme
By sending all shareholders a digital or hard copy of the Annual Report
and Accounts
We considered the Company’s capital allocation policy and concluded
that it would not be appropriate to pay a dividend during 2021 – but will
review the decision for FY23
We carefully considered the Company’s financial performance, market
expectations, shareholders’ interests and relationships with lenders – and
also the interests of employees, licensees and partners
84 TB | AR—’22
AUDIT & RISK COMMITTEE REPORT
Championing integrity and
goodgovernance
The integrity of any company’s financial statements and reporting
responsibilities is at the heart of good governance. The Ted Baker
Audit&Risk Committee takes great care in doing these vital tasks,
whilealso maintaining internal controls and compliance procedures.
Inaddition to these activities, thisyear we continued the important
workofre-establishing our internal audit function.
REVIEW OF FY22
We are coming to the end of the second
yearoftransformation at Ted Baker. This is
reported on more fully on pages 16-24.
Thepandemic has continued to influence
events,with challenges arising from sustained
periods of lockdown, the resulting temporary
store closures and the need to work from home.
The Committee’s priority has been to continue
tosupport transformation, including the
re-establishment of our internal audit function
and the appointment of Joe Payne as our new
Head of Internal Audit.
Although the onset of Omicron had a negative
effect on the 2021 Christmas season, at the time
of writing, the UK – and our stores – are opening
up again for business and we anticipate this will
be followed by the rest of the world in due
course. It’s great to see our team beginning
toreturn to the head office, with the in-person
interaction that this brings. The Finance team
hasembraced the new hybrid working
environment, and we hope that efficiency is
improved through increased communication,
both formal and informal.
As part of our robust attitude towards financial
analysis of the Group, the Committee has
conducted a thorough review of the significant
issues found in the financial statements, including
the carrying value of inventory, and of retail
fixedassets, going concern and the controls
environment. We have discussed and
challenged these issues with Management, and
reviewed the issues with the external auditors at
the end of the financial statements audit for the
period. Significant issues are discussed in
greater detail from page 62.
“ The important
work of improving
the overall controls
environment
hascontinued
toprogress
throughout
theyear.”
Jon Kempster
Chair of the Audit & Risk Committee
SR GR FS
85TB | AR—’22
The important work of improving the overall
controls environment has continued to progress
throughout the year, with the establishment of
aninternal audit function in the second half of
theyear. The Group also commissioned areport
by Harod Associates Ltd to identify global risks
and crime threats facing the Group. This is
especially relevant in a period when revenues
are expected to continue to grow andthe Group
isbusy delivering the transformation plan. The
report has provided agood checklist and
agenda for the Management Risk Committee,
(amanagement committee), tobolster certain
controls and devote the necessary resources
tothis project.
I am pleased to report that the reconstituted
Management Risk Committee has been
veryactive this year. The membership of the
Management Risk Committee includes
representatives from all Group disciplines,
enabling it to build a comprehensive risk
registerfocused on mitigating and monitoring
key aspects of risks identified.
The effect of successfully rebuilding the
Management Risk Committee, increasing
investment in the finance department and
improvements tothe controls environment has
brought about anoverall improvement in audit
and risk management alongside the Group-
wide transformation. It is fair to say that the
paceof improvement could be quicker, but
byprioritising the most important matters, the
Committee has helped to steer Ted Baker in
apositive direction. Equally, BDO LLP, at the
end of its second year atTed Baker, has been
helpful and supportive in its role as external
Group Auditor.
We look forward to working with Marc Dench
our newly appointed Group CFO in the
yearahead.
AUDIT & RISK COMMITTEE
MEMBERSHIP
Membership of the Audit & Risk Committee
hasbeen consistent through the year, with
Helena Feltham and Andrew Jennings continuing
to make valuable contributions. Helena has
continued as a member of the Audit & Risk
Committee while she is acting as Interim Chair
following John Barton’s sudden passing.
Although this is a technical breach of the
provisions of the Corporate Governance Code,
it is a temporary measure until a new Chair is
appointed. As many topics we discuss touch
onthe wider transformation strategy, the Chair,
Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial
Officer have open invitations toattend our
meetings. I would like to thank bothHelena and
Andrew for their incisive insights and hard work
this year.
Part of the annual review of the Audit & Risk
Committee’s effectiveness is based on the
expertise of its members. The Board is confident
we have the right mix of recent and relevant
financial experience and retail sector
competence. They are confident that we are
independent, and that we have the necessary
depth of financial and commercial experience
across various industries.
To see the Audit & Risk Committee’s terms
ofreference, please visit tedbakerplc.com.
WHERE WE HAVE FOCUSED OUR
EFFORTS THIS YEAR
The Committee held nine meetings this year.
These focused on the key areas outlined below.
We have been supported by meetings with
senior managers and our external auditors,
andinformed by regular reviews of Board
papers and financial information.
Controls remediation programme
The improvement programme recommended
byDeloitte is on track, following the stock
misstatement identified in FY20. We have
completed certain key controls and will
continuethe work, with full completion
expectedby the end of FY23.
Risk management
The Risk Committee is active and meets regularly.
We are confident that the risk management
process adopted by the Board worked well
toidentify risks and actions required.
External risk factors
The Committee is responsible for reviewing the
effectiveness of the Group’s risk management
system and internal controls. You can read
aboutthis in detail in the Principal Risks and
Uncertainties section on pages 62-66.
Internal audit
We had previously suspended any activity in
relation to the Internal Audit function and I am
pleased to report that we have recruited a new
Head of Internal Audit who has restarted the
function and will build a small team to assist.
Tax
We considered a range of tax matters, including
the potential impact of any tax matters on the
Group’s financial statements, the Group’s tax
strategy and the impact of Brexit.
Brexit
We considered the longer term impact of
Brexit.You will find details of the on-going
effects of Brexit in the CFO’s Financial review,
onpages 35-37.
86 TB | AR—’22
AUDIT & RISK COMMITTEE REPORT
Significant issues
The Committee reviewed management and external auditor reports on the significant issues found
inthe financial statements. Please see below for an in-depth look at these issues and how we
challenged the management team on each one. We also reviewed the issues with the external
auditors at the end of the financial statements audit for the period.
Significant issue Committee response and conclusions
CARRYING VALUE OF INVENTORY MANAGEMENT ACTION
Inventory is carried in the financial statements at the lower
ofcost and net realisable value. Adequate stock provision
was a specific focus at the end of this year.
Management presented the following changes to the Committee: the costs that
werepreviously capitalised into the inventory cost are now expensed; and the
stockprovision policy was updated to reflect a change from a future sales forecast
methodology to one which reviews the percentage of an original stock season
thathas entered the liquidation stage and the cost recovered at that time.
CONCLUSIONS
The Committee concluded that the correct measures had been taken by management.
CARRYING VALUE OF RETAIL FIXED ASSETS
Retail fixed assets includes leasehold improvements,
fixturesand fittings and the right of use assets.
The Group selected retail fixed assets for impairment testing
on the basis of current and projected performance, with
growth assumptions based on the Directors’ knowledge
andexperience.
MANAGEMENT ACTION
As with the prior year, management assessed all stores for impairment rather than
justthose meeting the defined criteria. The assumptions for future performance and
the discount rates to calculate the net present value of the forecast cashflows were
presented to the Committee.
Management also considered any change in the underlying trading environment to
trigger a reversal of impairments.
CONCLUSIONS
The Committee challenged the growth assumptions and discount rates used
bymanagement and the rationale for including all stores in the assessment.
Theimpaired balance at year end and the charge for the year by store were
discussed by the Committee. The Committee was in agreement with the
approachtaken.
GOING CONCERN
Going concern remains a focus for the Committee
giventheongoing effects of the pandemic and
macroeconomic factors.
MANAGEMENT ACTION
The Group has built a forecast that includes many key assumptions and alternative
forecasts with sensitivities. This gives the Group sufficient access to finance to
manage all possible scenarios.
CONCLUSIONS
The Committee reviewed the assumptions and forecasts that cover a period of
12months from the date of these accounts, along with the availability of financing
and concluded, with the support of the auditors, that the going concern assumption
isappropriate.
CONTROLS ENVIRONMENT
Following the stock misstatement identified in FY20 and
recommendations made by Deloitte at that time, controls
environment remains a focus for the Committee.
MANAGEMENT ACTION
The management team confirmed it was not aware of any material misstatements
orimmaterial misstatements made with the intention of telling a particular story.
CONCLUSIONS
The Committee reviewed and challenged the management team’s reports and
presentations, consulting the external auditors when necessary. Following discussions
with management and reviews of their work, the Committee established their
confidence in management’s preparation of year end accounts and confirmed that
management’s review of the controls environment is adequate.
The Committee is satisfied the financial statements address the critical judgements
and key estimates correctly (both in respect to the amounts reported and the
disclosures), and that the significant assumptions used to determine asset values
andliabilities have been scrutinised and challenged and are suitably robust.
SR GR FS
87TB | AR—’22
Significant issue Committee response and conclusions
CARRYING VALUE OF INVENTORY MANAGEMENT ACTION
Inventory is carried in the financial statements at the lower
ofcost and net realisable value. Adequate stock provision
was a specific focus at the end of this year.
Management presented the following changes to the Committee: the costs that
werepreviously capitalised into the inventory cost are now expensed; and the
stockprovision policy was updated to reflect a change from a future sales forecast
methodology to one which reviews the percentage of an original stock season
thathas entered the liquidation stage and the cost recovered at that time.
CONCLUSIONS
The Committee concluded that the correct measures had been taken by management.
CARRYING VALUE OF RETAIL FIXED ASSETS
Retail fixed assets includes leasehold improvements,
fixturesand fittings and the right of use assets.
The Group selected retail fixed assets for impairment testing
on the basis of current and projected performance, with
growth assumptions based on the Directors’ knowledge
andexperience.
MANAGEMENT ACTION
As with the prior year, management assessed all stores for impairment rather than
justthose meeting the defined criteria. The assumptions for future performance and
the discount rates to calculate the net present value of the forecast cashflows were
presented to the Committee.
Management also considered any change in the underlying trading environment to
trigger a reversal of impairments.
CONCLUSIONS
The Committee challenged the growth assumptions and discount rates used
bymanagement and the rationale for including all stores in the assessment.
Theimpaired balance at year end and the charge for the year by store were
discussed by the Committee. The Committee was in agreement with the
approachtaken.
GOING CONCERN
Going concern remains a focus for the Committee
giventheongoing effects of the pandemic and
macroeconomic factors.
MANAGEMENT ACTION
The Group has built a forecast that includes many key assumptions and alternative
forecasts with sensitivities. This gives the Group sufficient access to finance to
manage all possible scenarios.
CONCLUSIONS
The Committee reviewed the assumptions and forecasts that cover a period of
12months from the date of these accounts, along with the availability of financing
and concluded, with the support of the auditors, that the going concern assumption
isappropriate.
CONTROLS ENVIRONMENT
Following the stock misstatement identified in FY20 and
recommendations made by Deloitte at that time, controls
environment remains a focus for the Committee.
MANAGEMENT ACTION
The management team confirmed it was not aware of any material misstatements
orimmaterial misstatements made with the intention of telling a particular story.
CONCLUSIONS
The Committee reviewed and challenged the management team’s reports and
presentations, consulting the external auditors when necessary. Following discussions
with management and reviews of their work, the Committee established their
confidence in management’s preparation of year end accounts and confirmed that
management’s review of the controls environment is adequate.
The Committee is satisfied the financial statements address the critical judgements
and key estimates correctly (both in respect to the amounts reported and the
disclosures), and that the significant assumptions used to determine asset values
andliabilities have been scrutinised and challenged and are suitably robust.
TAX GOVERNANCE FRAMEWORK
The Chief Financial Officer is responsible for the
Group’s tax policy, which is implemented with
assistance from the senior finance and Group
tax team. We review this on an ongoing basis
aspart of our regular financial planning cycle.
The Group’s tax status is also reported regularly
to the Board and Audit & Risk Committee. The
Committee is responsible for monitoring all
significant tax matters including the Group’s
taxpolicy.
In accordance with the Finance Act 2016,
Ted Baker haspublished details of the Group’s
tax strategyin relation to UK taxation on its
website. tedbakerplc.com/investor-relations/
tax-strategy
EXTERNAL AUDIT
Every year, the Audit & Risk Committee considers
the reappointment of the external auditors. We
also assess their independence onan ongoing
basis and oversee the Group’s relationship with
the external auditors. We makerecommendations
to the Board on their appointment, reappointment
and removal, along with approving their
remuneration and terms of engagement.
Following the tender process in 2020, BDO
wasappointed as Group Auditor on 21 July
2020. BDO has been helpful and clear in
communicating its findings to the Committee
andmanagement.
The Board and Audit & Risk Committee also
consider our external auditors as suppliers of
non-audit services when required. Our formal
policy on the supply of non-audit services by
ourexternal auditors means they may only
deliver these services on the condition that their
advice does not conflict with their statutory
responsibilities and ethical guidance and FRC
feedback. The Audit & Risk Committee Chair’s
pre-approval is required before the Company
uses BDO to provide non-audit services.
Where non-audit fees are expected to be
above £50,000, approval is required from the
Audit &Risk Committee Chair and one other
member of the Committee. Aggregate spend is
also reviewed on an annual basis. You can find
details of the external auditors’ remuneration
foraudit and non-audit fees in Note 6 to the
financial statements.
The effectiveness of the external auditors was
based on a review of:
Their fulfilment of the agreed audit plan
andvariations from it
Reports highlighting the major issues that
come up in the audit.
The Audit & Risk Committee held meetings with
the external auditors before each Committee
meeting to review key issues around their scope
and responsibilities. This oversight of the external
audit process reviewed the following:
The terms, areas of responsibility, associated
duties and scope of the audit as set out in
BDO’s engagement letter for the
forthcomingyear
BDO’s overall work plan for the
forthcomingyear
BDO’s fee proposal
The major issues that came up in the course
of the audit and how they were resolved
Key accounting and audit judgements
The level and number of errors identified
during the audit
Recommendations made by BDO in its
management letters and the adequacy
ofourmanagement’s response.
The Audit & Risk Committee notes the final
Orderof the Competition and Markets
Authorityand the EU regulation on audit
rotation.We will ensure Ted Baker complies
withthese requirements when considering the
timing of the next tender for our external audit.
Financial Reporting Council’s review
ofBDOaudit files
BDO’s audit files in relation to the Company for
the year ended 30 January 2021 were reviewed
by the Financial Reporting Council’s Audit
Quality Review team. The Committee received
the final report in April 2022 and was pleased
with the assessment andthat no key findings
were noted. The reportalso highlighted elements
of good practice. The external auditor (BDO)
has takensteps to address other findings for
theFY22 audit.
INTERNAL AUDIT
The Audit & Risk Committee also oversees the
Group’s internal audit function. This includes its
role, mandate and audit plan.
As reported last year, we stopped outsourcing
our internal audit function to PwC. I am pleased
to report that we have appointed Joe Payne as
Head of Internal Audit at Ted Baker during the
year. Joe joined us from Selfridges and brings
considerable internal audit experience in retail
environments to the table.
Joe’s arrival is an important development
astheGroup seeks to re-establish the internal
audit discipline at Ted Baker. The Group aims
toincrease the resources available to the
department through the current financial year.
Todate, we have agreed the areas of focus
thatwill form part of the work to be done in the
current year. The Committee has signed off the
charter and looks forward to supporting Joe
andhis incoming colleagues in delivering their
work programme.
WHISTLE BLOWING
The Audit & Risk Committee is responsible for
reviewing how Ted Baker responds to whistle
blowers’ allegations and how team members
can raise concerns in confidence. Whistle
blowers can choose to remain anonymous
iftheywish. All reports of allegations or concerns
in relation to corporate impropriety are sent to
the Group’s General Counsel and a member
ofthe Non-Executive Team. We hope this will
encourage team members to speak out without
fear of reprisal.
Jon Kempster
Chair of the Audit & Risk Committee
26 May 2022
88 TB | AR—’22
NOMINATIONS COMMITTEE REPORT
Strengthening our leadership to drive our
transformation plan
Through the last incredibly challenging two years, our people have been
akeyfocus at Ted Baker. As well as navigating the unpredictable events
surrounding the pandemic, our Executive Team and the wider Ted Baker
teamhave had toadapt to working from home along with the many
changesbrought about by our ongoing transformation. The Nominations
Committee has worked with the Board and senior management to support
them through these challenges. Wehave focused on further strengthening
theGroup’s leadership and Executive Team and creating aBoard that now
hasa good balance of gender, diversity, expertise and skills.
“ We’ve strengthened the
Boardinrecent years, and it’s
been great to see the excellent
andproductive working
relationships... between Board
members and senior managers.”
Helena Feltham
Chair of the Nominations Committee
I chaired the Committee this year with Non-
Executive Directors (NEDs) Jon Kempster and
Andrew Jennings as members. The Committee’s
role is to establish and implement a framework
toappoint NEDs, Executive Directors and senior
management. We also oversee the development
of a diverse pipeline of candidates for succession
to the Board and senior management roles.
Members of the Executive Team are invited
tojoin us when necessary andappropriate.
REVIEW OF FY22
We started the year by consolidating our
progress on diversity and inclusion, which I talk
more about in our work in FY22 from page 91.
We also completed an independent Board
evaluation, to complement the independent
external evaluation we carried outin 2020.
In the summer we were delighted to welcome
Fumbi Chima and Meg Lustman as independent
NEDs. We look forward to supporting them as
we continue to deliver our transformation strategy.
We were also pleased to make two key
appointments to the senior management team:
Rishi Sharma as Group General Counsel and
Company Secretary, and Jason Beckley as
Chief Customer, Marketing and Digital Officer.
SR GR FS
89TB | AR—’22
Andrew notified the Board in November 2021
that he would step down as a NED in January
2022, after more than eight years’ service.
Following John Barton’s untimely death,
Andrewagreed to stay on as a NED until
the2022 AGM, to provide continuity on the
Board andallow us time to find John’s successor.
Andrew also continued in his role as Chair of
theRemuneration Committee.
On behalf of the Board, I would like to thank
Andrew for his ongoing support. The Committee
is reviewing the balance of skills and experience
required at Board level in anticipation of Andrew
stepping down as a NED.
OUR WORK IN FY22
Appointments
We’ve strengthened the Board in recent years,
and it’s been great to see the excellent working
relationships that have developed between
Board members and senior managers.
For all external appointments at Board level
wehave used either Sam Allen Associates or
Spencer Stuart as search consultants. Neither
company has any connection with individual
members of the Board. Here I outline the most
recent changes to those roles.
Board appointments
New Chair of the Board
The Nominations Committee worked with
consultancy Spencer Stuart to find John’s
replacement as Chair of the Board, while I took
on the role of Interim Chair in December 2021.
I did this alongside my existing roles as Senior
Independent Director (SID), Chair of the
Nominations Committee and member of the
Audit& Risk and Remuneration Committees.
Although holding these roles at the same time
does notstrictly comply with the Code, the
Boarddecided not to make any changes for
tworeasons: I didn’t wish to be considered for the
permanent position of Chair, and any short-term
changes to the Board committees might have
been disruptive and not inthe Company’s
bestinterests.
This decision meant there was no conflict
ofinterest in my leading the search, which
wasmy responsibility as Chair of the
Nominations Committee.
Two new NEDs
In August we were pleased to appoint two
newNEDs.
Fumbi Chima is currently Executive Vice-President
and Chief Information Officer atBECU, the
US-based credit union, and bringstoTed Baker
significant and valuable experience implementing
digital transformation strategies across a range
of industries.
Meg Lustman has worked in fashion retail for
more than 30 years and has led the growth and
turnaround of many well-known British brands.
Her wide-ranging experience has seen her help
to create sustainable growth, online and offline,
in UK markets and internationally.
New CFO
Marc Dench was appointed Chief Financial
Officer on8 March 2022. He is an experienced
retail and brand leader who joined the Company
from Health Hero, the digital health platform.
Before this, Marc spent over five years as
CFOand director of Joules Group plc, the
international retail brand, where he supported
the company through an IPO, strategic growth
andits transformation to a data and digitally
ledbusiness.
Prior to joining Joules, Marc was CFO of the
Global Brands and International Retail division
of Walgreens Boots Alliance and held a number
of finance and corporate development roles
across businesses including Walgreens Boots
Alliance, HomeServe and Experian.
New responsibilities
I have very much enjoyed my role as designated
NED for workforce engagement. Given my other
responsibilities this year, however, I handed the
role to Meg in January 2022. We are confident
she will do this work successfully and we look
forward to seeing her engaging with our people.
Senior management appointments
New Group General Counsel and
CompanySecretary
Rishi Sharma is a corporate lawyer by
background and joined Ted Baker as Group
General Counsel and Company Secretary
inDecember 2021. Heisresponsible for our
governance and howwe manage risk, and
forsupporting the Board and our Executive
Team tomake sure our commercial strategy
sitswithin our governance and risk framework.
New Chief Customer, Marketing and
DigitalOfficer
Jason Beckley joined us in January 2022, having
led marketing and brand strategy forseveral
high-profile brands. As Chief Customer, Marketing
and Digital Officer, hewilllead our digital teams
to develop anddeliver our vision and strategy
and our ongoing performance improvements.
Induction and training
With the help of the Company Secretarial team,
Iam responsible for our induction programmes,
which new Directors undertake when they
areappointed.
The programme gives them a broad range of
information about the Group, tailored to their
previous experience, including:
Information about the operational
performance and business of the Group
Details of Group strategy, corporate
governance and Board procedures
Activities and meetings with key personnel
Technical briefings
Site visits.
We find this is an effective way of introducing
them to the Group’s culture, and of making sure
they understand the business so they can be
productive in their role.
90 TB | AR—’22
NOMINATIONS COMMITTEE REPORT
The Committee also looked at the training
Directors had done during the year. This included
technical and topical updates from theCompany
Secretarial team at Board meetings and specific
training events with otherin-house and external
subject experts andadvisers.
This work is an important part of helping
Directors to keep their knowledge current
andtoenhance their experience. We have
developed a full training programme for FY23.
How we make appointments
APPOINTMENTS PROCESS
Together they
Specify the role
Specify what to consider – diversity, existing skills and experience
Engage external consultants
Agree interview structure and process
Compile list of interviewers for different stages of selection process
Consider need to consult any shareholders
Engage with Remuneration Committee
Once agreed, they
Set timetable
Begin search process
Roles
NEDs
Executive Directors
Senior management
Nominations Committee
Leads process
Works with the CEO
Female 50%
Male 50%
Dir
ectors
Female 37.5%
Male 62.5%
Senior management, including
th
e Company Secretary
Female 53%
Male 47%
Senior management and
th
eir direct reports
GENDER SPLIT
Succession planning
By supporting our most talented people this way,
we can identify the right people to deliver our
strategy. Each year we review the skills and
experience of our current Board members and
consider whether they are appropriate to help us
to deliver our strategic goals now and in future.
This year we worked closely with our Chief
Executive Officer, Rachel Osborne; and Chief
People Officer, Peter Collyer; to make sure the
right structures and succession plans are in place
for our strategy.
This is why we encourage regular discussion
between members of senior management
andthe Board, which may be through:
Presentations to the Board
Store and warehouse visits
One-to-one sessions with NEDs to discuss
specific issues
Senior managers attending at least one
Board meeting a year
Our successful strategy day in October 2021,
attended by all members of the Boardand
senior management
Opportunities for the Board and senior
management to meet informally.
SR GR FS
91TB | AR—’22
Peter regularly presents our succession planning
and talent development programme to the
Board. For Executive Director and senior
management roles, plans are also in place for
sudden, unforeseen absences and for orderly
medium- and longer-term succession.
Our succession plans are designed in line with
the Committee’s terms of reference, available at
tedbakerplc.com/investor-relations/corporate-
governance, and the Group’s Equality, Diversity
and Discrimination Policy, tobuild a diverse
succession pipeline for theCompany.
Diversity and inclusion
Boardroom diversity is an important
consideration when assessing a candidate’s
ability to contribute to and complement
abalanced Board. We have work to do on this
toensure we have a team of people who will
help us achieve a similar balance at every level
of the business. They must represent our
customers and be able to keep the brand
relevant and successful. That’s why we always
make appointments on merit against objective
diversity and inclusion criteria – and follow the
Group’s Equality Diversity and Discrimination
Policy to help us do this.
Gender Pay Gap reporting
We published our most recent UK Gender Pay
Gap Report. The results were disappointing and
we know we have more work to do in this area.
We will continue to address the issues over the
coming year. You can see the full report at
tedbakerplc.com/teds-responsibilities/
sustainability-and-the-environment
Progressing our diversity and inclusion agenda
Over the year we:
launched an inclusion strategy to address the
entire team member experience at Ted Baker,
as part of our commitment to the British Retail
Consortium charter
welcomed the Hampton-Alexander Review,
which seeks to improve board and senior
management diversity across FTSE 350
companies.
added ‘Inclusive’ to our Company values
began investing in the skills of 20 future
female leaders, equipping them to mentor
more junior female talent and helping them
todevelop their careers. We are focusing
onour UK head office functions, where there
is an uneven gender balance
introduced pay benchmarking, as part of
ourcareer levelling framework, to inform pay
decisions and make sure we have a robust
and fair approach to pay
implemented new family-friendly policies
andbenefits – for mothers and fathers –
tosupport the financial wellbeing of team
members when caring for a family.
OUR OBJECTIVES FOR THE
YEARAHEAD
This year we will continue to review the skills
andexperience we need for the next stage of
our transformation.
GENDER SPLIT
“ Boardroom diversity is a critical
consideration when assessing
acandidate’s ability to contribute to
andcomplement a balanced Board.”
Helena Feltham
Chair of the Nominations Committee
We also have several objectives for the year
ahead, which include:
adding to our family-friendly policies by
establishing network groups for parents that
can provide emotional support and a safe
space for them to discuss important issues
intheir community
updating our flexible working policies by
ɣ offering a hybrid working model as
people return to the office
ɣ relaunching Core Hours at our offices,
allowing team members to flex their
working hours for an optimum work-life
balance
ɣ planning to offer more part-time and
job-share roles
developing our inclusion strategy by
ɣ broadening our approach to attracting
talent and having a gender-balanced
shortlist for mid-manager and senior hires
ɣ reviewing all our job advertisements
anddescriptions, removing gendered
language and making sure no job
soundslike it excludes women
ɣ introducing inclusive hiring training,
including unconscious bias training, for
allhiring managers and our People team
ɣ piloting our programme for 20 future
female leaders as a flagship talent offering
at Ted Baker, and an integral partof the
way we nurture and develop female talent.
We are proud of how our people have risen
tomeet the ongoing challenges of the current
business environment – and are excited about
the appointments we have made and the
measures we are putting in place.
Helena Feltham
Chair of the Nominations Committee
26 May 2022
92 TB | AR—’22
COMPLIANCE WITH THE CODE
How we comply with the Code
This information shows how we’ve applied the principles of the Code
andcomplied with its provision. It cross references with the Remuneration
report and to other sections that describe specific actions we’ve taken
during the current year.
The UK Corporate Governance Code 2018
(Code) requires the Company to set and
maintain a meaningful corporate culture with
astrong ethical base. The Code is available
atfrc.org.uk.
In this Statement of Compliance, the Board
ispleased to confirm that the Company has
applied the principles and complied with the
provisions of the Code during the financial
year ending 29 January 2022 (FY22).
Here we show how the Board applied the
principles set out in the Code this year.
1. BOARD LEADERSHIP AND
COMPANY PURPOSE
A. The role of the Board
The Board is responsible for the long-term
success of the Group, and for delivering value
to shareholders. The Board offers strategic
leadership and effective oversight of the
Group’s operations, either directly or through
the work of its principal committees.
The Board is effective and entrepreneurial,
focusing this year on the transformation
programme (see page 16), the ongoing
development of our digital strategy (see page 21)
and workforce engagement (see page 42).
B. Purpose and culture
Through governance, the Board’s primary focus
is to promote the Group’s ambition to be the
most engaging global British lifestyle brand.
TheBoard leads inestablishing the Group’s
purpose, values and strategy, and aligning
thesewith Group culture.
The Board reviewed the Group’s values and
culture during FY21 and oversaw updates
tothese at the beginning of FY22. The Board
ispleased with the progress made in this area
sofar, as detailed on page 41.
C. Resources and controls
The Board reviews financial and operational
performance, and risk management and
appetite, along with the Group’s capital
structureand plans proposed by management
toimplement agreed strategies. The Board
makes sure that enough resources are
availableto meet the agreed objectives.
This year theBoard continued to address the
challenges posed to the Company’s financial
position by the continuing pandemic.
The Board has ultimate responsibility for the
oversight and monitoring of the Group’s
governance, principal risks and controls
framework, too. You can find more information
about the Group’s internal financial control and
risk management systems in the Audit & Risk
Committee Report on page 84.
D. Stakeholder engagement
The Board carefully considers the interests
ofshareholders, key stakeholders and wider
society as part of its decision-making process.
You can read more about our stakeholder
engagement activities in the s172 table on
page82. You can find more information about
the Board’s activities during the year, including
examples of how it considered the interests of the
stakeholders, on page 82. The Group’s ethics
and sustainability policies frame the Group’s
approach to understanding our impact on the
world and how we contribute to wider society
(see pages 48-59).
E. Workforce engagement
The Board regularly reviews the Group’s
workforce policies and practices to make sure
they are consistent with the Group’s values and
support sustainable long-term success. During
the year we reviewed and endorsed the revised
policies and practices (see page 40).
The Board is ultimately responsible for the
Group’s confidential whistle blowing reporting
facility. The Remuneration Committee is
responsible for reviewing workforce
remuneration and related policies, as well as
aligning incentives and culture (see page 100).
In FY21, the Group set up the Fresh Eyes
employee forum, giving the Board and senior
management the chance to engage directly
withteam members and receive feedback on
thebusiness. In January 2022, Meg Lustman
succeeded Helena Feltham as NED for
workforce engagement. You can find more
information about the Board’s engagement
withthe team from page 78.
2. DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES
F. Role of the Chair
Helena Feltham is currently Interim Chair and
responsible for the role’s overall effectiveness.
She took on this role when John Barton died
andwill hand over to the new Chair when
theyare appointed. Helena was considered
independent when she was appointed and
continues to demonstrate objective judgement
and promote a culture of openness and
constructive debate. She works with Chief
Executive Officer (CEO) Rachel Osborne
andCompany Secretary Rishi Sharma to make
sure all Directors receive accurate, timely and
clear information.
SR GR FS
93TB | AR—’22
G. Composition of the Board
At the date of this report the Board comprises
theInterim Chair, CEO, ChiefFinancial Officer
(CFO), four independent Non-Executive
Directors (NEDs) and one otherNED. You can
find biographies of these Directors, and changes
to the Board during thefinancial year, from
page72.
The Board is confident that its current
membership and recent appointments
offeragood balance of skills, experience,
independence and knowledge, allowing
ittodischarge its responsibilities effectively.
There is a clear division of responsibilities
between the leadership of the Board and the
executive leadership of the business. The roles
ofChair, CEO, CFO and Senior Independent
Director (SID) are clearly separated and set out
in writing. Their division of responsibilities, along
with matters reserved for the Board and the
termsof reference for each Committee, mean
that no individual has unfettered decision-
makingpowers.
In accordance with Provision 10 of the 2018
Code, at its February and December 2021
meetings the Board considered the
independence of each NED and determined
that all remain independent of management
andfree from any relationship that could
interfere with their judgement, except for
ColinLaFontaine Jackson. Colin was
appointeda Director as a representative
ofRayKelvin, the Company’s founder, in
accordance with the terms of a relationship
agreement between Rayand the Company.
H. Role of the NEDs
The NEDs provide constructive challenge
andstrategic guidance, offer specialist advice
according to individual areas of expertise,
andhold management to account. They bring
an external perspective to Board discussions.
The Group benefits from the broad range of
skills and experience they bring from different
businesses and fields, including the financial,
retail and marketing sectors.
The SID is Helena Feltham, whose role would
normally be to act as a sounding board for the
Chair and as an intermediary for other Directors
and shareholders when needed. You can find
more information about the SID’s role in the
Nominations Committee Report on page 88.
I. Role of the Company Secretary
The Board’s Company Secretary, Rishi Sharma,
provides a high level of support to the Board,
making sure it has the policies, processes, time
and resources it needs to function effectively
andefficiently.
All Directors have access to a Board portal,
which is used to distribute Board and Committee
materials, governance materials and analysts’
notes. Board meetings are scheduled well
inadvance and, when meetings need to be
calledat short notice or additional meetings are
needed, efforts are made to find suitable times
when all Directors can attend. When this is not
possible, Directors still have access to the
briefing materials and minutes of all meetings
onthe Board portal.
Directors can also discuss any agenda item with
the Chair, CEO or relevant Committee Chair at
any other time. All Directors have access to the
advice and services of the Company Secretary
too. Directors may also take independent
professional advice when needed, at the
Company’s expense.
The letters of appointment for the Chair and
NEDs state the expected time commitment
needed to fulfil their roles. The Chair and
NEDsare expected to set aside sufficient time
toprepare for meetings. Directors commit the
time they need to prepare and attend Board
meetings and any other ad hoc meetings that
take place during the year. The Board is satisfied
that all Directors continue to devote sufficient
time to discharge their duties effectively. This
year they all spent a considerable amount of
extra time in Board and Committee meetings
toreview, and deal with, the critical issues the
Group faced.
3. COMPOSITION, SUCCESSION
ANDEVALUATION
J. Appointments to the Board and
successionplanning
There is a formal, rigorous and transparent
procedure for the appointment of new Directors.
The process for new appointments is led by the
Nominations Committee.
All Directors will stand for reappointment at the
next Annual General Meeting (2022 AGM).
The Notice of 2022 AGM will include
abiography of each Director, setting out the
skills they bring to Ted Baker and why their
contribution is, and continues to be, important
tothe long-term success of the Group.
You can find more information about the
processfor appointing NEDs in the Nominations
Committee Report from page 88.
K. Skills, experience and knowledge of the
Board and its committees
The Nominations Committee is responsible for
developing and overseeing succession plans
forthe Board and senior management. The
Committee considers each Director’s length
ofservice, and their skills and experience.
Appointments and succession plans are based
on merit and objective criteria. They are
intended to promote diversity and inclusivity.
Youcan find more information about succession
planning and diversity and inclusion in the
Nominations Committee Report on page 88.
L. Board evaluation
Annual evaluations of the Board look at its
composition, diversity and how effectively
members work together, and separately,
toachieve objectives. During FY22 the Board
undertook an external Board evaluation
usingCalibro, which has no relationship with
theCompany or any individual Director
(seepage 80).
94 TB | AR—’22
COMPLIANCE WITH THE CODE
4. AUDIT, RISK AND INTERNAL
CONTROL
M. Internal and external audit
The Audit & Risk Committee monitors the integrity
of Ted Baker’s financial statements and reporting
responsibilities and maintains its internal controls
and compliance procedures. It monitors the
independence and effectiveness of internal audit
and our external auditors and reports regularly
to the Board.
You can find more information about the
Committee’s membership, its work and our
internal audit function during the year in the
Audit& Risk Committee Report on page 84.
N. Fair, balanced and understandable
assessment
The Directors are responsible for making sure
theAnnual Report and Accounts, taken as
awhole, is fair, balanced and understandable,
and that it provides the information necessary
forshareholders to assess the Group’s
performance, business model and strategy.
The Board reviews and signs off the Annual
Report and Accounts at a full Board meeting.
Tosupport the rigour of this process, in FY22
theBoard established a steering group for the
Annual Report that includes the CFO and two
NEDs – Jon Kempster and Meg Lustman.
O. Risk management and internal control
framework
The Board is ultimately responsible for our
approach to risk management and internal
controls. It is also responsible for reviewing
howeffective our management and controls
areand for setting the Group’s appetite for risk.
This is done on a regular basis, helping us to
identify emerging risks and assess the status
ofexisting risks.
You can find more information about our risk
management and internal controls framework
from page 60.
5. REMUNERATION
P. Remuneration policies and practices
The aim of the Directors’ Remuneration Policy
isto attract, motivate and retain high-quality
management. It is designed to incentivise
Executive Directors according to the levels
ofvalue generated for shareholders. We use
performance metrics that create a strong link
between Executive Directors’ remuneration
andbusiness performance over the short and
longer term.
Our remuneration policy was approved by
shareholders at the 2020 AGM and we are
now developing a new three-year policy
toputto shareholders at the 2023 AGM.
Youcan find a high-level summary of the
policyfrom page 99.
Q. Developing Executive remuneration
The Remuneration Committee is responsible
forsetting the remuneration packages of the
Executive Directors and other senior executives
who fall within the scope of the Committee.
TheCommittee approves all service contracts
and other contracts between the Company
andthe Executive Directors and senior
executives. If appropriate, it also approves
anyoutside interests and other directorships
ofthe Executive Directors.
The Committee also reviews and approves the
design of the Company’s long-term incentive
schemes. It determines the level of awards
tobemade and approves the performance
metrics and targets.
R. Exercising independent judgement
The Remuneration Committee Chair and
members are all independent NEDs. The
Committee meets both with and without
management present and, where necessary,
takes advice from external remuneration adviser,
Deloitte LLP – including considerations of its
independence. The Committee determines
remuneration outcomes each year by assessing
Executive Directors’ performance against the
remuneration policy and their respective
performance criteria.
During the year the Committee was chaired
byAndrew Jennings and its members included
Helena Feltham and Jon Kempster. Andrew will
step down from the Board at the 2022 AGM.
You can find a discussion of the Committee’s
work during the year in the Remuneration
Committee report from page 96.
SR GR FS
95TB | AR—’22
GOVERNANCE STRUCTURE
The Board and the Committee structure is set out below:
BOARD AND COMMITTEE ATTENDANCE
The next table shows the number of Board and Committee meetings held during FY22 and the
attendance record of each Director.
Timetabled
Board meetings
Audit & Risk
Committee
Remuneration
Committee
Nominations
Committee
Number of meetings held 16 9 4 3
Helena Feltham 16 9 4 3
Rachel Osborne 16 7 4 3
David Wolffe 16 9 4 –
John Barton
1
13 6 3 2
Fumbi Chima
2
7 1 – –
Andrew Jennings 15 7 4 3
Jon Kempster 16 9 4 3
Colin La Fontaine Jackson 15 – – –
Meg Lustman
2
7 – 1 –
1 Following his death, John ceased to be a Director on 4 December 2021.
2 Appointed to the Board on 4 August 2021.
The following team members were also invited to attend Board meetings during the year:
Name Role
Helen Costello Group Commercial and Business Development Director
Tikki Godley Group Trading Director
Peter Collyer Chief People Officer
Leon Shepherd Chief Information Officer
Anthony Cuthbertson Global Creative Director
Ari Hoffman CEO – North America
Peter Hearsey-Zoubie Company Secretary until November 2021
Rishi Sharma Company Secretary from December 2021
Maria Yianni Deputy Company Secretary
Ted Baker plc
Board of Directors
Audit & Risk
Committee
Management Risk
Committee
Remuneration
Committee
Nominations
Committee
Disclosure
Committee
96 TB | AR—’22
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT
Recognising everyone’s commitment
Despite another very difficult year for everyone, we have seen good
progress in our transformation plan. This has been made possible
bythecommitment of the Executive Team, ably supported by senior
management and the efforts of all colleagues at every level. As a result,
the Company has continued to manage cash and costs effectively and
continued the disciplines put in place to keep the business running as
smoothly as possible. As a result, we are delighted to have been able
torecognise and reward everyone’s hard work and dedication.
“ The Committee considers
thattheincentive outcomes...
appropriately reflect the
Company’s performance
intheyear and reward the
progressmade on our
transformation journey.”
Andrew Jennings OBE
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
Part A:
Annual Statement
The Remuneration Committee met formally fourtimes to do
thework needed this year. Given theongoing impact of the
pandemic, theCommittee considered how incentives
shouldbestructured, balancing short-term continuing
uncertainty with the recovery after lockdown restrictions
eased and international travel opened up.
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE
The Committee is chaired by me, with fellow Non-Executive
Directors (NEDs) HelenaFeltham and Jon Kempster.
MegLustman attended Remuneration Committee meetings
toensure there was a succession plan for my departure.
Herinput will be much appreciated as the Committee looks
toreview our executive remuneration approach over the next
year. Members of the Executive Team are invited toattend
meetings when appropriate but are notinvolved in any
discussion regarding their own remuneration.
I will be stepping down from the Board at the upcoming
AGM. In anticipation of this, I would like toextend a special
thanks to Helena and Jon fortheir invaluable support and
contribution to the Committee’s work over the last few years.
SR GR FS
97TB | AR—’22
PERFORMANCE IN THE YEAR
It is important to set the context for our
approachto remuneration, based on the
Group’s performance over the last 12 months.
Ted Baker continues to make significant progress
with its transformation despite the challenges
and headwinds in the wider world. Our strategic
decision to re-establish our premium brand
positioning has meant moving away from the
aggressive promotional stance of prior years.
While this has lowered sales growth rates in
theshort term, it has delivered a better trading
margin and will be key to building a stronger
business, which will deliver sustainable and
long-term returns for our shareholders and
otherstakeholders.
During the year, Ted Baker opened over 20
newstores capitalising on the local shopping
trend and driving increased local engagement
and brand awareness. Our product is resonating
with customers, and we have seen a strong initial
reaction to the Spring/Summer ’22 collection.
Excellent progress has also been made in
elevating the ESG agenda within the business.
There have been significant improvements in
supply chain transparency so we can ensure fair,
ethical, sustainable practices are in place and
we continue to focus on creating beautiful,
sustainable products. In addition, 2021 saw the
launch of the Group’s ambitious carbon targets,
with the aim to be 100% net zero across all our
Scope 1 and 2 operations by 2030.
The Group has consistently demonstrated
strongfinancial discipline throughout the year,
delivering on targeted cost savings. In July,
weannounced our new global head office,
theGorgeous Brown Building, which will
deliversignificant savings on rent, rates and
utilities. Management continues to closely
monitor theincreasing pressures across the
economy, especially for wages and supply
chain costs, and remains committed to
maintaining costdisciplines.
Overall, notwithstanding the challenges in
year,encouraging progress has been made
andTed Baker is well positioned as it emerges
fromthe pandemic and looks to the future
withconfidence. Against this backdrop,
theCommittee considered remuneration
outcomes for FY22.
REMUNERATION OUTCOMES FORFY22
Recognising the continued impact of the
pandemic on the business, including that
manyof Ted Baker’s stores remained closed
foraperiod during FY22 and that the Group
continued to be in receipt of UK government
support via the furlough scheme, it was
determined that the annual bonus for FY22
would operate over two separate periods.
For FY22, 75% of the bonus was based on
profittargets and 25% was based on strategic
objectives aligned to the delivery of the strategy,
subject to a full year profit underpin. While the
strategic element operated for the full financial
year (subject to the financial underpin), the
financial element operated for a reduced
period, taking into account the Company’s
reliance on government support.
While financial performance for FY22 was
below the threshold target set, the full year
profitunderpin was met and therefore there
waspayment in respect of the strategic element.
Considering the excellent strategic progress
made in the year and the personal performance
of both Executive Directors, it was determined
that the strategic element would pay out
attargetfor the CEO and at 65% of target for
the CFO, resulting in an overall performance
related payment of £131,250 for the CEO
and£64,188 for theCFO which represents
17%and 11% of maximum respectively.
Thisapproach was in linewith the approach
forother colleagues whoalso received
abonusin respect of the strategic element.
Long-Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) awards granted
in2019 were due to vest inApril 2022.
Reflecting the difficult trading conditions over
thelast couple of years, the profitand share
price targets were not met andtherefore
awardslapsed in full. Neither ofthe Executive
Directors in role during the yearparticipated
inthis LTIP grant.
Overall, the Committee considers that the
incentive outcomes for FY22 appropriately
reflect the Company’s performance in the
yearand reward the progress made on our
transformation journey in another very difficult
year. No discretion was therefore applied in
respect of these outcomes.
WIDER WORKFORCE
The remuneration approach at Ted Baker is
broadly consistent across the Group to ensure
business strategy and performance are aligned,
and the total reward is sufficient to attract and
retain high-performing and talented individuals.
All team members of Ted Baker are entitled to
abase salary and, depending upon their role
inthe Group, a range of benefits and access
toa discretionary corporate and individual
performance-based annual or periodic bonus.
Our senior leaders continue to be critical to the
successful delivery of our strategy, and therefore
participate in share plans on a similar basis as
the Executive Directors. This ensures that all
individuals across the senior team are driving
towards a common goal.
This year, the Remuneration Committee was also
pleased to offer all our UK-based employees,
including Executive Directors, the chance to
again share in the success of the strategy
throughthe Ted Baker Sharesave Scheme.
In April 2021, we increased salaries for our
teammembers who earned £30,000 (full-time
equivalent) or less, and we continue to pay
theNational Living Wage regardless of age.
Anyone who did not receive a salary review in
April was considered for one in the second half
of the year and received a 2% increase effective
from 1 August 2021. Executive Directors were
not awarded a salary increase during the year.
98 TB | AR—’22
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT
We have a designated NED for workforce
engagement, see page 77. In addition, theChief
People Officer is invited to attend Remuneration
Committee meetings to provide the Committee
with an update on current pay policies and
practices across the Group. The Committee is
therefore confident that its pay decisions are
appropriate in the context of the broader
workforce experience.
The Committee also has oversight of Ted Baker’s
Gender Pay Gap Report, which is published
onour investor relations website at
tedbakerplc.com. The Committee recognises
that there is more to do in promoting and
supporting the progression of female talent
throughout the business. ‘Inclusive’ is one of
Ted Baker’s new values and during the year
work was done to embed the new inclusion
strategy to build Ted Baker as amodern,
representative fashion brand.
STRENGTHENING OUR
LEADERSHIPTEAM
In March 2022, we announced that Marc
Dench would succeed David Wolffe as Chief
Financial Officer of the Group. All remuneration
arrangements in connection with this transition
have been managed in line with the
Remuneration Policy.
Marc will receive a base salary of £350,000
(11% below that of his predecessor) and
apension contribution of 3% of base salary
thatis in line with the wider workforce. He will
participate in incentives on the same basis
asother Executive Directors, with a maximum
annual bonus opportunity of 150% of salary
andmaximum LTIP opportunity of 125% of
salary. Marc also received a buy-out of
remuneration forgone on leaving his previous
employer. The Committee believes that this
award is no more generous, either in terms
oftheamount or the timing.
Further details on both Marc and David’s
remuneration arrangements are set out in
thisreport.
THE YEAR AHEAD
The Remuneration Committee has proposed an
increase in base salary for the Chief Executive
Officer of 2% for FY23. This is consistent with
thegeneral approach being taken for other
higher earning employees across the Group.
The Chief Financial Officer’s salary was set
onappointment.
Maximum incentive opportunities for FY23
willremain unchanged. The Remuneration
Committee reviewed annual bonus measures
and targets for FY23 and determined that for
thisyear a new target based on free cash
flowperformance would be introduced,
withaweighting of 15% of the total bonus
opportunity. This is in addition to 60% of the
totalbonus being based on stretching profit
targets and 25% being based on strategic
objectives linked to the delivery of the
transformation, with metrics focused on
brand,product, people, ESG, and personal
performance. Both the free cash flow and
strategic targets will be subject to a full-year
profit underpin being met.
Free cash flow is a strategic imperative for
Ted Baker and essential to delivering the
transformation of the business. The Committee
therefore considered it appropriate to include
within the annual bonus for this year to further
underline the importance of cash management
throughout the business. As part of the Group’s
capital raise in 2020, a free cash flow target for
FY23 was communicated to investors and this
was taken into account when setting the annual
bonus targets for this year. The Committee was
mindful that the LTIP also includes a cash flow
target, however, the annual bonus cascades
further down throughout the organisation and
therefore it was considered that including it in the
annual bonus would ensure all employees are
incentivised to deliver against our cash flow
targets and external commitments.
The overall LTIP structure remains consistent with
prior years. The Remuneration Committee is still
considering targets for FY23, taking into account
internal and external forecasts, and these will be
disclosed on our website in due course.
The current remuneration policy was approved
by shareholders at the 2020 AGM and,
therefore, in line with the normal three-year
cycle, a new policy is required to be put to
shareholder vote at the 2023 AGM. In advance
of this, the Committee will undertake a full review
of the policy and its implementation to ensure it
remains aligned to the forward-looking strategy.
We remain committed to transparency and look
forward to consulting with shareholders and
other stakeholders over the coming year about
the policy renewal.
I would like to thank our shareholders for
theirongoing support in our approach
toremuneration.
Andrew Jennings OBE
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
26 May 2022
SR GR FS
99TB | AR—’22
Part B:
Directors’ Remuneration Policy in summary
POLICY AND IMPLEMENTATION FOR FY23 FOR EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS
Here we summarise the policy that our shareholders approved at the 2020 AGM. It is intended to apply for three years until a new policy is approved
at the 2023 AGM. No changes have been made to the policy since it came into effect and the full policy is available at tedbakerplc.com.
BASE SALARY Normally reviewed annually
Annual increases will normally be broadly consistent with increases in base salary of the wider
employeepopulation
For FY23 base salaries will be:
ɣ CEO £535,500 (increase of 2%)
ɣ CFO £350,000 (set on appointment, 11% below predecessor).
BENEFITS
Include car allowance and medical insurance, as well as benefits in line with other team members,
suchasparticipation in the Ted Clothing Purchase Scheme.
Executive Directors may participate in the Ted Baker Sharesave Scheme on the same basis as other employees.
PENSIONS
The pension contribution rate is aligned with the majority of the wider UK workforce, which is currently 3% of
basesalary.
ANNUAL BONUS
Up to 150% of base salary and up to 200% in exceptional circumstances.
Performance measures may include both financial targets and strategic objectives. At least 75% is linked to
achieving financial targets.
Any bonus of more than 100% of base salary is deferred into shares for two years.
For FY23:
ɣ The maximum bonus opportunity will remain unchanged at 150% of base salary for Executive Directors,
withtwo-thirds of the maximum awarded for on-target performance.
ɣ 60% of the bonus will be based on profit targets
1
, and, subject to a full-year profit underpin, 15% will be
basedon free cash flow targets and 25% will be based on delivering our strategic objectives linked to
thetransformation, with metrics focused on brand, product, people, ESG, and personal performance.
LONG-TERM INCENTIVE
PLAN (LTIP)
Up to 150% of base salary and up to 300% in exceptional circumstances.
Vesting is based on performance over three years. Once vested, LTIP shares are subject to an additional two-year
holding period.
For FY23:
ɣ The maximum opportunity remains unchanged, which is 150% of base salary for the CEO and 125% of base
salary for the CFO.
ɣ The FY23 LTIP awards will be subject to the following equal-weighted performance conditions:
– Relative total shareholder return (TSR)
– Cash flow subject to an earnings per share (EPS) underpin
ɣ Targets will be set based on internal and external forecasts. TSR performance will be measured over
a36-month period relative to a peer group of comparators. The cash flow targets will be based on cash flow
for the financial year ending January 2025, subject to a minimum level of EPS being achieved. Targets will be
disclosed on our website in due course.
SHARE OWNERSHIP
GUIDELINES
Executive Directors are encouraged to hold at least 100% of base salary in shares.
Shareholdings can be acquired over five years.
After leaving the Company, a former Executive Director must retain 100% of shares which form part of their
shareholding guideline and which were obtained following the vesting of LTIP awards for one year, and then
50%for another year.
1 For annual bonus purposes, profit targets will exclude the accounting impact of any share-based payments (IFRS 2) and leases (IFRS 16).
100 TB | AR—’22
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT
ALIGNMENT WITH THE UK
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE CODE
When developing the remuneration policy, the
Committee looked at these factors, as set out
inthe 2018 UK Corporate Governance Code:
Clarity – Incentive arrangements are based
on clearly defined financial and strategic
performance metrics.
Simplicity – Remuneration arrangements
aresimple, comprising the fixed elements
ofbase salary, benefits and pension, and
variable elements comprising the annual
bonus and LTIP.
Risk – The Committee considers the structure
of the annual bonus and the LTIP does not
encourage inappropriate risk-taking. In
addition, malus and clawback provisions
apply to the annual bonus and LTIP.
Predictability – The total remuneration
opportunity graphs, as set out in the full
remuneration policy, provide estimates on
thepotential future reward opportunity,
including target and maximum performance,
as well as incorporating share price
appreciation.
Proportionality – The Committee may seek
to override formulaic outcomes if they do not
reflect underlying Company and individual
performance and the wider business
circumstances.
Alignment to culture – In determining
executive remuneration, the Committee
looksat several wider workforce themes
aspart of its review, including workforce
demographics and the reward, incentives
and conditions available to Ted Baker’s
workforce generally. This helps to make sure
executive remuneration is appropriate from
acultural perspective.
EXECUTIVE PAY IN THE CONTEXT OF
THE WIDER WORKFORCE
Differences in the remuneration approach
across Ted Baker
We apply a consistent remuneration approach
to everyone throughout the Group (some
exceptions are outlined below) to make sure our
business strategy and performance are aligned,
and the total reward is sufficient to attract and
retain high-performing and talented people.
All team members of Ted Baker are entitled to
abase salary, access to a discretionary annual
or periodic bonus based on corporate and
individual performance, and a range of
benefitsdepending on their role.
Any exceptional increase to base salary is
structured around specific criteria. These criteria
are linked to a significant change in a person’s
role or level of responsibility, their market value
ata median level, their value to Ted Baker and
what similar roles in different departments
arepaid.
The maximum opportunity for bonus and benefits
is based on career level, responsibility and the
function of the role.
LTIP awards are only available to Executive
Directors. Awards under the Ted Baker Incentive
Plan are available to members of senior
management and members of the leadership
team. Share option grants under the Ted Baker
Sharesave Scheme are available to all UK
teammembers.
Like Executive Directors, members of the Group
management team are encouraged to hold
shares in the Company.
Malus and clawback provisions for Executive
Director annual bonus payments and LTIP
awards also apply to senior members of the
Group management team.
How the Remuneration Committee considers
remuneration across Ted Baker
The Chief People Officer (CPO) presents the
proposed pay review for the general team
member population, and any changes to
remuneration policy within the Group, to the
Remuneration Committee at its meeting in
February each year. The Committee normally
limits any increases in base salary for Executive
Directors so that they stay broadly in line with
salary increases applied across the general
team member population – other than in the
exceptional circumstances. This includes the
ability to make incremental changes if the
salaryand total reward fall below the targeted
median range.
The Directors’ Remuneration Policy is discussed
with team member communication groups and
senior management. Team members’ comments
are fed back to the Remuneration Committee.
Any benchmarking exercise undertaken that
subsequently underpins the remuneration policy
and its implementation for Executive Directors
also considers the remuneration levels of other
Executive Team members within the Group.
To retain and reward key individuals, the
Remuneration Committee continues to support
itsestablished commitment to the Group policy
of targeting total remuneration levels for senior
management and team members within the
median range.
As part of the Remuneration Committee’s
annualwork, it has a calendar of team
memberengagements to explain how
executiveremuneration aligns with wider
Grouppay policy. In FY22 Andrew Jennings
metwith Ted Baker’s Fresh Eyes Forum. This built
on last year’s events whereAndrew Jennings
attended meetings with Ted Baker’s Fresh Eyes
Forum, Ted Baker’s US leadership team and
ameeting for members of the leadership team
and above. Opportunities will be identified for
further teammember engagement in FY23 that
broaden our engagement with team members
across the business and at all career levels.
SR GR FS
101TB | AR—’22
Part C:
Annual Report on Remuneration
The following tables set out as a single figure the total amount of remuneration, including each element, each of the Executive and Non-Executive
Directors received for the periods ended 29 January 2022 and 30 January 2021.
DIRECTORS’ SINGLE TOTAL FIGURE OF REMUNERATION (AUDITED)
52 weeks ended
29 January 2022
Salary
£’000
Benefits
1
£’000
Pension
£’000
Other items
9
£’000
Total fixed
payment
£’000
Performance-
related bonus
£’000
12
LTIPs
£’000
Total variable
payments
£’000
Total
FY22
2
£’000
Executive
Rachel Osborne 525 23 13 70 631 131 – 131 762
David Wolffe
11
395 23 10 – 428 64 – 64 492
Non-Executive
Helena Feltham
8
85 – – – 85 – – – 85
Andrew Jennings 80 – – – 80 – – – 80
Colin La Fontaine Jackson 60 – – – 60 – – – 60
Fumbi Chima
10
30 – – – 30 – – – 30
John Barton
6
183 – – – 183 – – – 183
Jonathan Kempster 80 – – – 80 – – – 80
Meg Lustman
10
30 – – – 30 – – – 30
1,468 46 23 70 1,607 195 – 195 1,802
53 Weeks ended
30 January 2021
Salary
5
£’000
Benefits
1
£’000
Pension
£’000
Other items
9
£’000
Total fixed
payment
£’000
Performance-
related bonus
£’000
LTIPs
£’000
Total variable
payments
£’000
Total
FY21
2
£’000
Executive
Rachel Osborne 502 23 14 53 592 – – – 592
David Wolffe
11
262 16 8 – 286 – – – 286
Non-Executive
John Barton
6
117 – – – 117 – – – 117
Sharon Baylay
4
55 – – – 55 – – – 55
Helena Feltham 74 – – – 74 – – – 74
Andrew Jennings 76 – – – 76 – – – 76
Jonathan Kempster 74 – – – 74 – – – 74
Colin La Fontaine Jackson
7
25 – – – 25 – – – 25
Jennifer Roebuck
3
11 – – – 11 – – – 11
1,196 39 22 53 1,310 – – – 1,310
1 Benefits comprise private medical insurance and car benefits.
2 There has been no benefit relating to share price appreciation during either year or discretion exercised regarding any award where that discretion was influenced by share price appreciation
ordepreciation.
3 Resigned from the Board on 30 March 2020.
4 Resigned from the Board on 21 July 2020.
5 This figure includes the voluntary pay cut taken because of the pandemic.
6 Appointed to the Board on 1 July 2020. Following his death, John ceased to be a Director on 4 December 2021.
7 Appointed to the Board on 1 September 2020.
8 Following John’s death, Helena was appointed Interim Chair while the Company conducted a formal search for a new Chair. For this interim role, she received an additional allowance
of£75,000.
9 As a result of Rachel joining Ted Baker, she incurred certain losses when she had to repay part of a bonus she had received from her previous employer. The total amount that Rachel was
required to repay was £35,821.37. The amount shown in the table for the year ending 30 January 2021 reflects the gross payments to Rachel during that year to compensate her (on an
after-tax basis) for the repayments she made. In addition, as previously disclosed, it was agreed on appointment and included in Rachel’s contract of employment that she would be entitled
toaguaranteed bonus of £70,000, which was payable in October 2021. This payment is included in the table above for the year ending 29 January 2022.
10 Appointed to the Board on 4 August 2021.
11 David Wolffe stepped down from his role as CFO and as a Director of the Company on 7 March 2022.
12 Annual performance related bonus – paid in cash.
102 TB | AR—’22
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT
ANNUAL RATES OF SALARY IN FORCE DURING THE PERIOD
For the year ended 29 January 2022, Rachel Osborne’s salary was £525,000 per annum (as set on her appointment to CEO).
David Wolffe’s salary, as CFO, remained £395,000 per annum.
ANNUAL BONUS (AUDITED)
Recognising the continued impact of Covid on the business, including that many of Ted Baker’s stores remained closed for a period duringFY22 and
that the Group continued to be in receipt of UK government support via the furlough scheme, it was determined that the annual bonus for FY22 would
operate over two separate periods.
For FY22, 75% of the bonus was based on profit targets with reference to internal and external forecasts and 25% of the bonus was based on strategic
objectives aligned to the delivery of the transformation, subject to a full year profit underpin. While the strategic element operated for the full financial
year (subject to the financial underpin), the financial element operated for a reduced period taking into account the Company’s reliance on government
support such that it only operated for the period no furlough was received.
Maximum annual bonus opportunities were unchanged from prior year at 150% of salary for both the CEO and CFO. However, any payment
wascapped below this level recognising that the financial element would only operate for part of the year. Financial targets were set considering
performance across the entire year with the aim of rewarding the successful mitigation of the impact of the pandemic at the start of the year as well
asthe Group’s expected return to profitability in the latter part of the year.
While financial performance for FY22 was below the threshold target set, the full year profit underpin was met and therefore there was payment in
respect of the strategic element.
Overall, the Committee considered that excellent progress had been made against the strategic objectives and delivery of the transformation despite
the continued challenges and headwinds of the external environment. Full details on the individual performance of both Executive Directors are set
outon the following page. Considering this performance, it was determined that the strategic element would pay out at target for the CEO and
at65%oftarget for the CFO, resulting in an overall performance related bonus payment of £131,250 for the CEO and £64,188 for the CFO.
Thisrepresents a bonus of 17%and 11% of maximum respectively.
Financial targets (75% of the bonus)
Threshold
(0% awarded)
Target
(67% awarded)
Maximum
(100% awarded) Actual
Profit before tax
1
£29.0m loss £23.0m loss £17. 0 m l o s s Below threshold
1 For annual bonus purposes, profit before tax excludes the accounting impact of any share-based payments (IFRS 2) and leases (IFRS 16).
SR GR FS
103TB | AR—’22
Objectives linked to the transformation strategy (25% of the bonus)
Chief Executive Officer – strategic performance
Improve product proposition – Despite a continued promotional market throughout the year delivered against the targets set for the year.
Achieveda total product sell-through of 82% for Autumn/Winter ’21 in line with three-year plan.
Digital enhancements – Significant progress made in year with the design and development of the new website. Final testing completed and
website launched early in FY23.
Brand strength – Maintained NPS score within an acceptable margin in the UK despite lower relevance of core offering due to the pandemic.
Improvement in NPS score in the US and increase in prompted brand awareness (up 6% on prior year).
Store openings – Opened 22 stores in the year versus a target of 10. Followed a capital-light model and focused on local markets to capitalise
onlocal shopping trend and drive increased local engagement and brand awareness. Opened 10 joint-venture stores versus a target of 6.
ESG agenda – Elevated ESG agenda across the business. Increased overall sustainability offer to 26% (versus a target of 20%) – successes across
leather and polyester amongst other fabrics. Developed communities and charities roadmap providing a foundation for future volunteering
programmes and charity partnerships. Ted’s Diploma Project delivered across three schools. Group-wide roll out of carbon strategy, including the
launch of science-based targets in October 2021 and mapping of Scope 3 emissions.
Cost control – Strong cost and cash discipline throughout the financial year, with substantial savings in key areas. Strengthening of Balance Sheet
with Net Debt to EBITDA ratio less than 1 at the end of the financial year.
Chief Financial Officer – strategic performance
Cost control – Strong cost and cash discipline throughout the financial year, with substantial savings in key areas. Strengthening of Balance Sheet
with Net Debt to EBITDA ratio less than 1 at the end of the financial year. Positive investor reaction to two cash upgrades during the year.
Improvements in planning and governance processes – Implementation of new business calendar with maintenance of stock disciplines. Re-launch
of Internal Audit function with go forward approach agreed with the Audit Committee. Creation of Investment Committee – work ongoing to fully
embed within the business. Three-year plan delivered.
Re-financing – Successfully secured covenant reset for the year given significant additional EBITDA headroom. Delivered full-term re-financing.
Continuing development of banking relationships.
Deliver Finance Transformation – Re-organisation of Finance with a number of new recruits. Improvement in the quality, relevance and coverage
ofmanagement information provided to the Executive team. Progress made on controls remediation programme.
Operational efficiency – Delivered landlord negotiations with significant savings achieved over and above those targeted. Achieved supply
chainand procurement savings in excess of £3m. Stabilisation of global supply chain with full resolution of Hong Kong supply chain issues.
Completed customs warehouse implementation.
104 TB | AR—’22
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT
LONG-TERM INCENTIVE SCHEMES (AUDITED)
Awards under the Ted Baker plc LTIP 2013 (audited)
During the period the award granted under the 2013 LTIP in April 2018 was due to vest on 3 April 2021. The next table summarises actual outcomes
against the performance conditions set for that award.
Performance conditions
Share price increase underpin
1
Profit per share growth
2
Threshold performance target 10.0% 10.0%
Maximum performance target N/A 15.0%
Actual performance achieved (96%) (120%)
Percentage of maximum achieved Share price underpin not achieved 0%
1 Based on base average six-month share price at the award date of £28.09 and the six-month average at the vesting date of £1.14.
2 Based on base profit per share in 2017/18 of 164.66p and final profit per share of -32.14p in 2020/21.
Given the very difficult trading environment, the required performance conditions for our profit growth and share price were not met. Similarly, the required
performance conditions of our profit growth and share price for LTIP awards made in 2019 and subject to vest in April 2022 were not met, and the
awards lapsed in full. The current CEO and CFO were not in role when either of these awards were granted. The Committee did not exercise discretion
in relation to the vesting of these awards.
Awards granted under the LTIP during the year (audited)
In August 2021 awards were made under the 2020 LTIP to Rachel Osborne and David Wolffe, as detailed in the next table.
Date of award Type of award Number of shares Face value (£)
1
Face value
(%ofsalary)
Percentage vesting for
threshold performance
End of performance
period/vesting date
Rachel Osborne 3 August 2021 Nil-cost options 583,031 78 7, 5 0 0 150% 20% 3 August 2024
David Wolffe 3 August 2021 Nil-cost options 365,551 493,750 125% 20% 3 August 2024
1 Face value based on a share price of £1.3507, being the average middle market price in the five dealing days prior to grant.
These awards are subject to the following performance conditions. To determine the performance targets, the Remuneration Committee considered
theCompany’s long-term strategic plan as well as external expectations. In assessing the performance and corresponding vesting outcome, some
changes were made for the 2021 awards compared with the approach taken the year before.
Definition of cash flow – To promote long-term investment in the business, which is critical to the Company’s ongoing transformation, and to make
sure the cash flow targets do not inadvertently incentivise inappropriate management behaviours, cash flow performance will be measured before
any capital expenditure. The Board will, however, review the level of capital expenditure at the end of the performance period when determining
vesting outcomes.
Wider cash flow target range and reduced vesting at threshold – Mindful of the continued economic uncertainty, the Remuneration Committee
widened the cash flow target range and, in recognition of this, the percentage of the award vesting for threshold performance was reduced from
25% to 15% for the 2021 awards. Maximum vesting under the cash flow element would require genuinely exceptional levels of performance.
Overall, the Committee believes that the performance targets set are fair to management while being appropriately stretching and aligned with creating
value for shareholders.
Weighting
Threshold performance
1
25% of the award vests
Maximum performance
1
100% of the award vests
TSR relative to retail comparators
2,3
50% Median Upper quartile
Weighting
Threshold performance
1
15% of the award vests
Maximum performance
1
100% of the award vests
Cash flow for the year ending January 2024
4
50% £25m £75m
1 Straight-line vesting between the points shown, with no vesting below threshold.
2 Retail comparators: ASOS plc, Boohoo Group plc, Burberry Group plc, B&M European Value Retail S.A., Currys plc, Frasers Group plc, Halfords Group plc, Joules Group plc, NBrownGroup
plc, Mulberry Group plc, MySale Group plc, Marks and Spencer Group plc, Next plc, Quiz plc, Shoe Zone plc, Studio Retail Group plc, Superdry plc and WH Smith plc.
3 TSR measured over the 36-month period beginning 3 August 2021.
4 Cash flow defined as operating cash flow after lease payments, interest and tax, but before investment in capital expenditure, dividends, financing and related costs.
The cash flow element of the award (50% weighting) is subject to a minimum level of EPS being achieved so, if EPS for the financial year ending
inJanuary 2024 is below 6.0p, then the cash flow element will lapse in full.
In line with the remuneration policy, any shares vesting would be subject to an additional two-year holding period.
SR GR FS
105TB | AR—’22
SHARESAVE SCHEME (AUDITED)
Awards made during the year to Executive Directors under the Ted Baker Sharesave Scheme are detailed in the next table.
Date of award Type of award Number of shares Exercise price (£) Face value (£)
1
Exercise period
David Wolffe 5 October 2021 Share options 5,496 £1.31 7, 5 9 5 1 November 2024 – 30 April 2025
1 Face value based on a share price of £1.3820, being the closing share price on the date of the award.
Directors’ shareholding (audited)
The Directors who held office during the period had the following interests, including family interests, in the shares of the Company. The shareholding
guidelines under the current Directors’ Remuneration Policy encourage Executive Directors to hold at least 100% of base salary in shares.
Shareholdingsfor new Executive Directors can be acquired over five years.
Unvested Vested but unexercised
Director
Shares beneficially
owned at
29 January2022
Share options granted under
2013 LTIP and 2020 LTIP subject
toperformance conditions
1
Share options granted under
Ted Baker Sharesave Scheme
without performance conditions
1
LTIP 2013 and LTIP 2020
share options
Shareholding
guidelinemet
Executive Directors
Rachel Osborne 33,333 1,996,220 – – No
David Wolffe 33,333 1,074,389 18,353 – No
Non-Executive Directors
Helena Feltham 33,333 – – – N/A
Andrew Jennings 38,338 – – – N/A
Colin La Fontaine Jackson – – – – N/A
Fumbi Chima – – – – N/A
John Barton 133,333
2
– – – N/A
Jonathan Kempster 33,333 – – – N/A
Meg Lustman – – – – N/A
1 These unvested share options do not count towards the share ownership guidelines.
2 Ceased to be a Director on 4 December 2021. Shareholding shown as at this date.
No LTIP awards were exercised during the period.
Progress against shareholding guidelines
Salary
Share
price
1
Number of shares
needed to satisfy
theshareholding
requirement
Shares
beneficially
owned at
30 January2021
Percentage of
shareholding
requirement met
Share options
granted under
2013LTIP and
2020LTIP subject
toperformance
conditions
Share options
granted under
Ted Baker
Sharesave Scheme
without performance
conditions
Date
shareholding
requirement
tobemet
Rachel Osborne £525,000 £0.88 599,657 33,333 6% 1,996,220 – 30/03/2025
David Wolffe £395,000 £0.88 451,170 33,333 7% 1,074,389 18,353 18/05/2025
1 Share price used is the closing middle market share price at 29 January 2022.
106 TB | AR—’22
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT
CFO TRANSITION
On 8 March 2022 we announced that Marc Dench would succeed David Wolffe as CFO. The remuneration arrangements for Marc’s appointment
and David’s departure were managed in line with our remuneration policy.
Marc Dench
Marc Dench was appointed on a salary of £350,000 per annum (11% below that of his predecessor). He will receive pension contributions of 3%
ofbase salary in line with the wider workforce. Marc will also participate in incentive arrangements on the same basis as other Executive Directors,
withamaximum bonus opportunity of 150% of base salary and a maximum LTIP opportunity of 125% of base salary. These opportunities levels are
inline with those of his predecessor.
Marc also received a share award to compensate him for remuneration he forfeited when he left his previous employer. This share award has a face
value of £75,000 and will vest, subject to satisfactory individual performance, in two tranches: 20% six months after starting his employment with us and
80% three years after starting employment. This award is to replace a cash bonus he was due to receive in early 2022 and his participation in equity
incentive arrangements.
To determine this award, the Remuneration Committee considered the nature and opportunity of the remuneration forfeited. The Committee believes that
this award is no more generous, either in terms of the amount or the timing.
David Wolffe
David Wolffe stepped down from his role as CFO and as a Director of the Company on 7 March 2022 to pursue another opportunity.
David will be on garden leave until at least 6 May 2022 but not beyond 6 September 2022. During this time, he’ll continue to receive his base salary,
benefits and pension allowance each month. At the end of this leave – and the end of his employment – he will receive a lump sum payment in relation
to salary, benefits and pension for the balance of his notice period to 6 March 2023.
David will still be eligible to receive an annual bonus for FY22, as set out on page 102 of this report. He will not be eligible to receive any annual bonus
for FY23.
Given the crucial role David played in the first phase of Ted Baker’s transformation, leading the Company’s recapitalisation and helping to put the business
back on a path to growth, the Remuneration Committee felt it appropriate to treat him as a ‘good leaver’ for the purpose of the LTIP awards granted to him
on 4 September 2020 and 6 August 2021. These awards will vest on the normal dates. They will be pro-rated to the date of the end of his employment
and will remain subject to the relevant performance conditions. Any shares vesting will remain subject to a two-year post-vesting holding period.
David will be subject to the post-employment shareholding guideline as outlined in our remuneration policy.
The Company will settle legal costs of up to £8,000 on David’s behalf. No other payments will be made in connection with his departure.
PAYMENTS FOR LOSS OF OFFICE (AUDITED)
No payments were made to past Directors in the period (2021: £nil).
PAYMENTS TO PAST DIRECTORS (AUDITED)
No payments were made to past Directors in the period (2021: £nil).
NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR FEES
The Non-Executive Director fees that apply for FY23 are set out in the next table.
As Chair of the Board, John Barton received an all-inclusive fee of £200,000. Following his death, Helena Feltham was appointed as Interim Chair
while the Company conducts a formal search for a new Chair. For this interim role, she receives an all-inclusive annual fee of £160,000 pro-rated for
the period served.
FY23 fees
Basic fee £60,000
Additional fees:
Senior Independent Director £5,000
Committee Chair £10,000
Committee membership £5,000
SR GR FS
107TB | AR—’22
CONTRACTS OF SERVICE AND LETTERS OF APPOINTMENT
Each Executive Director has a service contract. Service contracts and letters of appointment are available for inspection at the registered office.
Date of service contract/
letterofappointment Duration of contract/appointment Unexpired term Notice period
Provision for
compensation
Executive Directors
Rachel Osborne 11/11/ 2 019 Contracts are of unlimitedduration N/A 12 months None
David Wolffe
1
18/05/2020 Contracts are of unlimitedduration N/A 12 months None
Marc Dench 08/03/2022 Contracts are of unlimitedduration N/A 12 months None
Non-Executive Directors
Helena Feltham 01/05/2019 Three years 3 months 3 months None
Andrew Jennings 01/04/2020 Three years 1 year 2 months 3 months None
Colin La Fontaine Jackson 01/09/2020 Three years 1 year 7 months 3 months None
Fumbi Chima 04/08/2021 Three years 2 years 6 months 3 months None
John Barton
2
01/07/2020 Three years N/A 3 months None
Jonathan Kempster 17/12/2019 Three years 10 months 3 months None
Meg Lustman 04/08/2021 Three years 2 years 6 months 3 months None
1 David Wolffe stepped down from his role as CFO and as a Director of the Company on 7 March 2022.
2 Following his death, John Barton ceased to be a director on 4 December 2021.
PERFORMANCE GRAPH AND TABLE
The next graph charts the total cumulative shareholder return of the Company from January 2012 to January 2022. It shows the Company’s performance
against the FTSE All Share Personal Goods Index, the sector against which it’s tracked by market analysts, and also against the FTSE All Share Index to
illustrate the Company’s performance in the general market.
Total cumulative shareholder return – January 2012 to January 2022
Cumulative shareholder return (%)
Ted Baker
Jan 09 Jan 10 Jan 11 Jan 12 Jan 13 Jan 14 Jan 15 Jan 16 Jan 17 Jan 18 Jan 19 Jan 20 Jan 21
200
400
600
800
1,000
1,200
1,400
FTSE All Share Personal Goods FTSE All Share
108 TB | AR—’22
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT
CEO REMUNERATION
For the financial periods ended:
2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022
Total remuneration 4126
1
701 757 665 1217 1321 1011 485 592 762
% of maximum performance-related bonus paid 0% 90% 100% 50% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 17%
% of maximum LTIP vesting 100% 0% 0% 0% 100% 100% 85% 0% – –
1 Total remuneration for 2013 includes an amount relating to awards vesting in August 2012 under the Ted Baker 2009 Value Creation Plan.
PERCENTAGE CHANGE IN REMUNERATION
The next table shows how the percentage change in the total remuneration for each Director – excluding share-based payments in FY21 and FY22–
compares with the percentage change in the average remuneration for all team members within the Group over the same time.
FY22 % change FY21 % change
Year-on-year change % Salary Benefits Bonus Salary Benefits Bonus
Executive Directors
Rachel Osborne 4.6 – – 27 260 –
David Wolffe 50.8 43.8 – – – –
Non-Executive Directors
Helena Feltham 14.9 – – 46 – –
Andrew Jennings 5.3 – – – – –
Colin La Fontaine Jackson 140.0 – – – – –
Fumbi Chima N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
John Barton 56.4 – – – – –
Jonathan Kempster 8.1 – – 3 – –
Meg Lustman N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
All team members 18.0 10.0 – 2 3 –
SR GR FS
109TB | AR—’22
CEO PAY RATIO
The next table compares the single total figure of remuneration for the CEO with that of team members who are paid at the 25th percentile (lower
quartile), 50th percentile (median) and 75th percentile (upper quartile) of our UK team member population.
Year Method 25th percentile pay ratio Median pay ratio 75th percentile pay ratio
2019/20 Option B 28:1 26:1 18:1
2020/21 Option C 32:1 27:1 20:1
2021/22 Option B 43:1 42:1 15:1
Option C was used to calculate the figures in FY21 as that the time of reporting Ted Baker’s gender pay gap data for April 2020 was not yet available.
Option C was therefore used salary rates in force at 30 January 2021.
Option B uses the same dataset as the gender pay gap data. As the gender pay gap data is available for Ted Baker’s 2022 Group Annual Report, the
gender pay gap at April 2021 was used to identify the best equivalent for three Group UK team members whose hourly rates of pay are at the 25th,
50th and 75th percentiles for the Group. The pay ratios outlined above were then calculated as the ratio of the CEO’s single figure to the total pay and
benefits of each of these team members.
The value of each team member’s total pay and benefits was calculated using the single figure methodology consistent with that for the CEO. No
elements of pay have been omitted.
The next table sets out the salary and total pay and benefits for the three identified quartile-point team members:
25th percentile Median 75th percentile
Salary 16,726 18,058 49,978
Total pay and benefits 17, 5 81 18,233 49,978
The Committee considers that the median CEO pay ratio is consistent with the relative roles and responsibilities of the CEO and the identified team
members. Ted Baker is committed to offering its team members a competitive remuneration package targeted at the median range for the role.
Base salaries for team members, including our Executive Directors, are determined with reference to a range of factors, including the role and sustained
value of the individual in terms of skills, experience and contribution, their market value at the median level and their relative value to Ted Baker. Due to
the nature of the role, the CEO’s remuneration package has higher weighting on performance-related pay – including the annual bonus and LTIP –
compared with most of the workforce. This means the pay ratios are likely to fluctuate depending on the outcomes of incentive plans in each year.
The Committee also recognises that, given the nature of a company’s business and the flexibility permitted within the regulations for identifying and
calculating the total pay and benefits for team members, the ratios reported above may not be comparable to those reported by other companies.
RELATIVE IMPORTANCE OF SPEND
The next table sets out the percentage change in dividends and employee remuneration for the 52 weeks ended 29 January 2022, compared with the
53 weeks ended 30 January 2021.
2022
£’000
2021
£’000
Percentage
change
Dividends 0 0 (0%)
Employee remuneration
1
6 7, 4 7 3 66,278 1.8%
1 Employee remuneration is net of furlough income.
110 TB | AR—’22
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE AND ADVISERS
Remuneration Committee
The Remuneration Committee sets the remuneration packages of the Executive Directors of the Board and other senior executives who fall within the
scope of the Remuneration Committee. It approves all service contracts and other contracts between the Company and its Executive Directors and
senior executives and, if appropriate, approves any outside interests and other directorships that the Executive Directors have. The Committee also
reviews and approves the design of the Company’s long-term incentive schemes and determines the level of awards to be made and approves the
performance metrics and targets.
The Remuneration Committee is chaired by Andrew Jennings. Its other members are Helena Feltham and Jon Kempster. Andrew will step down from the
Board at the 2022 AGM and Meg Lustman has attended Remuneration Committee meetings to ensure there is a succession plan for his departure.
TheChair and members are independent NEDs, as outlined in the Governance report on pages 76 -80.
The Remuneration Committee’s terms of reference are available at tedbakerplc.com/investor-relations/corporate-governance
Advisers
Deloitte LLP is the independent executive remuneration adviser to the Remuneration Committee and assisted the Committee in its work during the year.
The Company appointed Deloitte in consultation with the Committee following a competitive tender process. The Committee assesses Deloitte’s advice
from time to time to make sure it is still independent. Deloitte adheres to the Remuneration Consultants Group Code of Conduct.
Adviser Appointed by
Service provided to the
Remuneration Committee
Fees based on
hourly rates
Other services provided
to thecompany
Deloitte LLP Company
Ongoing support in relation to all executive remuneration matters
including incentive design, target-setting, stakeholder consultation,
remuneration disclosures and governance developments
£109, 70 0
Debt advisory, forensic
accounting and internal controls
Remuneration Committee meetings are attended by its members only. But the Committee is helped in its work by the Group CEO, CFO and CPO, who
are sometimes asked to attend meetings to present their views about specific matters – for example, to update the Committee about any changes to
wider workforce remuneration. To avoid conflicts of interest, the CEO, CFO and CPO are not present when the Committee discusses agenda items that
could impact their remuneration.
STATEMENT OF VOTING AT THE AGM
At the previous AGM, votes on the Remuneration Report – excluding the Directors’ Remuneration Policy – were cast as follows:
For %
Number
Against %
Number
Withheld
Number
Reasons for votes
against, ifapplicable
Action taken by
Remuneration Committee
Approval of the 2021 Directors’
Remuneration Report
93.97% 6.03%
256,387
The number of votes against
the Remuneration Report was
not considered to be significant
N/A
115,155,162 7, 3 8 3 ,18 4
The Directors’ Remuneration Policy is subject to a binding vote by shareholders every three years. It was last approved at the AGM held on 21 July 2020.
For %
Number
Against %
Number
Withheld
Number
Reasons for votes
against, if applicable
Action taken by
Remuneration Committee
Approval of Directors’
Remuneration Policy included
within the 2020 Directors’
Remuneration Report
89.29% 10.71%
190,104
The number of votes against
the updated policy was not
considered to be significant
N/A
122,540,753 14,694,581
The Directors’ Remuneration Report was approved on behalf of the Board on 26 May 2022 and signed on its behalf by:
Andrew Jennings OBE
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
26 May 2022
SR GR FS
111TB | AR—’22
Directors’ Report
We are required under the Companies Act to produce a Directors’ Report and also make other statutory and regulatory disclosures including under
LR9.8.4R as set out in the points below.
The information outlined below would normally be included in the Directors’ Report but can be found on the following pages of this Annual Report.
Thisforms part of the Directors’ Report:
LR 9.8.4
Details of any long-term incentive schemes (on page 104)
The remaining disclosures required by LR 9.8.4 are not applicable to the company.
Other
Information on energy consumption and greenhouse gas emissions (on page 54 of the Strategic report)
Information on future developments in the business (on page 14 of the Strategic report)
Information on people policies and team members and the employment of disabled people (on pages 40-46 of the Strategic report)
Information on engagement with its team members (on page 42 of the Strategic report)
Information on our regard for our business relationships with suppliers, customers and others (on pages 81-83 of the Strategic report)
Information on the use of financial instruments (Note 27 to the financial statements from page 161)
Information on internal controls and risk management systems in relation to the financial reporting process (on page 60 of the Strategic report)
Information included within the Compliance with the Code corporate governance statement on pages 92-95.
MANAGEMENT REPORT
For the purpose of Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules DTR 4.1.5R(2) and DTR 4.1.8, the Directors’ Report and the Strategic report make up
the Management Report.
SUBSIDIARY UNDERTAKINGS
The subsidiary undertakings of the Group in the period are listed in Note 15 to the accounts. The Group also has branches operating in Ireland,
Portugal and Hong Kong.
RESULTS AND DIVIDENDS
The audited accounts for the 52 weeks ended 29 January 2022 are set out on pages 116-166. For the 52 weeks ended 29 January 2022 the Group’s
loss before tax was £44.1 million (2021: loss of £107.7 million). The Directors are not recommending a final dividend.
DIRECTORS
During the period the Directors were those listed on pages 72-73. Details of the Directors’ beneficial interests in the shares of the Company are shown
on page 104. Details of their interests in share options are given in the Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 104-105. You will find brief career
details for each Director on pages 72-73.
SUBSTANTIAL SHAREHOLDINGS
As at 29 January 2022, the Company had been notified, in accordance with the Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules (DTR5), of substantial
interests in the ordinary share capital of the Company. For details see the table below:
Name of holder Number % held
Toscafund Asset Management 48,334,208 26.18%
Schroder Investment Management 23,217,206 12.58%
Ray Kelvin 21,186,379 11. 4 8 %
Columbia Threadneedle Investments 17, 815 , 3 2 5 9.65%
Legal and General 6,659,461 3.61%
Hargreaves Lansdown 6,079,753 3.29%
Fidelity Management & Research 5,720,442 3.10%
112 TB | AR—’22
DIRECTORS’ REPORT
In accordance with LR9.8.6(2) there have been the following changes in the interests disclosed to the Company between the end of the period and
23 May 2022.
Name of holder Number % held
Toscafund Asset Management 52 , 8 8 7,15 4 28.65%
Schroder Investment Management 2 3 , 2 7 7, 5 6 5 12.61%
Ray Kelvin 21,18 7, 0 0 2 11. 4 8 %
Columbia Threadneedle Investments 17,9 2 3 , 6 6 4 9.71%
Hargreaves Lansdown 6,534,025 3.54%
Barclays 8,825,125 4.78%
SHARE AND CAPITAL CONTROL
Details of the Company’s share capital are shown in the Group’s financial statements on page 148. As at 29 January 2022 there were 184,610,683
ordinary shares in issue.
The rights and obligations attaching to the Company’s shares, as well as those conferred on their holders by law, are set out in the Articles of
Association. Subject to the Articles of Association, the holders of ordinary shares are entitled to receive all shareholder documents, attend and speak
atgeneral meetings of the Company, exercise all voting rights and receive dividends and participate in other distributions of assets. The Company
maynot exercise any rights (such as voting rights) in respect of any treasury shares and any treasury shares carry no right to receive dividends or other
distributions of assets. Other than as set out in the Articles of Association, the Company is not aware of any agreements between shareholders restricting
the voting rights or the right to transfer shares in the Company.
The Directors were granted authority at the 2021 AGM to allot shares in the capital of the Company up to an aggregate nominal amount of
£3,046,044 (being approximately 33% of the total ordinary share capital in issue prior to the 2021 AGM). This authority is due to lapse at the Annual
General Meeting in 2022 (the 2022 AGM). At the 2022 AGM, shareholders will be asked to grant a similar allotment authority. The Directors were
also empowered at the 2021 AGM to allot shares for cash on a non-pre-emptive basis both in connection with a rights issue or similar pre-emptive
issue and, otherwise than in connection with any such issue, up to a maximum aggregate nominal amount of £461,521. Such amount represented
approximately 5% of the Company’s ordinary share capital as it stood prior to the 2021 AGM in line with the Pre-Emption Group Statement of Principles
on disapplying pre-emption rights (the Principles). As permitted by the Principles, the Directors were also empowered at the 2021 AGM to allot shares
for cash on a non-pre-emptive basis up to the same amount for use only in connection with an acquisition or a specified capital investment.
Both powers are due to lapse at the 2022 AGM at which shareholders will be asked to grant similar powers in line with best practice and the Pre-Emption
Group’s Principles.
The Company did not seek an authority at the 2021 AGM to buy back its own shares and there was no authority in place as at the end of the period.
The Company proposes to seek authority to buy back its own shares at the 2022 AGM in line with best practice.
APPOINTMENT AND REMOVAL OF DIRECTORS AND ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION
The Articles of Association provide that the Company’s shareholders may appoint any person to act as a Director or, on special notice, remove any
Director from office by passing an ordinary resolution at a general meeting. The Articles also empower the Board to appoint any person as a Director.
The Articles set out when a Director must leave office. These include where a Director resigns, becomes bankrupt or is prohibited from acting as
adirector for other reasons, is absent from the business for the long term or where a Director is required to resign by all the other Directors.
The Articles provide that any Director who was appointed by the Board during the period shall retire at the next Annual General Meeting following his
or her appointment, but that Director may then stand for election by the Company’s shareholders. Additionally, at each Annual General Meeting one
third of the Directors must retire from office and each Director must retire at least once every three years. Retiring Directors may stand for re-election by
the Company’s shareholders. Notwithstanding the provisions of the Articles, the Company’s current practice, in accordance with the recommendations
of the Code, is to require each Director to stand for election or re-election by the Company’s shareholders on an annual basis. Changes to the Articles
of Association must be approved by the shareholders in accordance with the legislation in force from time to time.
The powers of the Directors are determined by legislation and the Articles of Association of the Company in force from time to time.
The Articles can only be amended, or new Articles adopted, by a special resolution passed by shareholders in a general meeting by at least three
quarters of the votes cast.
SR GR FS
113TB | AR—’22
CHANGES OF CONTROL
There are a number of agreements that take effect, alter or terminate upon a change of control of the Company following a takeover bid, such
ascommercial contracts, bank loan agreements and employee share schemes. None of these is deemed to be significant in terms of its potential
impacton the business of the Company.
The Company does not have agreements with any Director or employee that would provide compensation for loss of office or employment resulting
from a takeover, save that the Company’s share schemes contain provisions which may cause options and awards granted to team members to vest
ona takeover.
DIRECTORS’ INTERESTS
The Directors who held office at 29 January 2022 and their connected persons had interests in the shares of the Company as shown in the table below.
% of share capital
29 January 2022
Beneficial Number
30 January 2021
Beneficial Number
Helena Feltham 0.02% 33,333 33,333
Andrew Jennings 0.02% 38,338 38,338
Colin La Fontaine Jackson – – –
David Wolffe 0.02% 33,333 33,333
Fumbi Chima – – N/A
Jon Kempster 0.02% 33,333 33,333
Meg Lustman – – N/A
Rachel Osborne 0.02% 33,333 33,333
In accordance with LR9.8.6R(1) there has been no change in the beneficial interests of the Directors or their connected persons between the end of the
reporting period and 23 May 2022.
DONATIONS
There were no charitable donations made during the period (2021: £24,057) and a total of 3.6 tonnes of stock was donated to various charities
(2021:21 tonnes). There were no political donations made or political expenditure during the period (2021: £nil).
SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY
Details of the Group’s social, ethical and environmental responsibility initiatives can be found in our Sustainability story on pages 48-59.
RISK MANAGEMENT
The Company’s policies on financial risk management are outlined in Note 27 to the financial statements. This information is incorporated into this
Directors’ Report by reference.
POST BALANCE SHEET EVENTS
On 22 April 2022, the Group agreed with its lenders to adjust the covenant tests over the remaining life of the Revolving Credit Facility maturing in
November 2023 to provide more headroom for the Group given the prolonged disruption of Covid-19 and the impact of the Omicron variant on the
Group’s trading in the final weeks of the last financial year.
On 18 March 2022 the Company entered into a 10-year lease for its new corporate head office, the Gorgeous Brown Building.
DIRECTORS’ STATEMENT REGARDING DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION TO THE AUDITORS
The Directors who held office at the date of approval of this Directors’ Report confirm that, as far as they are aware, there is no relevant audit information
of which the Company’s auditors are unaware. Each Director has also taken all the steps necessary to ensure the Board is aware of any relevant audit
information and to establish that the Company’s auditors are aware of any such information.
The report was approved by the Board of Directors on 26 May 2022 and signed on its behalf by:
Rishi Sharma
Group General Counsel & Company Secretary
26 May 2022
114 TB | AR—’22
STATEMENT OF DIRECTORS’ RESPONSIBILITIES
Company law requires the Directors to prepare
financial statements for each financial year.
Under that law the Directors are required to
prepare the Group financial statements and
have elected to prepare the Company financial
statements in accordance with UK adopted
international accounting standards. Under
company law the Directors must not approve
thefinancial statements unless they are satisfied
that they give a true and fair view of the state
ofaffairs of the Group and Company and of
theprofit or loss for the Group for that period.
In preparing these financial statements, the
Directors are required to:
Select suitable accounting policies and then
apply them consistently
Make judgements and accounting estimates
that are reasonable and prudent
State whether they have been prepared in
accordance with UK adopted international
accounting standards, subject to any material
departures disclosed and explained in the
financial statements
Prepare the financial statements on the going
concern basis unless it is inappropriate to
presume that the Company will continue
inbusiness
Prepare a Directors’ Report, a Strategic report
and Directors’ Remuneration Report which
comply with the requirements of the
Companies Act 2006.
The Directors are responsible for keeping
adequate accounting records that are sufficient
to show and explain the Company’s transactions
and disclose with reasonable accuracy at any
time the financial position of the Company
andenable them to ensure that the financial
statements comply with the Companies
Act2006.
They are also responsible for safeguarding the
assets of the Company and hence for taking
reasonable steps for the prevention and
detection of fraud and other irregularities.
TheDirectors are responsible for ensuring
thatthe Annual Report and Accounts,
takenasawhole, is fair, balanced, and
understandable and provides the information
necessary for shareholders to assess the Group’s
performance, business model and strategy.
WEBSITE PUBLICATION
The Directors are responsible for ensuring the
Annual Report and the financial statements
aremade available on a website. Financial
statements are published on the Company’s
website in accordance with legislation in the
United Kingdom governing the preparation
anddissemination of financial statements, which
may vary from legislation in other jurisdictions.
The maintenance and integrity of the Company’s
website is the responsibility of the Directors.
TheDirectors’ responsibility also extends to the
ongoing integrity of the financial statements
contained therein.
DIRECTORS’ RESPONSIBILITIES
PURSUANT TO DTR4
The Directors confirm to the best of
theirknowledge:
The financial statements have been prepared
in accordance with the applicable set of
accounting standards and give a true and
fair view of the assets, liabilities, financial
position and profit and loss of the Group
andCompany.
The Annual Report includes a fair review
ofthe development and performance of
thebusiness and the financial position of
theGroup and Company, together with
adescription of the principal risks and
uncertainties that they face.
We consider the Annual Report and Accounts,
taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and
understandable and provides the information
necessary for shareholders to assess the Group’s
position and performance, business model
andstrategy.
On behalf of the Board
Helena Feltham Rachel Osborne
Interim Chair Chief Executive Officer
26 May 2022 26 May 2022
The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report
and the financial statements in accordance with UK adopted
international accounting standards and applicable law
and regulations.
FIFINNAANNCCIIAALL
S
STATATTEEMMEENTNTSS
130 Notes to the financial statements
167 Five-year summary
170 Approach to Task Force on
Climate-related Financial Disclosures
171 Company information
116 Independent auditor’s report
124 Income statement
125 Statement of comprehensive income
126 Statement of changes in equity
128 Balance sheet
129 Cash flow statement
115
TB | AR—’22
SR GR
FS
116 TB | AR—’22
INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT
Independent auditor’s report to the
members of Ted Baker plc
OPINION ON THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
In our opinion:
ɣ the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state of
theGroup’s and of the Parent Company’s affairs as at 29 January
2022 and of the Group’s loss for the 52 weeks then ended;
ɣ the Group financial statements have been properly prepared in
accordance with UK adopted international accounting standards;
ɣ the Parent Company financial statements have been properly
prepared in accordance with UK adopted international
accounting standards and asapplied in accordance with the
provisions of the Companies Act 2006; and
ɣ the financial statements have been prepared in accordance
withthe requirements of the Companies Act 2006.
We have audited the financial statements of Ted Baker plc
(the‘Parent Company’) and its subsidiaries (the ‘Group’) for the
52weeks ended 29 January 2022 which comprise the Group
Income Statement, the Group Statement of Comprehensive Income,
the Group and Company Statement of Changes inEquity, the Group
andCompany Balance Sheet, the Group and Company Cash Flow
Statement and notes to the financial statements, including asummary
of significant accounting policies. The financial reporting framework
that has been applied in their preparation is applicable law and UK
adopted international accounting standards and as regards the
Parent Company financial statements, as applied in accordance
withthe provisions oftheCompanies Act 2006.
BASIS FOR OPINION
We conducted our audit in accordance with International
Standardson Auditing (UK) (ISAs (UK)) and applicable law.
Ourresponsibilities under those standards are further described in
theAuditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements
section of our report. Webelieve that the audit evidence we have
obtained is sufficient andappropriate to provide a basis for our
opinion. Our audit opinion is consistent with the additional report
tothe audit committee.
Independence
Following the recommendation of the audit committee, we were
appointed by the members on 21 July 2020 to audit the financial
statements for the53weeks ending 30 January 2021 and subsequent
financial periods. The period of total uninterrupted engagement
including retenders and reappointments is 2 years, covering the
53weeks ended 30 January 2021 and the 52 weeks ended
29 January 2022. Weremain independent of the Group and the
Parent Company in accordance with the ethical requirements that
arerelevant to our audit of thefinancial statements in the UK, including
theFRC’s Ethical Standard as applied to listed public interest entities,
and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance
with these requirements. Thenon-audit services prohibited by that
standard were notprovided tothe Group or the Parent Company.
CONCLUSIONS RELATING TO GOING CONCERN
In auditing the financial statements, we have concluded that the
Directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting in the
preparation of the financial statements is appropriate. We considered
going concern to be a key audit matter and our evaluation of the
Directors’ assessment of the Group and the Parent Company’s abilityto
continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting is considered
is set out in the related key audit matter section later inthisreport.
Based on the work we have performed, we have not identified any
material uncertainties relating to events or conditions that, individually
orcollectively, may cast significant doubt on the Group and the Parent
Company’s ability to continue as a going concern for a period of
atleast twelve months from when the financial statements are
authorised for issue.
In relation to the Parent Company’s reporting on how it has applied
the UK Corporate Governance Code, we have nothing material to
add ordraw attention to in relation to the Directors’ statement in the
financial statements about whether the Directors considered
itappropriate toadopt the going concern basis of accounting.
Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the Directors with respect
to going concern are described in the relevant sections ofthisreport.
OVERVIEW
Coverage¹ 82% (2021: 86%) of Group profit before tax
88% (2021: 88%) of Group revenue
91% (2021: 92%) of Group total assets
Key audit
matters
2022 2021
Going concern
Carrying value of inventory
Carrying value of non-current assets:
– Carrying value of store assets
– Carrying value of corporate assets
Deferred tax assets
Parent Company: Recoverability of
investment in subsidiaries and amounts
due from subsidiaries
Carrying value of non-current assets for the group
asawhole was designated akey audit matter
(“KAM”) in 2021. The assets are split between store
assets andcorporate assets. Given the headroom
onthe corporate asset assessment and the reduction
involatility of trading of the group this has not been
designated a KAM for the current year. The carrying
value of store assets remain a KAM due tothe
ongoing level of judgment and estimation required
ata store cash generating unit level.
Materiality Group financial statements as a whole
£3m (2021:£2.4m) based on 0.7% (2021: 0.7%)
ofRevenue
1 These are areas which have been subject to a full scope
audit by the Group engagement team.
117TB | AR—’22
SR GR FS
AN OVERVIEW OF THE SCOPE OF OUR AUDIT
Our Group audit was scoped by obtaining an understanding of
theGroup and its environment, including the Group’s system of
internal control, and assessing the risks of material misstatement in
thefinancial statements. We also addressed the risk of management
override of internal controls, including assessing whether there was
evidence of bias by the Directors that may have represented a risk
ofmaterial misstatement.
The Group has 19 (2021: 20) reporting components which represent
individual legal entities and branches and we assessed two (2021:
two) of these to be significant components. One of these significant
components is based in the UK and one in the US. We completed
fullscope audits for the Parent company and each of the two
significant components. Non-significant components were subject
toeither specified audit procedures or desktop review procedures.
TheGroup audit team completed all audit work across the Group.
Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional
judgement, were of most significance in our audit of the financial
statements of the current period and include the most significant
assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud)
that we identified, including those which had the greatest effect on:
the overall audit strategy, the allocation of resources in the audit, and
directing the efforts of the engagement team. These matters were
addressed in the context of our audit of the financial statements
asawhole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not
provide a separate opinion on these matters.
Key audit matter How the scope of our audit addressed the key
auditmatter
Going concern
Note 1 sets out how the
directors have formed
ajudgement that the use
of the going concern
basis isappropriate in
preparing the financial
statements of the Group
and parent Company
The Directors’ assessment of going concern has
involved significant estimates and judgements.
These were based on an evaluation of the
inherent risks to the Group’s and the Company’s
business model and how those risks might affect
the Group’sand Company’s financial resources
or ability to continue operations over a 12 month
period to the end of May 2023.
The risks that we considered most likely to
adversely affect the Group’s and Company’s
available financial resources, including the debt
facilities available under the terms that were
amended in April 2022, were:
ɣ the ongoing recovery of demand for the
Group’s products and services following the
impact of the COVID-19 Global Pandemic
ɣ the forecast rates of growth in revenue,
particular with respect to online, which is
driven largely by the new product collection
but also leveraging from the benefits from the
launch of the new digital sales platform early
in FY 2023
ɣ the inflationary cost pressures facing the
industry and the wider economy
ɣ the sensitivity to the above as to the financial
covenants which are part of the terms for the
availability of the debt facilities available
Because of the significance of this area and
theeffect on our audit strategy, we considered
going concern and the sufficiency of the related
disclosures to be a key audit matter.
We assessed the Directors’ forecast models with the
assistance of our internal business restructuring experts toassist
the audit team in testing the application and appropriateness
of assumptions approved by the Directors within the forecast
cash flow model and the mathematical accuracy of the
calculations within the model.
We made detailed enquiries of the board and management
onthe reasonableness of the assumptions and future plans
modelled within the directors’ base case forecasts including
considering whether such plans align with expectations within
the wider retail industry and adjusted for the Group’s specific
circumstances and recent trading information.
We considered the appropriateness of anticipated growth
intrading levels, in particular with respect to online revenue
through detailed enquiry and assessing the modelled impact
of the new digital sales platform.
We considered the appropriateness of modelled costs in
lightof the impact of both the business transformation plan
and inflationary cost pressures by comparing to changes to
costs already being realised by the business and comparing
future expectations to see if they align with the industry and
wider economy.
We challenged the appropriateness of the downside
sensitivities applied in the directors’ Severe But Plausible
(“SBP”) downside stress test and reverse stress test (“RST”)
assessments. This included considering whether other
scenarios (or events) might be appropriate to incorporate into
the assessment.
We inspected the Group’s amended covenant terms under
the new facility agreement to gain assurance that the
scenarios modelled appropriately considered these terms.
We considered the directors assessment of the adequacy of
headroom on the loan covenants under both the base case
and SBP stress test. We also considered the RST and the
extent to which the likelihood of this scenario was sufficiently
low to support the directors’ conclusion that there was no
material uncertainty in relation to the adoption of the going
concern basis in the preparation of the financial statements.
118 TB | AR—’22
INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT
Key audit matter How the scope of our audit addressed the key
auditmatter
Going concern
continued
We considered the adequacy of the disclosures in the
financial statements against the requirements of the
accountingstandards and consistency of the disclosure
against the directors’ base case forecasts and the directors’
SBP stress test and RST assessment.
Key Observations
Based on the work we have performed, we have not
identified any material uncertainties relating to events or
conditions that, individually or collectively, may cast
significantdoubt on the Group and the Parent Company’s
ability to continue as a going concern for a period of at least
twelve months from when the financial statements are
authorised forissue.
Group: Carrying value of inventory
Note 1 sets out the
accounting policies
forinventory.
Note 2 sets out sources
ofestimation uncertainty
within inventory.
Note 3 sets out the
changes in accounting
estimates relating
toinventory.
Note 17 sets out the
components of inventory
and amounts recognised
as an expense in
theperiod.
Inventory is held at the lower of cost and net
realisable value.
ɣ The Directors have estimated the net
realisable value of inventory based on
recenttrading patterns. This estimates the
percentage of inventory, by season, that
isexpected to be sold through liquidation
channels at a price that is lower than cost.
ɣ In the year, Management has changed the
basis of determining the inventory
obsolescence as set out in note 3.
ɣ The key areas of judgement and estimation
by Management is the proportion of the
original stock season that will enter into
liquidation stage and the price at which
thatstock will be realised.
ɣ The directors are required to present
disclosures in a manner that helps users
offinancial statements to understand the
judgements that directors make about
thefuture and about other sources of
estimation uncertainty.
Given the level of judgement and estimation
involved to ensure that inventory is correctly
valued at the lower of cost and net realisable
value, this was considered to be a key
auditmatter.
We assessed the reasonableness of the directors’ estimate
ofthe volume of inventory held at the balance sheet date that
is forecast to enter liquidation channels and the liquidation
recovery rate. To do this we:
ɣ considered the directors’ comparison of historic trading
data to the percentages used within their provision model.
ɣ considered whether provision percentages were
appropriately risk adjusted to reflect current trading
expectations within the wider retail industry and adjusted
for factors specific to the business such as any changing
customer demand profile for recent seasons.
We held discussions with the board and management to
understand the rationale for the change in the basis of
calculating the inventory provision to determine that the
change is appropriate.
We performed an assessment of historic trading data used
bythe directors and recalculated the percentage of each
season’s stock that is expected to enter the liquidation stage
and also the liquidation cost recovery rate.
We considered historic trading data to test non-liquidation
channel sales, confirming that they do not result in items being
sold for a value below cost.
We assessed Management’s sensitivity analysis to consider
how a change in the volume of inventory held at the balance
sheet date eventually entering liquidation channels or
achange in the liquidation cost recovery rate of these items
could impact inventory provisions.
We considered the adequacy of the disclosures in the
financial statements against the requirements of the accounting
standards, including the calculation of the financial impact of
the change in basis. We recalculated the sensitivities
disclosed to ensure they align with the directors’
provisioningmodel.
Key observations
As a result of performing the procedures above we consider
the judgements and estimates used in considering the carrying
value of inventory to be reasonable.
119TB | AR—’22
SR GR FS
Key audit matter How the scope of our audit addressed the key
auditmatter
Group: Carrying value of non-current store assets
Note 1 sets out the
accounting policies
forthenon-current
storeassets.
Note 2 sets out
sourcesofestimation
uncertainty and the key
judgements made in
applying policies.
Covid-19 resulted in restrictions and store
closures during the audited period and there
iscontinuing uncertainty at the balance sheet
date related to thetiming and level of
anticipated recovery. There are also a number
of inflationary cost pressures impacting future
cash flows as aresult of both UK and global
economic events.
The majority of stores in the group (with assets
included within property, plant and equipment
and right-of use assets) have therefore been
assessed as having indicators of impairment.
Accordingly animpairment assessment has
beencompleted bythe directors.
The impairment assessment completed by the
directors assesses the recoverable amount
ofitscash generating units (individual stores)
which requires the forecasting and discounting
of futurecash flows for inclusion within
avalue-in-use model.
The directors are required to present disclosures
ina manner that helps users of financial
statements to understand the judgements that
directors make about the future and about
othersources of estimation uncertainty.
The value in use impairment assessments
includeahigh degree of estimation uncertainty
and this was therefore considered to be a key
audit matter.
We assessed the accuracy of the forecast models used
todetermine anticipated future cash flows in the directors’
impairment assessment. To do this we confirmed the
forecastsincluded in the assessment were consistent with
thebase case forecasts used to support the Group’s going
concern assessment.
We evaluated the assumptions used within the forecast
models including whether such plans align with
expectationswithin the wider retail industry and adjusted
forTed Baker’s specific circumstances within the jurisdictions
ofthe store portfolio.
We assessed the methodology applied within the impairment
model against the relevant accounting standards and
considered the appropriate interaction of IAS 36 Impairment
of assets and IFRS 16 Leases. This included:
ɣ assessing the appropriateness of the cash generating units
used in the impairment assessment and considered the
anticipated future cashflows modelled for each cash
generating unit for the purposes of the assessment.
ɣ using our internal valuations experts to support the audit
team in assessing the reasonableness of the discount rate
applied in the value-in-use model.
ɣ assessing the methodology in respect of right of use assets
and related lease costs within the impairment model.
ɣ considering the appropriateness of managements
conclusion that there were no reversal triggers based on
our knowledge of the entities performance in the year.
We assessed Management’s sensitivity analysis to consider
how actual results that may differ from forecast results could
impact store impairments.
We assessed whether the disclosures in the financial
statements detail the key judgements within the impairment
model and sources of estimation uncertainty.
Key observations
As a result of performing the procedures above we
considered the judgements and estimates included within
theimpairment assessments to be reasonable.
120 TB | AR—’22
INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT
Key audit matter How the scope of our audit addressed the key
auditmatter
Group: Use of deferred tax assets
Note 1 sets out the
accounting policies for
deferred tax assets.
Note 2 sets out sources
ofestimation uncertainty
and the key judgements
made in applying
policies.
Note 16 sets out the
components of the
assetsabove.
During the financial period, the COVID-19
pandemic has adversely affected the
performance of subsidiaries in the Group,
leading to losses being generated.
The recoverability of the deferred tax assets is
reliant on the availability of future taxable profits
of those subsidiaries and the directors have
accordingly prepared a forecast assessment
and determined that the tax assets recognised
are supported by future taxable profits against
which they will be offset.
The directors are required to present disclosures
in a manner that helps users of financial
statements to understand the judgements that
directors make about the future and about other
sources of estimation uncertainty.
Due to the degree of estimation uncertainty
inherent in this assessment this was considered
tobe a key audit matter.
We assessed the accuracy of the forecast models used to
determine anticipated future taxable profits in the directors’
recoverability assessment. To do this we confirmed the
forecasts included in the assessment were consistent with
thebase case forecasts used to support the Group’s going
concern assessment.
We evaluated the assumptions used within the forecast
models including the growth rates applied beyond the going
concern assessment period and whether such plans align with
expectations within the wider retail industry as adjusted for
Ted Baker’s specific circumstances.
We involved transfer pricing experts to support the audit
teamin assessing the appropriateness of transfer pricing
methodology adopted within the models for recovery of
deferred tax assets.
We calculated our own sensitivity analysis to consider how
actual results that may differ from forecast results could impact
the deferred tax assets recognised.
We assessed whether the disclosures in the financial
statements detail the key judgements within the recoverability
assessment and sources of estimation uncertainty.
Key observations
As a result of performing the procedures above we consider
the estimates included within the forecast use of tax assets
assessment to be appropriate.
Parent Company: Recoverability of investment in subsidiaries and amounts due from subsidiaries
Note 1 sets out the
accounting policies for
theabove assets.
Note 2 sets out sources
ofestimation uncertainty
and the key judgements
made in applying
policies.
Notes 15,18 and 26 set
out the components of the
assets above.
During the financial period, the COVID-19
pandemic has adversely affected the
performance of subsidiaries in the Group,
withsignificant impact on cash generated.
The recoverability of the investments in and
amounts due from subsidiaries is reliant on
thefuture cash flows of those subsidiaries and
the directors have accordingly prepared
avalue-in-use assessment and determined
thatno impairment needs to be recognised.
The directors are required to present disclosures
in a manner that helps users of financial
statements to understand the judgements that
directors make about the future and about
othersources of estimation uncertainty.
Due to the degree of estimation uncertainty
inherent in this assessment this was considered
tobe a key audit matter.
We assessed the accuracy of the forecast models used to
determine anticipated future cash flows in the directors’
recoverability assessment. To do this we confirmed the
forecasts included in the assessment were consistent with
thebase case forecasts used to support the Group’s going
concern assessment.
We evaluated the assumptions used within the forecast
models including the growth rates applied beyond the going
concern assessment period and whether such plans align with
expectations within the wider retail industry as adjusted for
Ted Baker’s specific circumstances.
We assessed Management’s sensitivity analysis to consider
how actual results that may differ from forecast results could
impact the assets carrying value.
We assessed whether the disclosures in the financial
statements detail the key judgements within the recoverability
assessment and sources of estimation uncertainty.
Key observations
As a result of performing the procedures above we consider
the estimates included within the value-in-use assessment
arereasonable.
121TB | AR—’22
SR GR FS
OUR APPLICATION OF MATERIALITY
We apply the concept of materiality both in planning and performing
our audit, and in evaluating the effect of misstatements. We consider
materiality to be the magnitude by which misstatements, including
omissions, could influence the economic decisions of reasonable
users that are taken on the basis of the financial statements.
In order to reduce to an appropriately low level the probability that
any misstatements exceed materiality, we use a lower materiality
level, performance materiality, to determine the extent of testing
needed. Importantly, misstatements below these levels will not
necessarily be evaluated as immaterial as we also take account
ofthenature of identified misstatements, and the particular
circumstances of their occurrence, when evaluating their effect
onthefinancial statements as a whole.
Based on our professional judgement, we determined materiality
forthe financial statements as a whole and performance materiality
as follows:
Group financial
statements
Parent company financial
statements
2022
£m
2021
£m
2022
£m
2021
£m
Materiality 3.0 2.4 1.5 1.5
Basis for
determining
materiality
0.7% of
revenue
0.7% of
revenue
1.0% of
total assets
1.0% of
total assets
Rationale for
thebenchmark
applied
Revenue represents
themost appropriate
benchmark of trading
for the group given
thevolatility in
performance caused by
the Covid-19 pandemic.
Total assets is
considered to be
themost appropriate
measure as the
Company is a holding
company that does
nottrade.
Performance
materiality
1.8 1.4 0.9 0.9
Basis for
determining
performance
materiality
60% of
overall
materiality
60% of
overall
materiality
60% of
overall
materiality
60% of
overall
materiality
Performance materiality
In reaching our conclusion on the level of performance materiality
tobe applied for 2022 we considered a number of factors including
the expected total value of known and likely misstatements (based
onpast experience), our knowledge of the group’s internal controls
and management’s attitude towards proposed adjustments.
Component materiality
We set materiality for each component of the Group based on
apercentage of between 40% and 80% of Group materiality
dependent on the size and our assessment of the risk of material
misstatement of that component. Component materiality ranged
from£1.2m to £2.4m (2021: £1.5m to 1.8m). In the audit of each
component, we further applied performance materiality levels of 60%
of the component materiality to our testing to ensure that the risk of
errors exceeding component materiality was appropriately mitigated.
Reporting threshold
We agreed with the Audit Committee that we would report to them
allindividual audit differences in excess of £60,000 (2021:£48,000).
We also agreed to report differences below this threshold that, in our
view, warranted reporting on qualitative grounds.
OTHER INFORMATION
The directors are responsible for the other information. The other
informationcomprises the information included in the Annual Report
other than the financial statements and our auditor’s report thereon.
Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other
information and, except to the extent otherwise explicitly stated in our
report, we do not express any form of assurance conclusion thereon.
Our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so,
consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent with
the financial statements or our knowledge obtained in the course of
the audit, or otherwise appears to be materially misstated. If we
identify such material inconsistencies or apparent material
misstatements, we are required to determine whether this gives rise to
amaterial misstatement in the financial statements themselves. If,
based onthe work we have performed, we conclude that there is a
material misstatement of this other information, we are required to
report that fact.
We have nothing to report in this regard.
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE STATEMENT
The Listing Rules require us to review the Directors’ statement in relation
togoing concern, longer-term viability and that part of the Corporate
Governance Statement relating to the parent company’s compliance
withthe provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code specified
forourreview.
Based on the work undertaken as part of our audit, we have
concluded thateach of the following elements of the Corporate
Governance Statement is materially consistent with the financial
statements or our knowledge obtained during the audit.
Going concern
and longer-term
viability
ɣ The Directors’ statement with regards to the
appropriateness of adopting the going
concern basis of accounting and any
material uncertainties identified set out on
page 67; and
ɣ The Directors’ explanation as to their
assessment ofthe Group’s prospects, the
period this assessment covers and why the
period is appropriate set out on page 69.
Other Code
provisions
ɣ Directors’ statement on fair, balanced and
understandable set out on p a g e 114 ;
ɣ Board’s confirmation that it has carried out
arobustassessment of the emerging and
principal risks set out on page 60;
ɣ The section of the annual report that
describes the review of effectiveness of risk
management and internal control systems set
out on page 60; and
ɣ The section describing the work of the
auditcommittee set out on page 84.
122 TB | AR—’22
INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT
RESPONSIBILITIES OF DIRECTORS
As explained more fully in the statement of Directors’ responsibilities,
the Directors are responsible for the preparation of the financial
statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view,
and for such internal control as the Directors determine is necessary
toenable the preparation of financial statements that are free from
material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.
In preparing the financial statements, the Directors are responsible
forassessing the Group’s and the Parent Company’s ability to
continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters
related to going concern and using the going concern basis of
accounting unless the Directors either intend to liquidate the Group
orthe Parent Company or to cease operations, or have no realistic
alternative but to do so.
AUDITOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES FOR THE AUDIT OF
THEFINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about
whetherthefinancial statements as a whole are free from material
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditor’s
report that includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance is a high level
of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in
accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material misstatement
when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are
considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they could
reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users
taken on the basis of these financial statements.
Extent to which the audit was capable of detecting irregularities,
including fraud
Irregularities, including fraud, are instances of non-compliance
withlaws and regulations. We design procedures in line with our
responsibilities, outlined above, to detect material misstatements
inrespect of irregularities, including fraud. The extent to which our
procedures are capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud
isdetailed below:
In identifying and assessing risks of material misstatement in respect
ofirregularities, including fraud, we considered the following:
ɣ the nature of the industry, control environment and business
performance including the design of the Group’s remuneration
policies, key drivers for Directors’ remuneration and
performancetargets;
ɣ the results of our enquiries of management and the Audit
Committee about their own identification of the risk of irregularities;
ɣ any matters we identified through the review of the Group’s
documentation of their policies and procedures; and
ɣ the matters discussed among the audit engagement team
regarding how and where fraud might occur in the financial
statements and any potential indicators of fraud.
We gained an understanding of the legal and regulatory framework
applicable to the Group and the industry in which it operates, and
considered the risk of fraud and non-compliance with applicable
laws and regulations. These included but were not limited to the
Companies Act 2006, Financial Conduct Authority regulations
including the UK Listing Rules, the principles of the UK Governance
Code, employment law, pensions and tax legislation.
OTHER COMPANIES ACT 2006 REPORTING
Based on the responsibilities described below and our work
performed during the course of the audit, we are required by the
Companies Act 2006 and ISAs (UK) to report on certain opinions
and matters as described below.
Strategic report
and Directors’
report
In our opinion, based on the work undertaken
in the course of the audit:
ɣ the information given in the Strategic report
and the Directors’ report for the financial
year for which the financial statements are
prepared is consistent with the financial
statements; and
ɣ the Strategic report and the Directors’
report have been prepared in accordance
with applicable legal requirements.
In the light of the knowledge and
understanding of the Group and Parent
Company and its environment obtained in the
course of the audit, we have not identified
material misstatements in the strategic report
orthe Directors’ report.
Directors’
remuneration
In our opinion, the part of the Directors’
remuneration report to be audited has been
properly prepared in accordance with the
Companies Act 2006.
Matters on which
we are required to
report by exception
We have nothing to report in respect of the
following matters in relation to which the
Companies Act 2006 requires us to report to
you if, in our opinion:
ɣ adequate accounting records have
notbeen kept by the Parent Company,
orreturns adequate for our audit have not
been received from branches not visited
byus; or
ɣ the Parent Company financial statements
and the part of the Directors’ remuneration
report to be audited are not in agreement
with the accounting records and returns; or
ɣ certain disclosures of Directors’
remuneration specified by law are not
made; or
ɣ we have not received all the information
and explanations we require for our audit.
123TB | AR—’22
SR GR FS
We discussed among the engagement team how and where
fraudmight occur in the financial statements and any potential
indicators of fraud. Aspart of this discussion, we identified potential
for fraudulent manipulation of the financial statements (including the
risk of override of controls), and determined that the principal risks
were related to posting of inappropriate journal entries to manipulate
revenue and/or profits and management bias in significant
accounting estimates and judgements.
Our procedures included, but were not limited to:
ɣ identifying and testing journal entries, in particular journal entries
posted to revenue, unusual account combinations, journals posted
through suspense accounts, journals posted by unexpected users;
ɣ enquiries with management, the Audit Committee and enquiries
ofinternal legal counsel to identify any known or suspected
non-compliance or fraud;
ɣ review of minutes of Board meetings throughout the year to
identifyany non-compliance with laws and regulation, not
alreadydisclosed by management;
ɣ review of tax compliance and involvement of our tax experts
intheaudit;
ɣ review of internal audit reports for reference of any internal
controlfailures; and
ɣ challenging assumptions and judgements made by managementin
their significant accounting estimates and judgements, in particular
in relation to the measurement of impairment provisions, valuation
of inventory, recoverability ofparent company investments,
recoverability of deferred tax assets and amounts duefrom
subsidiaries and going concern.
Our audit procedures were designed to respond to risks of material
misstatement in the financial statements, recognising that the risk of
notdetecting a material misstatement due to fraud is higher than the
risk of not detecting one resulting from error, as fraud may involve
deliberate concealment by, for example, forgery, misrepresentations
or through collusion. There are inherent limitations in the audit
procedures performed and the further removed non-compliance
withlaws and regulations is from the events and transactions
reflectedin the financial statements, the less likely we are to
becomeaware of it.
A further description of our responsibilities is available on
theFinancialReporting Council’s website at:
www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities.
Thisdescriptionformspartofour auditor’s report.
USE OF OUR REPORT
This report is made solely to the Parent Company’s members,
asabody, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the
Companies Act 2006. Our audit work has been undertaken so
thatwe might state to the Parent Company’s members those matters
we are required to state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other
purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or
assume responsibility to anyone other than the Parent Company and
the Parent Company’s members as a body, for our audit work, for this
report, or for the opinions we have formed.
Sophia Michael (Senior Statutory Auditor)
For and on behalf of BDO LLP, Statutory Auditor
London, UK
26 May 2022
BDO LLP is a limited liability partnership registered in England and
Wales (with registered number OC305127).
124 TB | AR—’22
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
52 weeks ended 29 January 2022 53 weeks ended 30 January 2021
Note
Underlying
£'000
Non-underlying
items
2
£'000
Total
£'000
Underlying
£'000
Non-underlying
items
2
£'000
Total
(Restated)
1
£'000
Revenue 5 428 ,2 4 0 – 428 ,2 4 0 355,2 71 – 355,271
Cost of sales (191 , 8 8 3) 1, 2 2 0 (1 90,66 3) (16 2 , 918) ( 7, 9 5 7 ) (17 0 , 8 75)
Gross profit/(loss) 23 6 , 357 1 ,220 237 ,57 7 19 2 , 3 5 3 (7, 9 5 7) 1 84,39 6
Distribution costs (1 84,086) (2 ,9 8 8) (1 8 7, 0 7 4 ) (1 77 ,495) (45 ,3 03) (222,798)
Administrative costs (85,803) (10 , 0 62) (95, 8 6 5) (7 1, 0 2 5) (13 , 4 0 2) (84,427)
Other operating income and expenses 7 2 , 8 31 7, 9 6 6 10 , 7 9 7 6, 4 88 1 7, 4 4 6 2 3 ,9 3 4
Operating loss (3 0 , 7 01) (3,864) (3 4 , 56 5) (4 9, 6 7 9) (4 9, 216) (98 ,8 95)
Share of post-tax (losses) from joint ventures 15 (1 , 2 7 0) – (1 , 2 7 0) (1 ,13 6) (7) (1,14 3)
Finance income 8 2 59 – 259 39 9 6 55 1, 0 5 4
Finance expense 8 (6 ,6 9 9) (1 , 7 7 5) (8 , 4 74) (8 , 74 5) – (8 , 74 5)
Loss before tax 6 (3 8 , 4 11) (5 , 6 39) (44,0 50) (5 9,1 61) (4 8 , 5 6 8) (1 07 ,729)
Taxation 10 8 ,16 0 306 8, 4 66 19 ,14 9 2 ,13 5 21, 2 8 4
(Loss) after tax attributable to owners
ofthe Company (30,25 1) (5,333) (35, 584) (4 0 , 0 12) (46,4 33) (86,445)
Loss per share 12
Basic (19. 3p) (56 .2p)
Diluted (19. 3p) (56 .2p)
1 More details of the restatement are found in Note 3.
2 More details on non-underlying items and a reconciliation of Alternative Performance Measures are included in Note 6.
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the financial statements.
Group income statement
For the 52 weeks ended 29 January 2022
125TB | AR—’22
SR GR FS
52 weeks ended
29 January
2022
£‘000
53 weeks ended
30 January
2021
£‘000
(Loss) after tax attributable to owners of the company (35,584) (86,445)
Other comprehensive (loss)/income
Items that may be reclassified to the Income Statement
Net effective portion of changes in fair value of cash flow hedges 1 ,084 (422)
Exchange differences on translation of foreign operations net of tax 1, 5 6 7 (74 6)
Other comprehensive income/(loss) for the period 2 , 6 51 (1 ,16 8)
Total comprehensive (loss) for the period (32 , 9 33) (8 7, 6 13)
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the financial statements.
Group statement of comprehensive income
For the 52 weeks ended 29 January 2022
126 TB | AR—’22
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Group statement of changes in equity
For the 52 weeks ended 29 January 2022
Note
Share
capital
£’000
Share
premium
£’000
Other
reserves
£’000
Translation
reserve
£’000
Retained
earnings
£’000
Total equity
attributable
to equity
shareholders
of the parent
£’000
Balance at 30 January 2021 9, 2 3 0 101, 3 0 4 (1,16 5) 5, 582 3 7, 0 8 5 15 2 , 0 3 6
Comprehensive loss for the period
Loss for the period – – – – (35 , 58 4) (35,584)
Exchange differences on translation of
foreignoperations – – – 1, 912 – 1, 912
Current tax on foreign currency translation 10 – – – (3 4 5) – (3 4 5)
Effective portion of changes in fair value of cash
flow hedges – – (4 4) – – (4 4)
Transferred to initial carrying amount of inventory – – 1 ,18 4 – – 1,1 8 4
Deferred tax associated with movement in
hedgingreserve 10 – – (56) – – (5 6)
Total comprehensive loss for the period – – 1,0 8 4 1, 5 67 (35,584) (32 ,933)
Transactions recognised directly in equity
Increase in issued share capital 24 – – – – – –
Share-based payment charges 25 – – – – 1, 2 9 0 1, 2 9 0
Movement on current and deferred tax on
share-based payments 10 – – – – (5) (5)
Total – – – – 1, 2 8 5 1, 2 8 5
Balance at 29 January 2022
9, 2 3 0 101, 3 0 4 (81) 7,149 2 , 78 6 12 0 , 3 8 8
For the 53 weeks ended 30 January 2021
Note
Share
capital
£’000
Share
premium
£’000
Other
reserves
£’000
Translation
reserve
£’000
Retained
earnings
£’000
Total equity
attributable
to equity
shareholders
of the Company
£’000
Balance at 25 January 2020 2,228 10,555 (74 3) 6 ,32 8 1 22,305 14 0 , 67 3
Comprehensive (loss)/income for the period
Loss for the period – – – – (8 6, 4 4 5) (86,445)
Exchange differences on translation of
foreignoperations – – – (1 ,333) – ( 1 ,333)
Current tax on foreign currency translation 10 – – – 587 – 5 87
Effective portion of changes in fair value of cash
flow hedges – – (42 8) – – (42 8)
Deferred tax associated with movement in
hedgingreserve 10 – – 6 – – 6
Total comprehensive loss for the period – – (42 2) (74 6) (86,445) (8 7, 6 1 3)
Transactions recognised directly in equity
Increase in issued share capital 24 7, 0 0 2 9 0 , 74 9 – – – 9 7, 7 51
Share-based payment charges – – – – 1, 2 0 4 1 ,204
Movement on current and deferred tax on
share-based payments 10 – – – – 21 21
Total 7, 0 0 2 9 0 , 74 9 – – 1, 2 2 5 9 8 , 9 76
Balance at 30 January 2021 9, 2 3 0 101, 3 0 4 (1,16 5) 5, 582 3 7, 0 8 5 15 2 , 0 3 6
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the financial statements.
127TB | AR—’22
SR GR FS
Company statement of changes in equity
For the 52 weeks ended 29 January 2022
Note
Share
capital
£’000
Share
premium
£’000
Other
reserves
£’000
Retained
earnings
£’000
Total
equity
£’000
Balance at 30 January 2021 9,230 101,304 23,985 17, 74 3 152,262
Loss for the period 11 – – – (351) (351)
Transactions with owners recorded directly in equity
Increase in issued share capital 24 – – – – –
Share-based payments charges for awards granted
tosubsidiaryemployees 25 – – 1,290 – 1,290
Dividends paid – – – – –
Total transactions with owners – – 1,290 – 1,290
Balance at 29 January 2022 9,230 101,304 25,275 17, 39 2 153,201
For the 53 weeks ended 30 January 2021
Note
Share
capital
£’000
Share
premium
£’000
Other
reserves
£’000
Retained
earnings
£’000
Total
equity
£’000
Balance at 25 January 2020 2,228 10,555 22,781 17, 5 8 6 53,150
Profit for the period 11 – – – 157 157
Transactions with owners recorded directly in equity
Increase in issued share capital 24 7, 0 0 2 9 0, 749 – – 9 7, 751
Share-based payments charges for awards granted
tosubsidiaryemployees 25 – – 1,204 1,204
Dividends paid – – – – –
Total transactions with owners 7,0 0 2 90,749 1,204 – 98,955
Balance at 30 January 2021 9,230 101,304 23,985 17, 74 3 152,262
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the financial statements.
128 TB | AR—’22
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Group and company balance sheet
At 29 January 2022
Note
Group
29 January
2022
£’000
Group
30 January
2021
Restated
1
£’000
Company
29 January
2022
£’000
Company
30 January
2021
£’000
Intangible assets 13 2 8 , 4 21 3 4 , 75 8 – –
Property, plant and equipment 14 30,20 0 3 9, 4 01 – –
Right-of-use assets 23 6 3, 519 81 , 7 5 9 – –
Investment in joint ventures 15 2 , 421 3, 6 91 – –
Investment in subsidiary companies 15 – – 2 7, 6 9 6 26,407
Amounts owed by Group undertakings 26,18 – – 123,753 119, 6 7 2
Deferred tax assets 16 3 5 ,18 7 2 7, 6 3 5 1,638 1,10 0
Prepayments 84 5 41 – –
Non-current assets 15 9, 8 3 2 18 7, 7 8 5 153,087 147,179
Inventories 17 10 3 , 0 71 8 7, 8 4 8 – –
Trade and other receivables 18 56,66 0 44,66 6 66 –
Amounts due from JV 18 4, 505 4,305 – –
Income tax receivable 1, 2 9 3 7, 9 8 3 – –
Cash and cash equivalents 21 14 , 515 6 6 , 6 71 195 5,195
Current assets 18 0 , 0 4 4 211 , 4 7 3 261 5,195
Total assets 339 ,87 6 3 9 9, 2 5 8 153,348 152,374
Trade and other payables 22 (76 , 8 93) (86 , 82 9) (147) (112 )
External borrowings 21 (8 , 000) – – –
Bank overdraft 21 (3 , 417) – – –
Income tax payable (3, 0 28) (2 , 6 07) – –
Lease liabilities 23 (4 3 , 12 9) (4 5, 0 6 3) – –
Provisions 20 (19 9) (1,9 7 3) – –
Derivative financial liabilities 19 (75) (1,1 91) – –
Current liabilities (13 4 , 741) (1 3 7, 6 6 3) (147) (112)
Provisions 20 (2 , 8 62) (2 ,94 2) – –
Lease liabilities 23 (81, 8 0 5) (1 0 6 , 617) – –
Deferred tax liabilities 16 (80) – – –
Non-current liabilities (8 4 , 74 7) (10 9, 5 5 9) – –
Total liabilities (219, 4 8 8) (247 ,222) (147) (112)
Net assets 12 0 , 3 8 8 15 2 , 0 3 6 153,201 152,262
Share capital 24 9, 2 3 0 9, 2 3 0 9,230 9,230
Share premium 101, 3 0 4 1 01, 3 0 4 101,304 101,304
Other reserves 24 (81) (1,165) 25,275 23,985
Translation reserve 24
7,149
5, 582 – –
Retained earnings 2 , 786 37,085 17, 3 9 2 17, 74 3
Total equity attributable to equity shareholders of the
parentCompany 12 0 , 3 8 8 15 2 , 0 3 6 153,201 152,262
Total equity 12 0 , 3 8 8 15 2 , 0 3 6 153,201 152,262
1 More details of the restatement are found in Note 3.
The Company has taken advantage of the exemption allowed under section 408 of the Companies Act 2006 and has not presented its own
statement of comprehensive income in these financial statements. The profit/(loss) for the year in the accounts of the Company was £(0.4)m
(2021: £0.2m).
These financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors and authorised for issue on 26 May 2022 and were signed on its behalf by:
Marc Dench Director
Company number: 03393836
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the financial statements.
129TB | AR—’22
SR GR FS
Group and company cash flow statement
For the 52 weeks ended 29 January 2022
Group
52 weeks
ended
29 January
2022
£’000
Group
53 weeks
ended
30 January
2021
£’000
Company
52 weeks
ended
29 January
2022
£’000
Company
53 weeks
ended
30 January
2021
£’000
Cash generated from operations
(Loss)/profit for the period
(35 , 58 4) (8 6 , 4 4 5) (350) 157
Adjusted for:
Income tax credit
(8, 4 6 6) (21, 28 4) (538) (157)
Depreciation and amortisation 36 , 73 8 5 3 ,1 0 9 – –
IFRS 16 modifications 2 , 4 75 – – –
Amortisation of reacquired right – 1 , 74 6 – –
Impairment 2 ,9 8 8 4 5,3 03 – –
(Profit)/Loss on disposal of business – (17, 4 4 6 ) – –
(Profit)/loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment and right of use assets (979) 933 – –
Write off property, plant and equipment 1, 28 5 325 – –
Share-based payments charge 1, 2 9 0 1, 2 0 4 – –
Net finance expense 5, 539 7, 6 9 1 – –
Change in accounting estimates for inventory – – –
IFRS 16 practical expediency 3 61 (3 61) – –
Net change in derivative financial assets and liabilities carried at fair value
throughprofitor loss
– – – –
Share of loss in joint venture 1, 2 70 1 ,14 3 – –
Increase in provisions 3 , 0 74 4 ,915 – –
Decrease in non-current prepayments 406 12 6 – –
Decrease/(increase) in inventory (15,14 6) 4 3 , 8 21 – –
Decrease/(increase) in trade and other receivables (5, 333) 21,9 6 6 (66) –
Increase/(decrease) in trade and other payables (21 , 8 4 2) (8 ,13 5) 35 –
Income taxes received/(paid) 8,09 0 4 , 0 21
Net cash (used in)/generated from operating activities (23,834) 52 ,6 32 (919) –
Cash flow from investing activities
Purchases of property, plant and equipment and intangibles
(7,533) (6 , 9 81) – –
Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment 237 7 7, 7 8 2 – –
Investment in equity accounted investee – – – –
Increase in loans to Group companies – – (4 ,081) (92,557)
Interest received 206 94 – –
Dividends received from joint venture – 254 – –
Payments (to)/from joint venture (20 0) 15 7 – –
Net cash (used in)/generated from investing activities (7,290) 7 1, 3 0 6 (4,081) (92,557)
Cash flow financing activities
Repayment of borrowings
(1 8 , 000) (1 80 , 000) – –
Proceeds from borrowings and overdraft 2 9, 4 02 – – –
Repayment of capital element of leases (2 9, 2 7 8) (1 9, 8 7 7) – –
Repayment of interest element of leases (5, 487) (4,640) – –
Interest paid (292) (1 , 9 74) – –
Dividends paid – – – –
Proceeds from issue of shares – 10 5 , 0 0 3 – 105,003
Cost of issue of shares – ( 7, 2 5 2 ) – ( 7, 2 52 )
Net cash (used in)/generated from financing activities (23, 655) (1 0 8 , 74 0) – 9 7, 751
Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents (54 ,7 79) 1 5 ,19 8 (5,000) 5,174
Net cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of the period 6 6 , 671 52 ,912 5,195 21
Exchange rate movement 2, 623 (1, 4 39) – –
Net cash and cash equivalents at the end of the period 14 , 515 6 6 , 671 195 5,195
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the financial statements.
130 TB | AR—’22
Notes to the financial statements
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
1 SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES
The principal accounting policies applied in the preparation of these consolidated and Company financial statements are set out below.
Thesepolicies have been consistently applied to all the periods presented, unless otherwise stated.
Basis of preparation
Both the consolidated and Company financial statements have been prepared in accordance with UK adopted international accounting
standards (‘IFRS’) and the applicable legal requirements of the Companies Act 2006. On publishing the parent Company financial statements
here together with the consolidated financial statements, the Company is taking advantage of the exemption in Section 408 of the Companies
Act 2006 not to present its income statement and related notes that form a part of these approved financial statements. As is common in the
retail sector, the Group operates a weekly accounting calendar and this year the financial statements are for the 52 weeks to 29 January
2022 (prior year 53 weeks to 30 January 2021).
The consolidated and parent financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention, except for certain financial assets
and financial liabilities (including derivative instruments), which are held at fair value and for certain other assets and liabilities recognised at
fair value on business combinations. The consolidated and parent financial statements have been prepared in Pounds Sterling, which is the
Group’s presentation currency and are rounded to the nearest thousand Pounds Sterling.
The preparation of financial statements in conformity with Adopted IFRSs requires management to make judgements, estimates and
assumptions that affect the application of policies and reported amounts of assets and liabilities, income and expenses. The estimates and
associated assumptions are based on historical experience, future budgets and forecasts, and various other factors that are believed to be
reasonable under the circumstances, the results of which form the basis of making the judgements about carrying values of assets and liabilities
that are not readily apparent from other sources. Actual results may differ from these estimates.
The estimates and assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognised in the period in which the
estimate is revised if the revision affects only that period, or in the period of the revision and future periods if the revision affects both current and
future periods. The Group’s significant judgement and estimates are shown in Note 2.
Adoption of new accounting standards, interpretations and amendments
There have been no changes in accounting standards during the year that materially impact the Group or Company.
The Group has revised its accounting policy for capitalisation of cloud computing software following the IFRS Interpretations Committee (IFRIC)
agenda decision published in March 2019 and April 2021. The new intangible asset accounting policy is presented below. The change in the
accounting policy has not materially changed the income statement for the prior year.
Certain new accounting standards and other interpretations have been published that are not yet effective and have not been early adopted
by the Group. These standards are not expected to have a material impact on the entity in the current or future reporting periods and on
foreseeable future transactions.
Going concern
The consolidated financial statements have been prepared on a going concern basis. The Directors have prepared a going concern
assessment covering the 12-month period from the date of signing these financial statements, which demonstrates that the Group is capable
ofcontinuing to operate within its existing facilities and can meet its financial covenant tests during the period. The Directors’ assessment
considers the principal risks facing the business, and a series of financial forecasts, which include a review of current performance and
forecasts of revenue across all sales channels combined with ongoing expenditure including capital expenditure and borrowing facilities.
TheDirectors have concluded that it is appropriate to adopt the going concern basis of accounting in preparing these financial statements
forthe reasons set out in Note 4.
Basis of consolidation
The consolidated accounts include the accounts of the Company and its subsidiary undertakings made up to 29 January 2022. Unless
otherwise stated, the acquisition method of accounting has been adopted. Under this method, the results of subsidiary undertakings acquired
or disposed of in the period are included in the consolidated financial statements from the date of acquisition or up to the date of disposal.
Intercompany transactions, balances and unrealised gains on transactions between Group companies are eliminated. Unrealised losses are
also eliminated unless the transaction provides evidence of an impairment of the asset transferred. Accounting policies of subsidiaries have
been changed where necessary to ensure consistency with the policies adopted by the Group.
Subsidiaries are entities controlled by the Group. The Group controls an entity when it is exposed to, or has rights to, variable returns from
itsinvolvement with the entity and has the ability to affect those returns through its power over the entity. In assessing control, the Group takes
into consideration potential voting rights that are currently exercisable. The acquisition date is the date on which control is transferred to the
acquirer. The financial statements of subsidiaries are included in the consolidated financial statements from the date that control commences
until the date that control ceases. Losses applicable to the non-controlling interests in a subsidiary are allocated to the non-controlling interests
even if doing so causes the non-controlling interests to have a deficit balance.
131TB | AR—’22
SR GR FS
Jointly controlled entities are those entities over whose activities the Group has joint control, established by contractual agreement and
requiring the ventures’ unanimous consent for strategic financial and operating decisions. Jointly controlled entities are accounted for using
theequity method (equity accounted investees) and are initially recognised at cost.
The consolidated financial statements include the Group’s share of the total recognised income and expense and equity movements of equity
accounted investees, from the date that significant influence or joint control commences until the date that significant influence or control
ceases. When the Group’s share of losses exceeds its interest in an equity accounted investee, the Group’s carrying amount is reduced to
£niland recognition of further losses is discounted except to the extent that the Group has incurred legal or constructive obligations or made
payments on behalf of an investee.
Foreign currency
The consolidated financial statements are presented in Pounds Sterling, which is the Company’s presentation currency.
Transactions in foreign currencies are translated to the respective functional currencies of Group entities at the foreign exchange rate ruling
atthe date of the transaction. Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies at the balance sheet date are translated to
functional currency at the foreign exchange rate ruling at that date. Foreign exchange differences arising on translation are recognised in
theincome statement. Non-monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies that are stated at fair value are translated to
functional currency at foreign exchange rates ruling at the dates the values were determined.
Exchange differences arising from a monetary item receivable from or payable to a foreign entity, the settlement of which is neither planned nor
likely in the foreseeable future, are considered to form part of a net investment in a foreign operation and are recognised directly in equity in the
translation reserve.
The assets and liabilities of foreign operations, including goodwill and fair value adjustments arising on consolidation, are translated to Sterling
at foreign exchange rates ruling at the balance sheet date. The revenues and expenses of foreign operations are translated to Sterling at
average foreign exchange rates ruling at the dates of the transactions. Foreign exchange differences arising on retranslation since the transition
date are recognised directly in a separate component of equity. When a foreign operation is disposed of, in part or in full, the relevant amount
in the foreign currency translation reserve is transferred to profit or loss.
Revenue recognition
Revenue represents amounts receivable for goods provided and amounts charged to the customer for delivery of the goods in the normal
course of business, net of trade discounts, VAT and other sales-related taxes, The Group also obtains revenue through licences issued to third
parties to produce and sell goods using the “Ted Baker” brand name, for which a royalty is received. See Note 3 for impact on change of
accounting policy of delivery income. Delivery income represents delivery services provided to by the Group to the customer is recognised
within revenue.
Retail revenue is recognised when a Group entity sells a product to a customer. Wholesale revenue is recognised when title has passed in
accordance with the individual terms of trade. For retail and wholesale revenue, the primary performance obligation is the transfer of goods
tothe customer. For retail revenue, this is considered to occur when control of the goods passes to the customer. For store retail revenue,
controltransfers when the customer takes possession of the goods in store and pays for the goods. For e-commerce retail revenue, control is
considered to transfer when the goods are delivered to the customer. The timing of transfer of control of the goods in wholesale transactions
also depends upon the terms of trade in the contract. Principally for wholesale revenue, revenue is recognised either when goods are
despatched from the Group’s distribution centres, or when the Group has delivered the goods to the location specified in the contract.
Deliveryincome is recognised when the goods are delivered to the customer.
The Group sells retail products with the right of return and historic levels of experience is used to estimate and provide for the value of such
returns at the time of sale when considered significant. Credit notes or exchanges are available to customers returning unwanted products
withproof of purchase within 28 days for online purchases, and 30 days for in-store purchases (14 days in North America), of the date of
purchase. Cash refunds are available to customers returning unwanted products with proof of purchase within 14 days of the date of purchase.
The Group has two classes of contractual licences (or ‘licence partners’): product and territorial. Under the terms of the product licence
contract, the Company licenses the brand name “Ted Baker” to licence partners, and in return receives a royalty based on a contractually
specified percentage of sales of the product over the contract period. Under the terms of the contract, the Company typically receives
aminimum royalty which is invoiced quarterly in advance and is recognised in the consolidated income statement on a straight-line basis as
licence income over the period of the invoice. Any additional royalties due are accrued as earned based on sales statements received from
product licence partners.
Territorial licence partners operate retail stores in overseas locations where the Group typically does not have a geographical presence.
TheGroup sells inventory to the licence partner at an agreed wholesale price, and these sales are recognised as wholesale revenue. In some
territories, the Group receives a royalty for use of the brand name by the territorial partner. The royalty earned can include a fixed contractual
minimum royalty and a variable amount based on sales of the territorial partner, with the royalty being recognised as licence income in the
consolidated income statement. The fixed minimum royalty is recognised in the consolidated income statement on a straight-line basis over the
period of the invoice, and the variable amount is accrued as earned based on sales of the territorial partner.
Accrued income is from licence income earned but not billed in the period. There is only one performance obligation for licence income and
that is the contractual use of the brand name in return for a royalty fee.
Sales of gift vouchers are treated as future liabilities, and revenue is recognised when the gift vouchers are redeemed against a later transaction.
132 TB | AR—’22
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Pension costs
Contributions payable to defined contribution schemes in respect of pension costs and other post-retirement benefits are charged to the
consolidated income statement in the period to which they relate. Differences between contributions payable in the period and contributions
actually paid are shown as either accruals or prepayments in the balance sheet.
Share-based payments
The Group operates an equity-settled share-based compensation plan.
Share options and conditional share awards
Share options granted under the Sharesave scheme are measured at fair value at the date of grant using the Black-Scholes pricing model.
Share options granted under the Ted Baker plc Long-Term Incentive Plan and the Ted Baker Incentive Plan are measured at fair value at the
date of grant using the Monte-Carlo pricing models where the vesting condition contains market based performance conditions. The fair value
of awards that are subject to non-market based performance conditions are equal to the share price on the grant date. The grant date fair
value is expensed on a straight-line basis over the vesting period (i.e. the period in which the employees become unconditionally entitled
toshare options/awards) based on an estimate of shares that will eventually vest.
Where the Company grants options over its own shares to the employees of its subsidiaries, it recognises, in its individual financial statements,
an increase in the cost of investment in its subsidiaries equivalent to the equity-settled share-based payment charge recognised in its
consolidated financial statements with the corresponding credit being recognised directly in equity.
Derivatives
The Group holds derivative financial instruments to hedge its foreign currency and interest rate exposures. Derivatives are recognised initially at
fair value. Subsequent to initial recognition, derivatives are measured at fair value, and changes therein are accounted for as described below.
Cash flow hedges
Changes in the fair value of foreign currency and interest rate derivatives which are designated as effective hedges of future cash flows
arerecognised in equity in the cash flow hedging reserve and remain there until the forecast transaction occurs. When the hedged item is
anon-financial asset, the amount recognised in equity is transferred to the carrying amount of the asset when it is recognised. In other cases,
the amount recognised in other comprehensive income is transferred to the income statement in the same period that the hedged item affects
the income statement.
If the hedging instrument no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, expires or is sold, terminated or exercised, then hedge accounting
is discontinued prospectively. The cumulative gain or loss previously recognised in other comprehensive income remains there until the forecast
transaction occurs.
Changes in the fair value of foreign currency derivatives which are ineffective or do not meet the criteria for hedge accounting are recognised
in the income statement.
Taxation
Corporation tax payable is recognised on taxable profits using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.
Deferredtax is recognised in full, using the balance sheet liability method, on temporary differences arising between the tax bases of assets
andliabilities and their carrying amounts in the consolidated financial statements. However, if the deferred tax arises from initial recognition
ofan asset or liability in a transaction other than a business combination that at the time of the transaction affects neither accounting nor taxable
profit or loss, it is not accounted for. Deferred tax is determined using tax rates (and laws) that have been enacted or substantively enacted by
the balance sheet date and are expected to apply when the related deferred tax asset is realised, or the deferred tax liability issettled.
Deferred tax is not recognised for temporary differences relating to investments in subsidiaries to the extent they will not reverse in the
foreseeable future.
Deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profit will be available against which the temporary
differences can be utilised.
Income tax is recognised in the income statement except to the extent that it relates to items recognised directly in equity, in which case
itisrecognised in equity. Income tax comprises current and deferred tax.
Dividends
Dividend distribution to the Company’s shareholders is recognised as a liability in the Group and Company financial statements in the period
in which it is declared. For the Company, dividend income from Group undertakings is recognised in the income statement and in the cash flow
statement within operating cash flows.
Intangible assets
Intangible assets that are acquired by the Group are stated at cost less accumulated amortisation and impairment losses. Assets acquired
aspart of a business combination are recognised at fair value.
Where an intangible asset has been identified, expenditure on development activities is capitalised if the product is technically and
commercially feasible and the Group intends and has the technical ability and sufficient resources to complete development, future economic
benefits are probable and if the Group can measure reliably the expenditure attributable to the intangible asset during its development.
Development activities involve a plan or design for the production of new or substantially improved products or processes. The expenditure
capitalised includes direct labour and an appropriate proportion of overheads. Capitalised development expenditure is stated at cost less
accumulated amortisation and less accumulated impairment losses.
133TB | AR—’22
SR GR FS
Software-as-a-service (“SaaS”) or cloud computing software do not meet the control test for an intangible asset to be identified. Generally,
costs incurred to configure or customise the cloud provider’s software and ongoing costs to obtain access to the cloud provider’s application
are recognised in the income statement when the services are received. Where customisation and configuration of implementing the SaaS
arrangements include additional capability to the existing on premise software to enable it to connect with the cloud computing software, the
costs are capitalised. Where customisation and configuration involve changes to the SaaS itself, the costs are expensed as the SaaS software
is not controlled by the Company.
Amortisation is charged to the income statement on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful lives of intangible assets. Key money is a
deposit held by landlords on taking out a lease which is refundable and is not amortised. Other intangible assets are amortised from the date
they are available for use. The useful life over which the reacquired right is amortised in the post-combination period is based on the remaining
contractual term of two years, without considering any contractual renewals. The estimated useful lives are as follows:
Key money: No amortisation charged.
Computer software: Three to ten years.
Computer software under development:
Assets under development are stated at cost less transfers to completed assets when substantially
all of the activities necessary for the asset to be ready for use have occurred.
Reacquired right: Two years.
Property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment losses.
Depreciation is provided on property, plant and equipment at rates calculated to write off the cost, less estimated residual value, of each asset
on the following bases:
Freehold land: Not depreciated.
Freehold buildings: Straight line over 50 years.
Leasehold improvements: Straight line over the shorter of the period of the unexpired term of the lease or the useful
economic life of the improvement.
Fixtures, fittings and office equipment: 20% to 25% per annum on a straight-line basis apart from computer equipment, which is 33%per
annum on a straight-line basis or over the expected useful economic life of the asset.
Motor vehicles: 25% per annum on a straight-line basis over the expected useful economic life of the asset.
Assets under construction: Assets in the course of construction are stated at cost less transfers to completed assets when
substantially all of the activities necessary for the asset to be ready for use have occurred.
The assets’ residual values and useful lives are reviewed, and adjusted if appropriate, at each balance sheet date. An asset’s carrying amount
is written down immediately to its recoverable amount if the asset’s carrying amount is greater than its estimated recoverable amount.
Gains and losses on disposals are determined by comparing the disposal proceeds with the carrying amount and are included in the
incomestatement.
Leases
Under IFRS 16, the Group recognises right-of-use assets and lease liabilities at the lease commencement date, except for short-term leases
(defined as leases with a lease term of 12 months or less) and leases of low-value assets. For these leases, the Group recognises the lease
payments as an operating expense on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease.
The lease liabilities are initially measured at the present value of the fixed lease payments that are not yet paid at the commencement date,
discounted using the interest rate implicit in the lease or, if that rate cannot be readily determined, the Group’s incremental borrowing rate.
Variable lease payments are not included in the calculation of the lease liability and are instead expensed through the income statement within
distribution costs. Generally, the Group uses the incremental borrowing rate as the discount rate and this rate is determined on a portfolio basis,
in relation to asset type and location. Judgment is used in determining the incremental borrowing rate.
The lease liability is presented as a separate line in the consolidated balance sheet. Lease liabilities are subsequently measured at amortised
cost and are increased by the interest charge and decreased by the lease payments made.
The Group remeasures the lease liability (and makes a corresponding adjustment to the related right-of-use asset) when there is a change
infuture lease payments arising from a change in an index or rate, a change in the estimate of the amount expected to be payable under
aresidual value guarantee, or as appropriate, changes in the assessment of whether a renewal or purchase option is reasonably certain to
beexercised or a break clause is reasonably certain not to be exercised. Where a lease contract is modified, and the lease modification is not
accounted for as a separate lease, the lease liability is remeasured based on the lease term of the modified lease by discounting the revised
lease payments using a revised discount rate at the effective date of the modification. The Group has chosen to apply the Covid-19 practical
expedient for its European leases where there is a rent concession as a direct result of the Covid-19 pandemic such that the rent concession
onthese leases are not treated as lease modifications.
Where renewal discussions on a lease extension are ongoing with the landlord at the lease expiry date, the expired lease is treated as
adisposal and the new lease, after agreement and finalisation, is treated as a modification.
134 TB | AR—’22
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Right-of-use assets are initially measured at cost, which is an amount equal to the corresponding lease liabilities adjusted for any lease
payments made at or before the commencement date, less any lease incentives received. Right-of-use assets are subsequently measured
atcost less any accumulated depreciation and impairment losses, adjusted for certain re-measurements of the lease liabilities. Depreciation
iscalculated on a straight-line basis over the expected useful economic life of a lease which is taken as the lease term.
A sale and lease back transaction is where the Group sells an asset and immediately reacquires the use of the asset by entering into a lease
with the counterparty. A sale is recognised when control of the underlying asset passes to the counterparty. The asset sold is derecognised
anda lease liability and right-of-use asset recognised in relation to the lease. The right-of-use asset arising from the lease back is measured
byreference to the proportion of the previous carrying amount of the asset that relates to the right of use retained. Any gain or loss arising on
the transaction is recognised in the Income Statement and relates to the rights transferred to the counterparty.
Impairment of property, plant and equipment, right of use assets and intangible assets
Assets that are subject to depreciation or amortisation are reviewed for impairment when events or changes in circumstances indicate that the
carrying amount may not be recoverable. An impairment loss is recognised for the amount by which the asset’s carrying amount exceeds its
estimated recoverable amount. The recoverable amount is the higher of an asset’s fair value less costs to sell and value in use. Recoverable
amounts for cash-generating units are based on value in use, which is calculated from cash flow projections using data from the Group’s
budget and three-year plan, which are approved by the Board.
The key assumptions for the value-in-use calculations are those regarding discount rates, growth rates and expected changes in margins.
Management uses a pre-tax discount rate derived from the Group’s adjusted weighted average cost of capital. Internal forecasts reflect
themarket assessment and risks specific to the cash-generating units as at the period end date, as considered in the budgets and forecasts
approved by the Board. The discount rates used were 14.5% for the UK, 12.8% for Europe, 15.3% for US and 14.3% for Canada.
Changesinselling prices and direct costs are based on past experience and expectations of future changes in the market.
Impairment losses are recognised in the income statement. For the purposes of assessing impairment, assets are grouped at the lowest levels
forwhich there are separately identifiable cash flows (cash-generating units). Where an impairment loss subsequently reverses, the carrying
amount of the asset is increased to the revised estimate of the recoverable amount, but so that the increased carrying value does not exceed
the carrying value that would have been determined if no impairment loss had been recognised for the asset in prior years. A reversal of an
impairment loss is recognised in the income statement immediately.
Investments
Investments in subsidiaries by the Company are shown at cost less accumulated impairment losses which are recognised in the income statement.
Inventories
Inventories and work in progress are stated at the lower of cost (or fair value if acquired as part of a business combination) and net realisable
value. Cost includes invoice cost from suppliers and inward transportation costs, including freight and duty costs, incurred in bringing the
inventories to the distribution centres. Where necessary, provision is made to reduce cost to no more than net realisable value having regard
tothe nature and condition of inventory, as well as its anticipated utilisation and saleability. The provision is calculated based on the expected
recovery rate when stock is liquidated applied to the percentage of each season’s stock that is expected to be liquidated. The methodology
ofcalculating inventory provision has changed for the year ending 29 January 2022. See Note 3 for more details.
Trade and other receivables
Trade and other receivables are carried at original invoice amount (which is considered a reasonable proxy for fair value) and are
subsequently held at amortised cost less provision for impairment. The provision for impairment of receivables is based on lifetime expected
credit losses, under the simplified model. Lifetime expected credit losses are calculated by assessing historic credit loss experience, adjusted for
factors specific to the receivable. The movement in the provision is recognised in the Group Income Statement. Recoverability of the amounts
due from joint ventures is assessed taking into account the projected future cash flows of the joint venture. See Note 18 for further information.
Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash balances, amounts held by payment processors and overnight money market deposits.
Interest-bearing borrowings
Interest-bearing borrowings are recognised initially at fair value less attributable transaction costs. Subsequent to initial recognition, interest-
bearing borrowings are stated at amortised cost with any difference between cost and redemption value being recognised in the income
statement over the period of the borrowings on an effective interest basis.
135TB | AR—’22
SR GR FS
Finance income and expenses
Net financing costs comprise interest payable on borrowings calculated using the effective interest rate method, interest receivable on funds
invested, dividend income, foreign exchange gains and losses, and gains and losses on hedging instruments that are recognised in the
incomestatement.
Interest income is recognised in the income statement as it accrues, using the effective interest method. Dividend income is recognised in
theincome statement on the date the entity’s right to receive payments is established which in the case of quoted securities is usually the
ex-dividend date.
Segment reporting
A segment is a component of the Group that engages in business activities from which it may earn revenues and incur expenses, including
revenues and expenses that relate to transactions with any of the Group’s other components. All operating segments’ operating results are
reviewed regularly by the Group’s Board to make decisions about resources to be allocated to a segment and assess its performance,
andforwhich discrete financial information is available. See Note 5 for further information.
Financial guarantee contracts
Where the Company enters into financial guarantee contracts to guarantee the indebtedness of other companies within its Group the Company
considers these to be insurance arrangements, and accounts for them as such. In this respect, the Company treats the guarantee contract
asacontingent liability until such time as it becomes probable that the Company will be required to make a payment under the guarantee.
Share capital
Ordinary shares are classified as equity. Incremental costs directly attributable to the issue of new shares or options are shown in equity
asadeduction, net of tax, from the proceeds.
Provisions
Provisions are recognised in the balance sheet when the Group has a present legal or constructive obligation as a result of a past event and
itis probable that an outflow of economic benefits will be required to settle the obligation. Provisions are measured at the Directors’ best
estimate of the expenditure required to settle the obligation at the balance sheet date. Where the effect is material, the provision is determined
by discounting the expected future cash flows at a pre-tax rate which reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and,
where appropriate, the risks specific to the liability.
Government schemes
Grants are recognised only when there is reasonable assurance that the Group will comply with the conditions attached to them and that the
grants will be received. Grants that are receivable as compensation for expenses already incurred are recognised in profit or loss in the period
in which they become receivable.
Alternative performance measures
In the reporting of financial information, the Group uses certain measures that are not required disclosures under IFRS or the Companies Act.
The Directors believe that these additional measures, which are used by the Board and Operating Committee to assess performance, are
useful to the users of the financial statements in helping them understand the underlying business performance. Non-underlying items are
thoseitems which, in the opinion of the Directors, should be excluded in order to provide a consistent and comparable view of the underlying
performance of the Group’s ongoing business and are considered by the Directors to be significant.
Non-underlying items are added back/deducted to derive certain alternative performance measures as follows:
ɣ profit attributable to the owners of the Company, to arrive at underlying earnings per share (after the tax effect of non-underlying items); and
ɣ profit before tax, to arrive at profit before tax and non-underlying items.
The Directors believe the alternative performance measures presented along with comparable GAAP measurements is useful to provide
information with which to measure our performance, and our ability to invest in new opportunities. Management uses these measures with
themost directly comparable GAAP financial measures in evaluating our operating performance and value creation. Alternative financial
measures should not be considered in isolation from, or as a substitute for, financial information presented in compliance with GAAP.
Therequirements for identifying non-underlying items are on a consistent basis each period and presented consistently, and a reconciliation
ofprofit before tax and non-underlying items to profit before tax is included in Note 6 to the financial statements.
The profit before tax and non-underlying items and underlying earnings per share are not recognised measures under IFRS and may not be
directly comparable with adjusted profit and earnings per share measures used by other companies.
Constant currency comparatives are obtained by applying the exchange rates that were applicable for the period ended 30 January 2021
tothe financial results in overseas subsidiaries for the 52 weeks ended 29 January 2022 to remove the impact of exchange rate fluctuations.
136 TB | AR—’22
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
2 SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING JUDGEMENTS AND ESTIMATES
The preparation of the consolidated Group and Company financial statements requires the Group to make estimates and assumptions that
affect the application of policies and reported amounts. Estimates and judgements are continually evaluated and are based on historical
experience and other factors, including expectations of future events that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances. Actual
resultsmay differ from these estimates. The significant judgements applied in the preparation of the consolidated financial statements, along
with estimates and assumptions that have a significant risk of causing a material adjustment to the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities
within thenext financial year, are discussed below.
Key sources of estimation uncertainty
In preparing these financial statements, the Directors have made judgements, estimates and assumptions that affect the application of the
Group’s policies and reported amounts of assets, liabilities, revenues and expenses. Estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed
onanongoing basis. The Directors consider the following to be the key sources of estimation uncertainty for the Group at the end of the
currentreporting period due to the risk of causing a material change to the carrying amount of assets and liabilities within the next year.
Impairment of property, plant and equipment, right-of-use assets and intangible assets
Property, plant and equipment, right-of-use assets and intangible assets are reviewed for impairment if events or changes in circumstances
indicate that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. Management performs an impairment review for each cash-generating unit
(‘CGU’) that has indicators of impairment.
The Directors consider an individual retail store (own stores which includes outlets) to be a CGU, and perform an impairment review if the
following impairment triggers are all met: (i) net book value of the CGU’s assets (comprising of fixtures and fittings, leasehold improvements,
ITequipment, and the right-of-use asset), is greater than £0.3m (2021: £0.3m), (ii) cash contribution for the CGU is less than 10%, and (iii) the
store is outside of a grace period, as stores may be loss making for an initial period of time after opening. For stores within the UK, the grace
period is two years, and for stores outside of the UK, the grace period is three years as the brand is less established in those markets. During the
current year, and consistent with the previous financial year, as a result of the uncertainties arising from Covid, management have decided to
perform impairment reviews on all stores and override the impairment exemptions for the grace period and cash contribution exemptions.
Corporate assets not allocated to stores are assessed for impairments at the smallest CGU level to which the assets are relevant. In the current
and comparative period the corporate assets relate to one Group-wide CGU.
When a review for impairment is conducted, the recoverable amount of an asset or CGU is determined based on value-in-use calculations
using the Board-approved budget and three-year plan at the period end date and are discounted using the weighted average cost of capital.
Forecasts beyond the three-year time period are based on expected GDP rates of growth, with shorter-term variations for industry trends and
business initiatives, but in the longer term falling back to expected GDP rates, whilst still reflecting the industry trends of declining store sales
offset by a rise in e-commerce sales. Management’s assumptions and estimates, based on the remaining lease length of each store, are used
in the value-in-use calculation for store CGUs. Future events could cause the forecasts and assumptions used in impairment reviews to change
with a consequential adverse impact on the results and net position of the Group as actual cash flows may differ from forecasts and could
result in further material impairments in future years. Given the impairments provided in the prior years, an increase of 5% in the discount rate
and decrease of cash flows by 10% would not increase impairment charge materially.
Carrying amount of inventories
The carrying value of inventory is recorded at the lower of cost and net realisable value. The Group manages inventory on an expected
two-year life cycle within its own retail channels. At the end of two years, remaining stock is managed out of the business through a variety
ofdistribution channels at the maximum possible sales price.
The final liquidation stage of this process involves offering stock to certain operators at much reduced prices. In the previous year the provision
was calculated based on reviewing the physical stock on hand by season at the period end and forward forecasting the expected terminal
stock value after two years, reflecting the expected sales levels in all channels.
At that point in time, the provision was calculated, based on the net realisable value of the estimated inventory on hand at that point. As there
becomes more certainty about the future, with the impact of disruption from future lockdowns diminishing, management believes that future
forecast sales are less relevant than provisioning by season based on recent trading patterns. As such the current model is no longer deemed
tobe appropriate and during the period ended 29 January 2022, management has changed the basis of determining the inventory
obsolescence. The new provisioning policy is based on reviewing the percentage of an original stock season that has entered the liquidation
stage and the cost recovered at that time. The percentage of each season’s total stock purchases that is still on hand at the end of the period is
determined and the amount of this stock that is expected to enter the liquidation stage is calculated. The liquidation cost recovery percentage
isthen applied to this to obtain the provisioning percentage by season and this is used to update the actual provision by season. The two key
sensitivities to the calculation of the provision are the percentage of the original stock season entering into the liquidation stage and the
percentage of cost that is recovered. A 10% increase/reduction in the amount of stock entering into the liquidation stage would result in an
additional charge or reduction in the charge of £0.9m or £0.3m respectively. A 10% reduction/increase in the liquidation cost recovery rate
would lead to an additional charge of £0.7m or a reduction in the charge of £0.5m respectively.
At 29 January 2022, the inventory provision was £8.1m (2021: £17.4m), representing 7.4% (2021: 17.0%) of the gross carrying value of
inventory. The impact of the change in the basis of the calculation of the estimate for inventory provisioning was a decrease of £10.0m.
Taxation
Deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent it is probable that future taxable profits (including the future release of deferred tax liabilities)
will be available, against which the deductible temporary differences can be utilised, based on management’s assumptions relating to the
amounts and timing of future taxable profits. Future profits are based on using the Board approved budget and Three-year plan, with forecasts
137TB | AR—’22
SR GR FS
beyond this period being based on expected GDP rates of growth and inflation estimates. These forecasts by nature carry a degree of
uncertainty and a material change to the expected outturn could have an adverse impact on the results of the Group or an entity within the
Group and result in a reduction in the deferred tax asset being recognised in future accounting periods due to a reduction in taxable profits.
Each jurisdiction has specific rules on how much of a deferred tax asset can be offset against yearly profits. Management have taken this into
account when calculating the balance and assessing its potential unwinding. Assumptions have also been made on the amount and timing
ofthe repatriation of profits between Group entities. Changes in either could result in a change to the deferred tax balance recognised
inindividual entities and the overall Group deferred tax balance.
Onerous contract provision
In the period to 29 January 2022, £1.2m was released and £0.6m was utilised in relation to onerous contracts in relation to cancelled
purchase orders due to the Covid pandemic. The unutilised balance remaining at 29 January 2022 was £0.2m (30 January 2021: £2.0m).
Dilapidations provisions
Leasehold dilapidations relate to the estimated cost of returning a leasehold property to its original state at the end of the lease in accordance
with the lease terms. Management uses judgement in determining if a provision is required against a leasehold and the cost to be provided
based on the floor area based on previous leasehold exits and external estimates of restoration costs.
Recoverability of trade receivables
Estimates are required in assessing the recoverability of overdue trade receivables and determining whether a provision against those
receivables is required. See Note 18 for further information.
Judgements made in applying accounting policies
Alternative performance measures (‘APM’) – Non-underlying items
Non-underlying items are separately reported within their relevant income statement line as the Directors believe that this helps provide a better
indication of the underlying performance of the Group. These measures are consistent with how business performance is measured internally
by the Board and Operating Committee. The profit before tax and non-underlying items measure is not a recognised profit measure under
IFRSand may not be directly comparable with adjusted profit measures used by other companies. The classification of adjusting items requires
significant management judgement after considering the nature and intentions of a transaction. Judgement is required in determining whether
an item should be classified as non-underlying or included within underlying results. This assessment covers the nature, the materiality and the
recurrence of the item on reported performance. Reversals of previous non-underlying items are assessed based on the same criteria. Further
detail is provided below in Note 6.
Leases
Management exercises judgement in determining the lease term of its lease contracts. Within its lease contracts, break options are included to
provide operational and financial security should store performance be different to expectations. In determining the lease term for contracts
that have options to extend or terminate early, management has applied judgement in determining the likelihood of whether such options will
be exercised. This is based on the length of time remaining before the option is exercisable, performance of the individual store and the trading
forecasts. After the commencement date, the Group reassesses the lease term if there is a significant event or change in circumstances that is
within its control and affects its ability to exercise (or not to exercise) the options to renew (e.g. a change in business strategy). Any reassessment
of the lease term will be reflected in a recalculation of the lease liability and respective right-of-use asset.
The application of IFRS 16 requires judgement around the calculation of the incremental borrowing rate. This is determined by grouping similar
leases together and applying an IBR rate for the group, based on right-of-use assets in a similar economic environment and taking into account
the risk-free rate, adjusted for factors such as credit rating and lease term.
Impairment of property plant and equipment and right-of-use assets
For impairment assessment, applying a grace period for stores is a judgement made by the Group. In the decision to impair or not, stores
withintheir grace period as set out earlier are not impaired, as the brand is less established in those markets and stores may be loss making
foran initial period of time after opening. In addition, a judgement is made that stores with a cash contribution greater than 10% do not require
impairments. These judgements have been informed by the Group’s past experience and developed over time. During the current year,
asaresult of the uncertainties arising from Covid, management has decided to perform impairment reviews on all stores and override
theimpairment exemptions for the grace period and cash contribution exemptions.
Impairment of investments in subsidiary undertakings, joint ventures and associated debtor balances
Management reviews the carrying value of the investment in subsidiary undertakings and joint ventures for impairment in accordance with
IAS36. Judgement is used in assessing whether there has been a trigger event showing a potential decline in the value of the investment.
Thesemay include evidence of financial difficulty or significance in underperformance against expectations, or potential restrictions in its local
market. If such a trigger is identified, a review for impairment is conducted, with the recoverable amount of the asset being determined based
on value-in-use calculations using approved forecasts/budget at the period end date and discounted using the weighted average cost of
capital. The future forecasts are inherently judgmental, and the key sensitivity includes achieving the growth rates for a particular region or
branch and relevant to the specific market. A change in these assumptions will impact the future forecasts and management’s assessment of the
profitability of each entity/CGU. Intercompany receivables and amounts due from joint ventures are also reviewed for investments. The surplus
of the net asset investment over the value-in-use calculation is compared to the outstanding receivable and a provision is made for any shortfall.
During the current year, as a result of the uncertainties arising from Covid, management has decided to perform impairment reviews on all
Group investments in subsidiaries and a recoverability assessment on associated debtor balances.
Further significant loan loss and impairment charges may be recorded in the future dependent on actual performance compared to the
Group’s Plan.
138 TB | AR—’22
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
3 CHANGES IN ACCOUNTING ESTIMATES, ERRORS OR MISSTATEMENTS
Changes in accounting estimates and policies
Carrying amount of inventories
The carrying value of inventory is recorded at the lower of cost and net realisable value. The Group manages inventory on an expected
two-year life cycle within its own retail channels. At the end of two years, remaining stock is managed out of the business through a variety of
channels and partners in order to recover as much of the original cost as possible. The final part of this process involves offering stock to certain
operators at much reduced prices – the final ‘liquidation’ of the stock holding. In the previous year the provision was calculated based on
reviewing the physical stock on hand by season at the period end and forward forecasting the expected terminal stock value after two years,
reflecting the expected sales levels in all channels. At that point in time, the provision was calculated, based on the net realisable value of the
estimated inventory on hand at that point. As there becomes more certainty about the future, with the impact of disruption from future lockdowns
diminishing, management believes that future forecast sales are less relevant than provisioning by season based on recent trading patterns.
Assuch the current model is no longer deemed to be appropriate and during the period ended 29 January 2022, management has changed
the basis of determining the inventory obsolescence. The new provisioning policy is based on reviewing the percentage of an original stock
season that has entered the liquidation stage and the cost recovered at that time. The percentage of each season’s total stock purchases that
isstill on hand at the end of the period is determined and the amount of this stock that is expected to enter the liquidation stage is calculated.
The liquidation cost recovery percentage is then applied to this to obtain the provisioning percentage by season and this is used to update the
actual provision by season. The two key sensitivities to the calculation of the provision are the percentage of the original stock season entering
into the liquidation stage and the percentage of cost that is recovered. A 10% increase/reduction in the amount of stock entering into the
liquidation stage would result in an additional charge or reduction in the charge of £0.9m or £0.3m respectively. A 10% reduction/increase
inthe liquidation cost recovery rate would lead to an additional charge of £0.7m or a reduction in the charge of £0.5m respectively.
At 29 January 2022, the inventory provision was £8.1m (2021: £17.4), representing 7.4% (2021: 17.0%) of the gross carrying value of inventory.
The impact of the change in the basis of the calculation of the estimate for inventory provisioning was a £10.0m reduction.
Change in presentation of carriage costs
In the year ended 29 January 2022, management concluded that only costs of delivering stock to the warehouse and carriage costs out of the
warehouse associated with online sales and retail should be considered in cost of sales. All other carriage costs out of the warehouse should
be treated as distribution costs. The prior year numbers have been restated with an increase in distribution costs of £1.6m and a decrease in
cost of sales of the same amount. There is no impact on operating loss, but gross profit has increased due to the £1.6m reclassification to
distribution costs.
Capitalisation of configuration and customisation costs in SaaS arrangements
The customisation and configuration activities undertaken in implementing SaaS software may include the development of code that enhances
and modifies or creates additional capability to the existing software installed on the Company’s servers. Where this is the case the costs of
customisation and configuration are capitalised. Where the customisation and configuration activities are performed on the internal
infrastructure of the cloud service provider, the activities are not enhancing or modifying an asset the company controls and therefore the costs
are expensed in the income statement.
In the year ending 29 January 2022, £6.5m of costs of relating to the implementation of the Group’s new website has been expensed through
the income statement within non-underlying expenses and £1.0m of costs relating to the implementation of other SaaS software have been
expensed within underlying expenses. £1.3m of new website costs which had previously been capitalised in the prior year has been expensed
in the current year within non-underlying expenses.
Total amount capitalised in the year in relation to implementation of SaaS software was £2.5m, which includes £2.0m relating to the new website.
139TB | AR—’22
SR GR FS
Errors or misstatements
Prior year adjustment – balance sheet and cash flow statement reclassification relating to lease liabilities
In the comparative period, there was a material impact to timing and amount of rental payments during the Covid crisis, as payments
tolandlords were delayed. The lease liability balance disclosed in our Condensed Group Balance Sheet was understated with the
corresponding delayed payments due to landlords being disclosed within Trade and other payables. The Balance Sheet as at 30 January
2021 has been restated to reclassify these balances, reducing Trade and other payables and increasing Current Lease Liabilities (2021: £11.3m).
This is a reclassification within the Balance Sheet with no change to Net Assets. This had a corresponding impact on the Condensed Group
Cash Flow Statement with lease payments being overstated (capital of £9.2m and Interest of £2.1m), whilst decrease in Trade and other
payables was understated. This decreased net cash generated from operating activities by £11.3m and increased net cash from financing
activities by £11.3m. There is no impact on the net decrease in cash and cash equivalents. There is no restatement impact on the Income
Statement or Retained Earnings.
Prior year adjustment – delivery income
In year ended 2021, delivery income generated through online sales was included within cost of sales rather than shown within revenue.
Therefore, the prior year numbers have been restated with an increase in revenue of £3.3m and an increase in cost of sales of the same
amount. There is no impact on gross profit or operating loss.
4 GOING CONCERN
The consolidated financial statements have been prepared on a going concern basis. The Directors have prepared a going concern
assessment covering the 12-month period from the date of signing these financial statements, which demonstrates that the Group can operate
within its existing facilities and can meet its financial covenant tests during this period.
The Directors’ assessment considers the principal risks facing the business and an evaluation of financial forecasts prepared by management.
Two primary financial forecasts have been evaluated, as detailed further below.
The Group’s going concern assessment has been based on the 12-month financial forecast through to end May 2023, derived from these
longer-term forecasts.
The Group holds an £80 million Revolving Credit Facility (‘RCF’) maturing in November 2023. At year end, the facility had been drawn down
£8.0 million and the Group had a net cash position of £3.1 million. On 22 April 2022, the Group agreed with its lenders to adjust the
covenant tests over the remaining life of the facility to provide more headroom for the Group given the prolonged disruption of Covid-19 and
the impact of the Omicron variant on the Group’s trading in the final weeks of the last financial year. The RCF facility size remains the same,
with financial covenants reset to levels that reflect the levels of disruption modelled within the Downside Case.
In forming their assessment on going concern the Directors have considered the Group’s ability to meet its covenant tests and operate within
the liquidity headroom provided by the RCF under the Downside Case forecast. The Directors anticipate starting discussions to renew the RCF,
which expires in November 2023, during Summer 2022, and believe that, based on the forecasts, the underlying strength and appeal of the
Ted Baker brand alongside the positive and supportive relationship that the Group has had with its lender banks, the Group will be able to
agree an extension to the RCF at an appropriate level and terms prior to its maturity.
Base Case
The Base Case forecast is centred on an assumption of progressive recovery from the impact of Covid on our own and third-party
physicalretail channels, and on strong growth in our own e-commerce sales in the second half of the year following the launch of our new
digital platform in the first quarter and reflecting the subdued performance of our e-commerce sales in equivalent periods of the prior year.
Areduction in the Group’s fixed cost base is incorporated based on efficiencies delivered through the transformation plan. The Base Case
assumes that no further lockdowns, social or travel restrictions are implemented over the going concern period.
Significant assumptions within the Base Case are:
ɣ Store sales recover to 80-85% of pre-pandemic levels, with the removal of social and travel restrictions and a return to city centre shopping
locations. A full year of physical store operations is assumed, with no enforced closures. Store sales are forecast at an individual store level
reflecting the country, type of location and performance trends when restrictions were eased in the prior year
ɣ eCommerce sales are forecast with strong growth in the second half of the year driven by, i) an increase in sales through third-party
concession channels where we have increased the product range and availability on key partner platforms and, ii) increased sales on
tedbaker.com, following the launch of our new platform and reflecting the weaker comparable period
ɣ Wholesale sales are forecast to increase at low double-digit levels but remain at less than 80% of pre-pandemic levels. Although our
wholesale partners are subject to the same footfall recovery assumptions as for our own retail stores and concessions, we have applied
amore conservative recovery assumption due to the globally diverse nature of our wholesale partners
ɣ Product licence income is projected to recover in line with the growth of physical retail channels, as retail footfall returns and travel
restrictions are eased
ɣ Operating costs include variable costs (such as distribution costs and digital marketing) that are based on contracted or expected market
rates and the sales forecast by channel. Fixed costs (such as payroll and rent) are modelled with an inflationary increase and include the
benefits delivered from the Group’s transformation programme, such as a reduction of approximately £30 million in the Group’s payroll
cost, relative to the pre-pandemic year. Store lease costs include agreed rent reductions plus reductions assessed as having a high
probability of being delivered in the financial year.
The Base Case scenario provides material liquidity and covenant headroom throughout the going concern period of assessment.
140 TB | AR—’22
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Downside Case – “Severe but Plausible”
The Downside Case forecast is predicated on a very challenging trading environment, with significant reductions to the sales growth rate
assumptions used in the Base Case to reflect a more prolonged recovery post-pandemic, lower growth in eCommerce sales and a more
subdued consumer retail spending environment given the potential impact of the increased cost of living as well as uncertainty arising from
theinvasion of Ukraine. An increased level of cost inflation has been assumed relative to the Base Case.
The Downside Case scenario reflects the following assumptions compared to the Base Case:
ɣ Lower store sales growth rates to reflect a slower than anticipated post-pandemic recovery. This includes a slower return to city centre
shopping locations and international travel, combined with a more subdued consumer retail spending environment. Store sales in the
downside case only recover to approximately 65-70% of pre-pandemic levels
ɣ Significantly lower growth in eCommerce sales, reflecting an extended period of disruption following the launch of the Group’s new digital
sales platform as well as the macro-economic factors noted above – in the Downside Case the Group’s tedbaker.com eCommerce sales
are 2.5% higher than FY22 and 11% higher than FY20, the pre-pandemic year
ɣ Wholesale sales and licence income growth rates reduced to reflect the same macro-economic factors as our own retail sales channels
ɣ Gross margin rate reduced by approximately 50 basis points to reflect impact of further supply chain disruption and inflationary pressure on
input prices
ɣ Fixed cost inflation increased by 200 basis points, to reflect greater than forecast inflationary pressures
ɣ Variable costs reduce in line with reduced sales to partly offset the impact of the reduced sales growth.
The Group has adequate liquidity and covenant headroom throughout the going concern period under the Downside Case scenario.
Atthelowest point the covenant test at the end of Q1 FY24 the Group has EBITDA headroom of £5.3m.
Reverse Stress Test
In addition to the scenarios described above, the Directors have performed a Reverse Stress Test, applying further reductions to e-Commerce
sales and a higher rate of cost inflation – with an additional increase to certain areas of the Group’s cost base relative to the Downside Case
to quantify the level of sales decline and cost increases that can be absorbed until financial covenants are breached.
The Reverse Stress Test scenario only considers cost savings from directly attributable variable costs associated with the reduction in sales.
Noother cost savings are assumed to be delivered. The Directors note however that the Group was able to make significant cost savings with
short lead times in response to the initial lockdowns at the start of the global pandemic.
Under the Reverse Stress Test scenario, Group revenues for the going concern period are £459m, 3% above the comparable 12 month period
ended May 2022, a period that was impacted by significant Covid-19 disruption with extended store lockdowns, travel restrictions, work from
home guidance and the Omicron variant.
The Reverse Stress Test scenario results in the Group’s level of EBITDA breaching the covenant test in Q1 FY24. Liquidity under the facility is
adequate, even under the Reverse Stress Test.
The Directors consider that the likelihood of the scenario envisaged under the Reverse Stress Test arising is remote and, that in the event
itdidarise, the Group has demonstrated its ability to deliver cost savings when facing such extreme situations as envisaged under the
ReverseStress Test.
Mitigating actions
If performance deviates materially from the Base Case and is trending towards or worse than the Downside Case there are several actions that
the Group could undertake to mitigate the liquidity and profit impact. These include:
ɣ Cost saving initiatives with a focus on areas of discretionary spend such as marketing, travel, and certain professional fees. These cost savings
are not included within the existing forecasts
ɣ Reduction in stock intake of new season stock to reflect the lower sales projections
ɣ Reduction in project and capital expenditure – noting that the Group has recently launched its new digital platform so such a reduction in
capital expenditures for a period of time would not adversely impact our enhanced digital sales and omnichannel customer proposition.
Having considered the forecasts noted above, the mitigating actions available to management, recent trading performance and having regard
to the macro-economic risks and uncertainties to which the Group is exposed, the Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Group and
the Company have adequate resources to continue operating for the foreseeable future, and to operate within its borrowing facilities and
covenants for a period of at least 12 months from the date of these financial statements. The Directors have also considered if the events and
conditions noted above represent a material uncertainty over the Group’s ability to operate over this period and have concluded that they do
not. Accordingly, the financial statements have been prepared on the going concern basis.
141TB | AR—’22
SR GR FS
5 SEGMENT INFORMATION
The Group has three reportable segments: retail, wholesale and licensing. For each of the three segments, the Executive Committee
(considered to be the Chief Operating Decision Maker) reviews internal management reports on a four-weekly basis.
The accounting policies of the reportable segments are the same as those used in the preparation of the Group financial statements.
Information regarding the results of each reportable segment is included below. Performance for the retail segment is measured based on
operating contribution, whereas performance of the wholesale segment is measured based on gross profit and performance of the licensing
segment is measured based on royalty income, as included in the internal management reports that are reviewed by the Board.
Segment results before non-underlying items are used to measure performance as management believes that such information is the most
relevant in evaluating the performance of certain segments relative to other entities that operate within these industries. Inter-segment pricing
isdetermined on an arm’s length basis.
a) Segment revenue and segment result
52 weeks ended 29 January 2022
Retail
£’000
Wholesale
£’000
Licensing
£’000
Total
£’000
Revenue 301,916 111,16 9 15,155 428,240
Cost of sales before non-underlying items (121,134) (70,749) – (191,883)
Gross profit before non-underlying items 180,782 40,420 15,155 236,357
Operating costs (169,722) – – (169,722)
Operating contribution before non-underlying items 11,060 40,420 15,155 66,635
Reconciliation of segment result to loss before tax
Segment result before non-underlying items 11,060 40,420 15,155 66,635
Other operating costs – – – (10 0,167)
Other operating income – – – 2,831
Operating loss before non-underlying items (30,701)
Finance income – – – 259
Finance expense – – – (6,699)
Share of losses from joint ventures – – – (1,270)
Loss before tax and non-underlying items (3 8, 411)
Non-underlying items before tax – – – (5,639)
Loss before tax (44,050)
Depreciation and amortisation (9,038) (281) – (9,319)
Unallocated depreciation and amortisation – – – (10,798)
Depreciation of right of use assets – – – (16,621)
Total depreciation and amortisation (36,738)
142 TB | AR—’22
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
5 Segment Information continued
53 weeks ended 30 January 2021 (Restated
1
)
Retail
£’000
Wholesale
£’000
Licensing
£’000
Total
£’000
Revenue 2 5 7, 5 4 4 85,278 12,4 49 355,271
Cost of sales before non-underlying (111, 3 9 0 ) (51,528) – (162,918)
Gross profit before non-underlying items 146,154 33,750 12,449 192,353
Operating costs (165,458) – – (165,458)
Operating (loss)/contribution before non-underlying items (19,304) 33,750 12,449 26,895
Reconciliation of segment result to loss before tax
Segment result before non-underlying items (19,304) 33,750 12,449 26,895
Other operating costs – – – (83,062)
Other operating income – – – 6,488
Operating loss before non-underlying items (49,679)
Finance income – – – 399
Finance expense – – – (8, 74 5)
Share of losses from joint ventures – – – (1,136)
Loss before tax and non-underlying items (59,161)
Non-underlying items before tax – – – (48,568)
Loss before tax (107,729)
Depreciation and amortisation (7, 4 93) (206) – ( 7, 69 9)
Unallocated depreciation and amortisation – – – (20,393)
Depreciation of right of use assets – – – (26,763)
Total depreciation and amortisation (54,855)
1 More details of the restatement are found in Note 3.
b) Geographical information
52 weeks ended 29 January 2022
UK
£’000
US
£’000
Rest of the World
2
£’000
Total
£’000
Revenue 262,228 116,611 49,401 428,240
Non-current assets
1
99,031 11,854 11, 368 122,253
53 weeks ended 30 January 2021
Revenue 217, 7 2 6 95,084 42,461 355,271
Non-current assets
1
136,6 41 16,214 3,604 156,459
1 Non-current assets exclude deferred tax assets and investment in joint ventures.
2 Rest of the World includes Europe, Canada, and South Africa.
143TB | AR—’22
SR GR FS
5 Segment Information continued
c) Revenue by collection
1
52 weeks ended
29 January 2022
£’000
53 weeks ended
30 January 2021
£’000
Menswear
1
138,677 119, 7 9 0
Womenswear
1
270,892 219, 74 4
409,569 339,534
1 Revenue by collection includes retail and wholesale revenue and excludes licence income and delivery income.
d) Retail revenue
52 weeks ended
29 January 2022
£’000
53 weeks ended
30 January 2021
£’000
Stores 168,130 109,342
E-commerce 133, 786 148,202
301,916 257, 54 4
6 LOSS BEFORE TAX
Loss before tax is stated after charging/(crediting):
52 weeks ended
29 January 2022
£’000
53 weeks ended
30 January 2021
£’000
Depreciation and amortisation
1
36,738 53,109
Non-underlying items (further detail below) 5,639 48,568
Leasehold properties:
Variable rental payments
2
4,134 1,728
Concessions:
Minimum contract payments
2
617 3,621
Variable rental and commission payments
2
23,351 39,325
(Profit)/loss on sale of property, plant and equipment and intangibles (979) 933
Practical expedient on IFRS 16 361 (361)
Government schemes
3
(3,599) (10,545)
Close out of foreign exchange hedge contracts – (6,916)
Gain on lease modifications (891) (2,992)
Auditors’ remuneration:
Audit of these financial statements 250 150
Amounts receivable by the Company’s auditors and their associates in respect of:
Audit of financial statements of subsidiaries of the Company 1,115 754
Interim financial statements review 215 130
Other statutory auditors 110 73
Other assurance services 30 –
1 The Group has applied IFRS 16. Depreciation of right-of-use asset of £16.6m (2021: £26.8m) has been included within £36.7m above (2021: £53.1m).
2 Disclosed above are the variable rentals charged relating to leasehold properties and rentals charged in relation to concession arrangements. These are either fixed in nature
orvariable based on revenue levels for a particular store or concession, where relevant, including e-commerce sales with concession partners not meeting the definition of
alease under IFRS 16.
3 Support received from governments around the world to support businesses throughout the Covid epidemic. Payments from the UK government for furloughed employees
amounted to £1.4m (2021: £8.5m).
144 TB | AR—’22
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
6 Loss Before Tax continued
Reconciliation of profit before tax to profit before tax and non-underlying items:
Notes
52 weeks ended
29 January 2022
£’000
53 weeks ended
30 January 2021
£’000
Loss before tax (44,050) (107,729)
Non-underlying items
Included in cost of sales:
Inventory changes in estimates 1 – (6,065)
Onerous contract provision 2 1,171 (1,973)
Other 49 81
Included in gross profit 1,220 (7,957)
Included in distribution costs:
Impairment of intangibles, property, plant and equipment and right-of-use assets 3 (2,988) (45,303)
Included in administrative costs:
Acquisition costs and unwind of fair value accounting adjustments 4 – (1,987)
Reorganisation, restructuring costs and other legal and professional costs 5 (2,231) (11,415)
Digital platform – ‘SaaS’ cost 6 ( 7, 8 31) –
Included in other operating loss:
Gain on sale and lease back of head office 7 – 17, 4 4 6
Head office exit receivable 8 7, 9 6 6 –
Included in operating loss (3,864) (49,216)
Included in share of post-tax profits from joint venture:
Unwind of fair value adjustments – (7)
Included in finance income/(expense):
Foreign exchange on the translation of monetary assets and liabilities denominated in
foreigncurrencies 9 (1,775) 655
Non-underlying items (5,639) (48,568)
(Loss)/profit before tax and non-underlying items (3 8, 411) (59,161)
Notes
1 Logistics and freight costs previously capitalised in stock were expensed in FY21 following a change in estimate.
2 Details of the onerous contract provision can be found in Note 2.
3 The Group impaired a number of assets resulting in a charge of £3.0m (2021: £45.3m), including key money, leasehold improvements and right-of-use assets. This is net of
arelease in prior year impairments caused by lease modifications, amounting to £0.8m.
4 Charges in the prior period relate to amortisation of reacquired rights, fair value and accounting adjustments in relation to the acquisition of the footwear business in financial
year 2019.
5 A number of costs were incurred during the year, relating to the restructuring and reorganisation of the business. These include:
a. £0.4m (2021: £3.7m) for redundancy costs.
b. £1.7m (2021: £5.3m) for restructuring costs
c. £0.1m (2021: £2.5m) for other legal and professional fees
6 £7.8m of costs relating to cloud-based website have been expensed in the current year. See Note 3 for accounting policy applied on capitalisation of configuration and
customisation costs in SaaS arrangements.
7 Relates to the sale and lease back of the corporate head office building.
8 The Group is due £8.0m from the landlord when it exits its current head office building. This amount crystallised in the half year when the Group did not exercise its option on an
alternative building owned by the landlord. Receipt of funds is expected in FY23.
9 Foreign exchange loss on re-translation of intercompany balances denominated in foreign currencies.
145TB | AR—’22
SR GR FS
7 OTHER OPERATING INCOME AND EXPENSES
52 weeks ended
29 January 2022
£’000
53 weeks ended
30 January 2021
£’000
Close out of foreign exchange hedge contracts – 6,916
Gain on sale and lease back of head office – 17, 4 4 6
Other 1,852 505
Head office exit receivable 7,9 6 6 –
9,818 24,867
Gain/(loss) on disposal of fixed assets 979 (933)
10,797 23,934
The Group is due £8.0m from the landlord when it exits its current head office building. This amount crystallised in the half year when the
Group did not exercise its option on an alternative building owned by the landlord. Receipt of funds is expected in FY23.
The close out of foreign exchange hedge contracts is the gain from the early termination of forward contracts during the year that were
takenout to hedge the purchase of inventory. These inventory orders were cancelled and as a result the contracts were no longer required.
TheCompany took advantage of the favourable sterling dollar exchange rate at the time to close the contracts and record a gain.
A net gain of £17.4m on the sale and lease back transaction of the Group’s head office (‘UBB’) has been recorded in 2021 as the Group
soldUBB and immediately reacquired the use of the asset by entering into a lease with the landlord. The head office freehold asset has been
derecognised on completion of the sale and a lease liability and right-of-use asset recognised in relation to the lease back.
8 FINANCE INCOME AND EXPENSES
52 weeks ended
29 January 2022
£’000
53 weeks ended
30 January 2021
£’000
Finance income
– Interest receivable 259 94
– Foreign exchange gains – 960
259 1,054
Finance expenses
– Interest payable (311) (1,964)
– Interest on lease liabilities
1
(5,487) (6, 781)
– Foreign exchange losses (2,676) –
(8,474) (8,745)
1 Interest on lease liabilities includes £0.5m reduction of interest for the year due to modifications made to IFRS 16 leases.
146 TB | AR—’22
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
9 STAFF NUMBERS AND COSTS
The average number of employees (including Executive Directors) was:
52 weeks ended
29 January 2022
Number
53 weeks ended
30 January 2021
Number
Sales 1,632 1,910
Design 53 63
Administration 560 624
2,245 2,597
£’000 £’000
Their aggregate remuneration comprised:
Wages and salaries 58,326 5 7,14 7
Share-based payment charge 1,290 1,204
Social security costs 6,509 6,515
Pension costs 1,348 1,412
67, 4 73 66,278
The remuneration figures above are shown net of £3.0m (2021: £10.5m) received under government Covid support schemes.
Directors’ remuneration
52 weeks ended
29 January 2022
£’000
53 weeks ended
30 January 2021
£’000
Executive Directors’ remuneration 1,231 857
Non-Executive Directors’ remuneration 548 432
Company contributions to Executive Directors’ money purchase pension plans 23 22
The aggregate of remuneration and amounts receivable under long-term incentive schemes of the highest paid Director was £0.8m (2021: £0.6m).
No amounts were paid in relation to pension contributions to a money purchase scheme during the period ended 29 January 2022 or the
period ended 30 January 2021. Payments in lieu of pension were made to Rachel Osborne and David Wolffe during the period totalling
£13,125 (2021: £13,639) and £9,875 (2021: £7,865).
147TB | AR—’22
SR GR FS
10 INCOME TAX EXPENSE
a) The tax charge comprises:
52 weeks ended
29 January 2022
£’000
53 weeks ended
30 January 2021
£’000
Current tax
United Kingdom corporation tax (87) (180)
Overseas tax (51) (1,275)
Deferred tax
United Kingdom corporation tax (11,14 6 ) ( 7,12 9 )
Overseas tax 2,229 (10,737)
Prior period under/(over) provision
Current tax (714) ( 6 ,113)
Deferred tax 1,303 4,150
(8,466) (21,284)
b) Current year deferred tax movement by type
52 weeks ended
29 January 2022
£’000
53 weeks ended
30 January 2021
£’000
Property, plant and equipment 3,653 5,306
Share-based payments 374 (3)
Losses 6,986 7,929
Inventory (1,092) 147
Other (1,004) 4,487
8,917 17,8 6 6
c) Factors affecting the tax charge for the period
The tax assessed for the period is higher than the tax calculated at the UK prevailing corporation tax rate of 19%. The differences are
explained below.
52 weeks ended
29 January 2022
£’000
53 weeks ended
30 January 2021
£’000
Loss before tax (44,050) (10 7, 7 2 9 )
Loss multiplied by the standard rate in the UK – 19%, (2021: standard rate in the UK of 19%) (8,370) (20,469)
Income not taxable/expenses not deductible for tax purposes 1,295 (3,847)
Overseas losses not recognised 1,464 5,313
Withholding tax expensed 321 505
Chargeable gain on disposal – 3,299
Movement in current and deferred tax on share awards and options (124) 180
Prior period over provision 589 (1,775)
Recognition of losses previously not recognised 10 (20)
Effect of rate change on deferred tax (2,127) 166
Difference due to overseas tax rates (1,524) (4,636)
Total income tax credit (8,466) (21,284)
The tax credit for the current year includes a credit of £0.3m (2021: £2.1m) in respect of non-underlying items. This arises from deductible items,
primarily in the UK, on IFRS 16 impairments, digital platform – SaaS costs and net head office exit receivables.
148 TB | AR—’22
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
10 Income Tax Expense continued
d) Deferred and current tax recognised directly in equity
52 weeks ended
29 January 2022
£’000
53 weeks ended
30 January 2021
£’000
Deferred tax (credit)/charge on share awards and options 5 (20)
Deferred tax (credit)/charge associated with movement in hedging reserve 56 (6)
Deferred tax (credit)/charge associated with foreign exchange movements in reserves 345 (587)
406 (613)
The March 2020 Budget announced that a rate of 19% would continue to apply with effect from 1 April 2020 and this was substantively
enacted on 17 March 2020.
The March 2021 Budget announced a further increase to the main rate of corporation tax to 25% from April 2023. This rate was substantively
enacted at the balance sheet date.
As the deferred tax assets and liabilities should be recognised based on the corporation tax rate at which they are anticipated to unwind,
theassets and liabilities on UK operations have been largely recognised at a rate of 25% (2021: 19%). Assets and liabilities arising on foreign
operations have been recognised at the applicable overseas tax rates.
11 PROFIT ATTRIBUTABLE TO TED BAKER PLC
The (loss)/profit after tax for the 52 weeks ended 29 January 2022 of Ted Baker plc, the parent Company, was £(0.4)m (2021: £0.2m).
Thisincluded non-underlying costs of £nil (2021: £nil). The Directors have approved the income statement for the parent Company.
12 EARNINGS PER SHARE
52 weeks ended
29 January 2022
Number
53 weeks ended
30 January 2021
Number
Number of shares:
Weighted number of ordinary shares outstanding 184,610,683 153,941,467
£’000 £’000
Earnings:
Loss for the period basic and diluted (35,584) (86,445)
Underlying (loss)/profit
1
(30,251) (40,012)
Basic loss per share (19.3p) (56.2p)
Underlying (loss)/earnings per share¹ (16. 4p) (26.0p)
Diluted loss per share (19.3p) (56.2p)
Underlying diluted (loss)/earnings per share
1
(16. 4p) (26.0p)
Due to the loss-making position at the year end, all potential ordinary shares (see Note 25) are considered to be antidilutive.
1 Underlying profit for the period and underlying earnings per share is shown before non-underlying items. Non-underlying items net of tax were £5.6m (2021: £46.4m).
149TB | AR—’22
SR GR FS
13 INTANGIBLE ASSETS
Reacquired right
£’000
Key money
£’000
Computer
software
£’000
Computer software
under development
£’000
Total
£’000
Cost
At 30 January 2021 3,781 617 60,510 1,568 66,476
Additions – – – 3,991 3,991
Write offs – – – (1,327) (1,327)
Disposal – – (77) – (77)
Transfers – – 1,565 (1,565) –
Exchange rate movement – – 28 – 28
At 29 January 2022 3,781 617 62,026 2,667 69,091
Amortisation
At 30 January 2021 3,781 617 27, 32 0 – 31,718
Charge for the period – – 8,970 – 8,970
Disposal – – (47) – (47)
Exchange rate movement – – 29 – 29
At 29 January 2022 3,781 617 36,272 – 40,670
Net book value
At 29 January 2022 – – 25,754 2,667 28,421
At 30 January 2021 – – 33,190 1,568 34,758
Reacquired right
£’000
Key money
£’000
Computer
software
£’000
Computer software
under development
£’000
Total
£’000
Cost
At 25 January 2020 3,781 617 55,607 2,879 62,884
Additions – – – 3,692 3,692
Transfers – – 5,057 (5,057) –
Exchange rate movement – – (154) 54 (10 0)
At 30 January 2021 3,781 617 60,510 1,568 66,476
Amortisation
At 25 January 2020 2,035 – 13,885 – 15,920
Charge for the period 1, 74 6 – 13,509 – 15,255
Impairments – 653 – – 653
Exchange rate movement – (36) (74) – (110 )
At 30 January 2021 3,781 617 27, 32 0 – 31,718
Net book value
At 30 January 2021 – – 33,190 1,568 34,758
At 25 January 2020 1,746 617 41,722 2,879 46,964
Amounts included within computer software relate to the Group’s information technology and ERP systems and further development of our
eCommerce platforms and other business systems. The computer software under development category is stated net of transfers to computer
software. Transfers from the computer software under development category in the period amounted to £1.6m (2021: £5.1m) while additions
into this category were £1.2m (2021: £3.7m).
150 TB | AR—’22
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
14 PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
Freehold land
and buildings
£’000
Leasehold
improvements
£’000
Fixtures, fittings
and office
equipment
£’000
Motor
vehicles
£’000
Assets under
construction
£’000
Total
£’000
Cost
At 30 January 2021 – 115 , 751 96,684 109 849 213,393
Additions – 5 775 – 2, 761 3,541
Transfers – 37 1,269 – (1,306) –
Write offs – (5) (44) – – (49)
Disposals – (2,785) (3,880) – – (6,665)
Exchange rate movement – 641 (730) – – (89)
At 29 January 2022 – 113, 6 4 4 94,074 109 2,304 210,131
Depreciation
At 30 January 2021 – 88,510 85,373 109 – 173,992
Charge for the period – 5,409 5,738 – – 11,14 7
Write offs – – (315) – – (315)
Disposals – (2,785) (3,258) – – (6,043)
Impairment – 381 780 – – 1,161
Exchange rate movement – 259 (270) – – (11)
At 29 January 2022 – 91,774 88,048 109 – 179,931
Net book value
At 29 January 2022 – 21,870 6,026 – 2,304 30,200
At 30 January 2021 – 27, 241 11, 311 – 849 39,401
Freehold land
and buildings
£’000
Leasehold
improvements
£’000
Fixtures, fittings
and office
equipment
£’000
Motor
vehicles
£’000
Assets under
construction
£’000
Total
£’000
Cost
At 25 January 2020 5 7,9 7 3 126,687 104,871 111 1,524 291,166
Additions – – – – 3,289 3,289
Transfers – 212 3, 7 74 – (3,986) –
Write offs – (3,240) (3,988) – – ( 7, 2 2 8 )
Disposals ( 5 7,9 7 3 ) (6,369) ( 7,9 76 ) (2) – (72,320)
Exchange rate movement – (1,539) 3 – 22 (1,514)
At 30 January 2021 – 115,751 96,684 109 849 213,393
Depreciation
At 25 January 2020 1,827 84, 4 41 82,060 108 – 168,436
Charge for the period 192 7, 5 5 4 5 ,111 – – 12,857
Write offs – (3,037) (3,866) – – (6,903)
Disposals (2,019) (6,281) (2,703) 1 – (11, 0 0 2 )
Impairment – 7,14 2 5,001 – – 12,143
Exchange rate movement – (1,309) (230) – – (1,539)
At 30 January 2021 – 88,510 85,373 109 – 173,992
Net book value
At 30 January 2021 – 27, 241 11, 311 – 849 39,401
At 25 January 2020 56,146 42,246 22 ,811 3 1,524 122,730
Details on the impairment of property, plant and equipment are shown in Note 2.
151TB | AR—’22
SR GR FS
15 INVESTMENTS (COMPANY)
a) Subsidiary undertakings
As at 29 January 2022 and 30 January 2021, the Company and Group had shares in the following subsidiary undertakings:
Subsidiary undertaking
Country of incorporation
and operation Address Principal activity
Holding
ordinary shares
No Ordinary Designer
LabelLtd*
UK The Ugly Brown Building
6a St Pancras Way
London
NW1 0TB
United Kingdom
Design, wholesale and
retail of designer clothing
and accessories
100%
Ted Baker Limited US 54 West 21st Street, 11th floor,
NewYork, NY 10010, USA
Retail and wholesale of
designer clothing
and accessories
100%
Ted Baker Canada Inc. Canada 1959 Upper Water Street
Halifax, Nova Scotia
Canada
B3J 3E5
Retail and wholesale of
designer clothing
and accessories
100%
Ted Baker (France) SARL France c/o Regus
9 Rue du 4 Septembre
75002 Paris, France
Retail of designer clothing
and accessories
100%
Ted Baker Spain S.L. Spain Calle de Claudio Coello, 44,
28001Madrid, Spain
Retail of designer clothing
and accessories
100%
Ted Baker Netherlands B.V. The Netherlands Leidsestraat 64 Amsterdam
1017PD
The Netherlands
Retail of designer clothing
and accessories
100%
Ted Baker Germany GmbH Germany Poststrasse 14-16; 20354 Hamburg Retail of designer clothing
and accessories
100%
Ted Baker Belgium N.V. Belgium Huidevettersstraat 42a
2000
Antwerpen
Belgium
Retail of designer clothing
and accessories
100%
Ted Baker Italy S.r.l. Italy Milano (MI) Via Michelengelo
Buonarroti 39 Cap. 20145
Retail of designer clothing
and accessories
100%
Ted Baker SA (Pty) Ltd South Africa Building 5 Inanda Greens Business Park,
54 Wierda Rd
Westwierda Valley
Sandton
214 6
South Africa
Retail of designer clothing
and accessories
100%
Ted Baker Japan KK Japan C/O Mazars Japan K.K., ATT New
Tower 11F, 2-11-7, Akasaka, Minato-ku,
Tokyo
Retail of designer clothing 100%
Little Lobster Limited UK The Ugly Brown Building
6a St Pancras Way
London
NW1 0TB
United Kingdom
Dormant 100%
No Ordinary Shoes Limited UK The Ugly Brown Building
6a St Pancras Way
London
NW1 0TB
United Kingdom
Design, wholesale and
retail of designer
footwear
100%
No Ordinary Shoes USA LLC US 54 West 21st Street, 11th floor,
NewYork, NY 10010, USA
Wholesale of designer
footwear
100%
Ted Baker Korea Yuhan
Hoesa
Korea Seoul Finance Center
Level 21
136 Sejong-daero
Jung-gu
Seoul, Korea
Dormant 100%
*Held directly by Ted Baker plc
152 TB | AR—’22
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
15 Investments (Company) continued
b) Subsidiary undertakings – cost and net book value
Company
£’000
At 30 January 2021 26,407
Increase in cost of investment for share options/awards granted to subsidiary employees 1,290
At 29 January 2022 27, 696
Company
£’000
At 25 January 2020 25,203
Increase in cost of investment for share options/awards granted to subsidiary employees 1,204
At 30 January 2021 26,407
c) Investments in joint ventures
The Group has a 50% interest in the ordinary share capital of No Ordinary Retail Company Pty, a company incorporated in Australia through
its wholly owned subsidiary, No Ordinary Designer Label Limited.
The Group has a 50% interest in the ordinary share capital of Shanghai LongShang Trading Company Ltd operating in China including
HongKong S.A.R. and Macau S.A.R.
*The registered office addresses of the joint ventures are as follows:
Related party Registered office address
No Ordinary Retail Company Pty 6 Albert St, Preston VIC 3072, Australia
Ted Baker (Hong Kong) Limited 15/F, Soundwill Plaza II-Midtown, 1-29 Tang Lung Street, Causeway Bay, Hong Kong
52 weeks ended
29 January 2022
£’000
53 weeks ended
30 January 2021
£’000
Opening investment in joint ventures 3,691 5,088
Investment – –
Share of (loss) of joint ventures (1,270) (1,136)
Share of non-underlying cost of joint ventures – (7)
Dividend received – (254)
Closing investment in joint ventures 2,421 3,691
The above carrying value represents the initial cost of the investment undertaken, as well as any subsequent change in net assets of the joint
ventures, as at 29 January 2022.
There are no contingent liabilities relating to the Group’s interest in the joint ventures, and no contingent liabilities of the ventures itself. The joint
ventures’ loss for the periods ended 29 January 2022 and 30 January 2021 and its assets and liabilities are as follows:
29 January 2022
£’000
30 January 2021
£’000
Non-current assets 19, 5 74 19,886
Current assets 16,459 17, 819
Current liabilities (33,10 6) (32,527)
Net assets 2,927 5,178
Share capital 41,645 39,766
Retained earnings (35,693) (33,092)
Current period loss, net of tax (3,025) (1,496)
Exchange rate movement – –
Total equity 2,927 5,178
153TB | AR—’22
SR GR FS
16 DEFERRED TAX ASSETS AND LIABILITIES
As at 29 January
Asset/(liability)
brought forward
£’000
(Charge)/credit
to Income
Statement
£’000
(Charge)/Credit
to Equity
£’000
Foreign exchange
on retranslation
£’000
Asset/(liability)
carried forward
£’000
Deferred tax asset on UK operations arising from:
Assets
Share-based payments 144 374 (5) – 513
UK tax losses 4,782 7,94 8 (345) – 12,385
Other 402 (52) – – 350
Derivative financial instruments 70 – (56) – 14
Property, plant and equipment 252 2,275 – – 2,527
Total deferred tax asset on UK operations 5,650 10,545 (406) – 15,789
Deferred tax asset on foreign operations
arisingfrom:
Foreign losses 4,850 1,190 – 103 6,143
Inventory 1,347 (1,039) – 30 338
Property, plant and equipment 1,643 (644) – 39 1,038
IFRS 16 6,729 (1,536) – 31 5,224
Other 2,547 430 – 3 2,980
State taxes 4,869 (1,252) – 58 3,675
Total deferred tax asset on foreign operations 21,985 (2,851) – 264 19,398
Deferred tax liability on foreign operations
arising from:
IFRS 16 – (80) – – (80)
Net deferred tax asset/(liability) on foreign
operations 21,985 (2,931) – 264 19,318
Total deferred tax asset/(liability) 27,6 35 7, 614 (406) 264 35,107
Refer to Note 2 for taxation estimates.
At 29 January 2022, the net deferred tax asset of £35.1m (2021: £27.6m) comprises a deferred tax asset of £35.2m (2021: £27.6m) and
adeferred tax liability of £0.1m (2021: £ nil).
Recognition of deferred tax assets is based on the generation of future taxable profits that will allow utilisation of the asset. Future taxable profits
are forecast by jurisdiction and the associated tax charge calculated to ensure the recoverability of the deferred tax asset.
Deferred tax assets are only recognised on the foreign assets when these businesses pass their development phase and when management
considers it probably that future taxable profits will be available against which they can be utilised.
The total unused cumulative tax losses for which no deferred tax asset has been recognised in the balance sheet is £19.9m (2021: £16.9m).
£1.7m of losses will expire in 0-5 years, £3.3m of losses will expire in 6-10 years, and £14.9m of losses have no expiration date. This results
ina potential deferred tax asset of £5.3m (2021: £5.0m) not recognised.
Company Deferred Tax Assets and Liabilities
As at 29 January
Asset/(liability)
brought forward
£’000
(Charge)/credit
to Income Statement
£’000
(Charge)/Credit
to Equity
£’000
Asset/(liability)
carried forward
£’000
Deferred tax asset:
UK tax losses 1,10 0 538 – 1,638
Total 1,100 538 – 1,638
154 TB | AR—’22
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
17 INVENTORIES
Group
29 January 2022
£’000
Group
30 January 2021
£’000
Raw materials and packaging 2,458 1,960
Work in progress 614 657
Finished goods and goods for resale 99,999 85,231
103,071 87, 8 4 8
Cost of inventories recognised as an expense within cost of sales during the period 163,880 156,444
The write back of inventory to fair value less cost of sales for the 52 weeks to 29 January 2022 was £3.9m (2021: write down of £11.1m)
Inventories written down and recognised as an expense in the period relates to inventory written down to the net realisable value and the
netmovement in inventory provisions during the period. The write down and any reversal are included in cost of sales. For further details on
inventory valuation, key assumptions and sensitivities, see Note 2.
18 TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES
Group
29 January 2022
£’000
Group
30 January 2021
£’000
Company
29 January 2022
£’000
Company
30 January 2021
£’000
Trade receivables 33,403 34,366 – –
Prepayments and accrued income 23,257 10,300 66 –
Other taxes and social security – – – –
56,660 44,666 66 –
Included in prepayments and accrued income are accrued income amounts of £2.0m (2021: £1.1m) in relation to licensing income which has
not yet been invoiced.
Amounts owed from joint ventures is £4.5m (2021: £4.3m) of which £3.6m is owed from Ted Baker (Hong Kong) Limited (2021: £3.6m).
These amounts are fully recoverable.
Expected credit losses
The Group measures the loss allowance for trade receivables at an amount equal to lifetime expected credit losses (‘ECL’). The ECL on trade
receivables are estimated with reference to past default experience of the debtor and an analysis of the debtor’s current financial position,
adjusted for factors that are specific to the debtor, general economic conditions of the industry in which the debtor operates and an assessment
of both the current as well as the forecast direction of conditions at the period end date. There has been no change in the estimation techniques
or significant assumptions made during the current reporting period. The Group has credit insurance and standby letters of credit in place with
several customers to mitigate exposure against customer credit risk.
The Group provides for a trade receivable when there is information indicating that the debtor is in severe financial difficulty and there
isnorealistic prospect of recovery, e.g. when the debtor has been placed under liquidation or has entered bankruptcy or administration
proceedings. The Group debtor provision at 29 January 2022 amounted to £0.6m (2021: £0.5m).
At the year end, the Group has one customer with an outstanding debtor balance equal to approximately 13.0% of the total outstanding
balance. Having assessed the customer and reviewed the aging of the outstanding debt, the balance is not seen as a greater credit risk
totheGroup than other debtors.
The table below shows the credit risk exposure on the Group’s trade receivables at 29 January 2022:
Carrying amount
£’000
Current amount
£’000
Overdue
1-30 days
£’000
Overdue
31-60 days
£’000
Overdue
61-90 days
£’000
Overdue
90+days
£’000
Gross carrying amount – trade receivables 33,973 21, 779 7,9 3 7 530 672 3,055
Loss allowance (570) (72) – – (65) (433)
Net carrying amount 33,403 21,707 7,9 37 530 607 2,622
The Group has no significant concentrations of credit risk. The amounts owed by Group undertakings balance comprises an interest free
intercompany loan with a subsidiary within the Group, which is repayable on demand. The ability of the Group undertaking to repay
outstanding balances to the Company is assessed at each reporting date and counterparty credit risk is reviewed on a regular basis using
theIFRS 9 expected credit loss impairment model. If a significant increase in the credit risk occurs, credit losses are recorded in the income
statement. As at 29 January 2022, and at 30 January 2021, the expected credit loss of the Company’s trade and other receivables was
negligible and hence no impairment of the receivable was recorded.
155TB | AR—’22
SR GR FS
19 DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
Note
Assets
29 January 2022
£’000
Liabilities
29 January 2022
£’000
Assets
30 January 2021
£’000
Liabilities
30 January 2021
£’000
Derivatives designed as effective as hedging
instruments and carried at fair value:
Forward foreign exchange contracts 27 – (75) – (1,191)
– (75) – (1,191)
Forward foreign exchange contracts are used to hedge exposure to fluctuations in foreign exchange rates that arise in the normal course of the
Group’s business.
There were no ineffective cash flow hedges in the period (2021: £nil).
Gains and losses in equity relating to derivatives in effective hedging relationships at 29 January 2022 will remain there until the forecast
transaction occurs. When the hedged item is a non-financial asset, the amount recognised in equity is transferred to the carrying amount of the
asset when it is recognised. In other cases, the amount recognised in other comprehensive income is transferred to the income statement in the
same period that the hedged item affects the income statement.
The charge to the income statement in respect of changes in the fair value of foreign currency derivatives that do not meet the criteria for hedge
accounting was £nil (2021: £ nil).
20 PROVISIONS
Group
Onerous Contract
£’000
Dilapidations
£’000
Total
£’000
Balance at 30 January 2021 1,973 2,942 4,915
Provided in the period – – –
Released in the period (1,171) (16) (1,187)
Utilised in the period (603) (64) (667)
Balance at 29 January 2022 199 2,862 3,061
Onerous contract provision of £0.2m relates to the provision against the liability for materials relating to cancelled orders due to the Covid
pandemic. This is management’s best estimate of the unavoidable costs in meeting the obligation under these contracts. This liability is
expected to be settled within 12 months and has therefore been shown as a current liability.
Dilapidations provisions are managements best estimate of costs of restoring stores to the required condition per the lease on exit of the store.
The £2.9m provision is expected to be utilised by April 2031.
156 TB | AR—’22
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
21 NET CASH/BORROWINGS
Group
29 January 2022
£’000
Group
30 January 2021
£’000
Company
29 January 2022
£’000
Company
30 January 2021
£’000
Cash and cash equivalents 14,515 66,671 195 5,195
Overdraft (3,417) – – –
Borrowings (8,000) – – –
Net cash/borrowings 3,098 66,671 195 5,195
The Group’s borrowings have been summarised below:
Interest rate Repayable date
Group
29 January 2022
£’000
Group
30 January 2021
£’000
Current:
Revolving credit facility 3.5% + SONIA Nov 2023 8,000 –
Total current borrowings 8,000 –
Reconciliation of liabilities to cash flow arising from financing activities:
Group
29 January 2022
£’000
Group
30 January 2021
£’000
Opening balance – 180,000
Changes from financing cash flows:
Repayment of facility (18,000) (180,000)
Drawdown of facility and overdraft 29,402 –
Balance at 29 January 2022 11, 4 0 2 –
22 TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES
Group
29 January 2022
£’000
Group
30 January 2021
Restated
1
£’000
Company
29 January 2022
£’000
Company
30 January 2021
£’000
Trade payables
1
46,200 6 0, 574 – –
Accruals and deferred income 7,808 8,726 147 112
Other creditors 11,906 8,665 – –
Other tax 10,979 8,864 – –
76,893 86,829 147 112
1 More details of the restatement are found in Note 3.
157TB | AR—’22
SR GR FS
23 IFRS 16
Right-of-use assets
The Group has applied IFRS 16 using the simplified modified retrospective transition approach.
Right-of-use assets are recognised in relation to the Group’s leases, representing the economic benefits of the Group’s right to use the
underlying leased assets. The Group’s lease portfolio is principally comprised of property leases of stores, UK and overseas head offices
anddistribution centres.
The Group has applied the practical expedient for the application of rent concessions provided as a response to the Covid-19 pandemic,
asallowed by the amendment to IFRS 16.
Right-of-use asset
29 January 2022
£’000
30 January 2021
£’000
Cost
Opening 181, 544 188,219
Gross adjustment
1
– (2,019)
Modifications (2,569) (9,179)
Additions 3,631 9,229
Disposals (12,656) (4,706)
Closing 169,950 181,544
Amortisation
Opening (99,785) (50,232)
Gross adjustment
1
– 2,019
Modifications (450) –
Charge for the period (16,621) (26, 763)
Disposals 12,252 4,706
Impairments
2
(1,827) (29,515)
Closing (106,431) (99,785)
Net book value 63,519 81,759
1 Gross adjustment between cost and amortisation brought forward to better reflect underlying gross split.
2 Impairments in the year of £1.8m consisted of the interim impairment of £2.1m, the year-end impairment of £0.5m, and a release of £0.8m relating to modifications impacting
theprior year.
Lease liabilities
When measuring lease liabilities, the Group discounted lease payments using its incremental borrowing rate upon transition to IFRS 16 and at
subsequent remeasurement dates. The discount rates applied range between 2.0% to 9.1%, they have been determined based on comparable
bond yields and are lease-specific varying by territory and lease length.
Amounts recognised in profit or loss
Group
29 January 2022
£’000
Group
30 January 2021
£’000
Interest on lease liabilities
1
4,949 6,781
1 Expenses related to variable rental payments for leasehold properties are included within Note 6.
Lease liabilities included in the statement of financial position
Group
29 January 2022
£’000
Group
30 January 2021
Restated
1
£’000
Current 43,129 45,063
Non-current 81,805 106,617
Total lease liabilities 124,934 151,680
1 More details of the restatement are found in Note 3.
158 TB | AR—’22
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
23 IFRS 16 continued
Reconciliation of liabilities to cash flow arising from financing activities:
Group
29 January 2022
£’000
Group
30 January 2021
Restated
1
£’000
Opening 151,680 168,337
Modifications
1
1,082 (807)
Changes from financing cash flows:
Payment of lease liabilities (34,765) (24,517)
Remeasurement – (361)
Total changes from financing cash flows (33,683) (25,685)
Increase in lease liability 3,632 2,509
Disposal of lease liabilities (1,545) –
The effect of changes in foreign exchange rates (99) (262)
Interest expense 4,949 6,781
Total other changes 6,938 9,028
124,934 151,680
1 Modifications includes £0.5m reduction of interest for the year due to modifications made to IFRS 16 leases.
Maturity analysis – contractual undiscounted cash flows
Group
29 January 2022
£’000
Group
30 January 2021
(Restated
1
)
£’000
Less than one year 32,657 34,536
One to five years 74,903 96,481
More than five years 17, 9 8 8 29,067
125,548 160,084
1 More details of the restatement are found in Note 3.
24 CAPITAL AND RESERVES
Number of ordinary shares 29 January 2022 30 January 2021
Ordinary shares of 5p each
Opening allotted, called up and fully paid up 184,608,786 44,566,689
Exercise of share options 1,897 42,097
Ordinary shares issued for cash – 140,000,000
Closing allotted, called up and fully paid 184,610,683 184,608,786
Share capital
29 January 2022
£’000
30 January 2021
£’000
Share capital at the start of the period 9,230 2,228
Share options – 2
Share capital issued during the period – 7,000
Share capital at the end of the period 9,230 9,230
159TB | AR—’22
SR GR FS
23 IFRS 16 continued
Other reserves and retained earnings
Other reserves and retained earnings include the following reserve accounts:
Cash flow hedging reserve
The effective portion of financial instruments that are designated as hedging instruments and are documented as part of an effective hedge
offuture cash flows are recognised directly in equity and recycled to the income statement when the underlying cash flows occur or are
nolonger expected to occur. This is included within other reserves.
Translation reserve
The translation reserve comprises all foreign exchange differences arising from the translation of the financial statements of foreign operations.
Other reserves – Company
This reserve relates to the premium on equity consideration used in the acquisition of a subsidiary, No Ordinary Designer Label Limited,
byTed Baker plc in 1997, which is classified within other reserves under the Companies Act. This reserve also includes the cost of share
optionsand awards granted to employees of the Group. This movement in other reserves is reflected in retained earnings in the Group
Statement of Changes in Equity.
25 SHARE-BASED PAYMENTS
The pre-tax charge in the Income Statement for share schemes in the 52-week period to 29 January 2022 was £1.3m (2021: £1.2m).
Long-Term Incentive Plan
Share awards are made in the form of nil-cost options over Ordinary shares in Ted Baker plc under the Long-Term Incentive Plan 2013 (“LTIP
2013”), the Ted Baker Long-Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP 2020”), and the Ted Baker Incentive Plan (“TBIP 2020”) which were approved by the
shareholders at the general meetings held on 20 June 2013, 21 July 2020 and 21 July 2020 respectively. The options are exercisable three
years after the date of grant subject to the satisfaction of the vesting conditions.
Share options and awards granted under the LTIP 2013 and LTIP 2020 and outstanding at the end of the period were as follows:
Grant date Expiry date
Number of
options granted
Fair value at
grant date
Number of
awards outstanding
at 29 January 2022
Number of
awards outstanding
at 30 January 2021
1 May 2014 20 April 2024 254,141 695.0p – –
30 April 2015 29 April 2025 192,860 1,785.0p 3,008 4,905
5 May 2016 4 May 2026 234,159 875.0p
6 April 2017 5 April 2027 221,234 1,355.0p – –
3 April 2018 2 April 2028 251,786 1,071.0p – –
16 April 2019 15 April 2029 403,600 592.0p – –
4 September 2020 4 September 2030 4,246,336 84 .5p/91.6p 3,612,591 4,166,660
26 October 2020 4 September 2030 518,511 84.5p/90.1p 518,511 518,511
16 December 2020 4 September 2030 696,615 8 4 . 5 p/ 9 7.1p 696,615 696,615
3 August 2021 4 September 2030 2 , 717, 3 4 8 85.5p/135p 2,312,254 –
9,736,590 7,142,979 5,386,691
The terms and conditions of the awards granted during the 52 weeks ended 29 January 2022 are as follows:
Grant date Type of award Number of options Vesting conditions Vesting period
3 August 2021 LTIP 2020 & TBIP 2020 2,609,043 50% performance against share price of
comparator group to September 2023,
50%free cash flow against targets for
year ended January 2023.
Up to 100% after
three years
3 August 2021 TBIP 2020 108,305 No performance-based vesting conditions,
options lapse if recipient under notice or
nolonger employed as at vesting date
100% after
threeyears
160 TB | AR—’22
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
25 Share-based Payments continued
The terms and conditions of the awards granted during the 53 weeks ended 30 January 2021 are as follows:
Grant date Type of award Number of options Vesting conditions Vesting period
4 September 2020,
26 October 2020,
16 December 2020
LTIP 2020 & TBIP 2020 3,733,394 50% performance against share price
ofcomparator group to September 2023,
50% free cash flow against targets for
year ended January 2023.
Up to 100% after
three years
4 September 2020,
26 October 2020,
16 December 2020
TBIP 2020 1,728,068 No performance based vesting conditions,
options lapse if recipient under notice or
nolonger employed as at vesting date
100% after
threeyears
The credit to the income statement for the period in respect of options issued under the LTIP 2013 amounted to £nil (2021: £nil).
The Monte-Carlo valuation methodology has been used as the basis of measuring the portion of the awards that were subject to market
based performance conditions made under the LTIP 2013 and LTIP 2020. The fair value of the remaining portion of the awards not subject to
market based performance condition is equal to the share price on the grant date. The range of inputs into the Monte-Carlo model for awards
made was as follows:
Share price at grant £0.85 – £2.855
Share price at grant (based on six-month average) for share price performance condition 1,752.0p–2,809.0p
Risk free interest rate -11.0%-0.87%
Expected life of options 3 years
Share price volatility – Company 29.0%-38.71%
Share price volatility – Median comparator of LTIP 2020 awards 52.0%
Dividend yield 0%-6.88%
The share price volatility was determined by calculating the historic volatility of the Group’s share price over a time period matching the
expected life of the option.
The Group also operates a save-as-you-earn scheme which vests over 3 years or 5 years. All employees are entitled to join the scheme
whereby they have the option to buy shares at a 20% discount rate of the price set at the grant date. The fair value of the option is calculated
using a Black-Scholes pricing model. The number of shares under option at 29 January 2022 was 1,785,798 (2021:1,609,851).
26 FINANCIAL COMMITMENTS
Group
a) Capital commitments
The Group has capital commitments of £4.9m related to commitments at 29 January 2022 (2021: £6.8m) which were not provided in the
financial statements.
b) Concessions
The total committed payments to concessions are £1.5m as at 29 January 2022 (2021: £2.8m), relating to payments due within one year.
These amounts only include committed minimum payments and excludes the variable or contingent elements of future rental payments.
Asaresult, the amounts charged to the Income Statement may be materially higher than the financial commitment at the prior period end.
Contracts for concessions often contain commissions based on revenue. Under the terms of the contracts there are two bases:
ɣ Minimum payment levels due, together with variable amounts in excess of those minimums, based on the concession’s future revenue levels.
ɣ No minimum payment conditions within the terms of the contract such that commission charges are contingent wholly on future revenue levels.
c) Pension arrangements
The Group operates a number of defined contribution schemes for senior management and a stakeholder pension scheme for employees,
forwhich the pension cost charge for the period amounted to £1.3m (2021: £1.4m). Contributions totalling £nil are included in accruals and
deferred income at the period end (2021: £0.2m).
Company
d) Letter of support
The Company has signed letters of support to various of its subsidiary companies. The most significant is with No Ordinary Design Limited,
which has an intercompany payable of £123.8m at 29 January 2022 (2021: £119.7m).
161TB | AR—’22
SR GR FS
27 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS AND RISK MANAGEMENT
a) Carrying amount and fair values of financial assets and liabilities
Financial assets and liabilities – Group
The carrying amounts shown in the balance sheet, which approximate the fair values, are as follows:
Carrying amount
29 January 2022
£’000
Carrying amount
30 January 2021
£’000
Financial assets
Held at amortised cost:
Trade and other receivables 33,403 29,437
Accrued income 2,015 1,154
Amount due from equity accounted investee 4,505 4,305
Cash and cash equivalents 14,515 66,176
Held at fair value:
Derivative financial assets – –
Total financial assets 54,438 101,072
Financial liabilities
Held at amortised cost:
Trade and other payables (65,914) (6 0 , 574)
Lease liabilities (124,934) (151,680)
Borrowings (8,000) –
Overdraft (3,417) –
Held at fair value:
Derivative financial liabilities (75) (1,191)
Total financial liabilities (202,340) (213,445)
Net financial asset/(liabilities) (147,902) (107, 373)
Overdue trade debtor balances are disclosed in Note 18. The carrying and fair values of lease liabilities have been disclosed in Note 23.
The methods and assumptions used to estimate fair values of financial assets and liabilities are as follows:
1 Cash and cash equivalents have been stated at their book values due to their short maturities or immediate or short-term access.
2 The fair values of trade receivables, amount due from equity accounted investee and amounts owed by Company undertakings have been stated at their book value due to their
short maturities.
3 The fair value of derivatives is determined by reference to third-party valuations (usually from a bank) or by reference to readily observable market prices.
4 The fair values of trade and other payables have been stated at their book values due to their short maturities.
5 Bank overdrafts have been stated at their book values due to their short maturities or immediate or short-term access.
162 TB | AR—’22
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
27 Financial Instruments and Risk Management continued
Financial assets and liabilities – Company
The carrying amounts shown in the balance sheet, which approximate the fair values, are as follows:
Carrying amount
29 January 2022
£’000
Carrying amount
30 January 2021
£’000
Financial assets
Amounts owed by Group undertakings 123, 753 119, 6 7 2
Cash and cash equivalents 195 5,195
Total financial assets 123,948 124,867
Financial liabilities
Trade and other payables (147) (112 )
Total financial liabilities (147) (112)
Net financial assets 123,796 124,755
All non-derivative financial assets and liabilities, for the Group and Company, are measured at amortised cost. Their carrying amounts are
areasonable approximation of their fair value due to their short maturities or because interest rates are floating rates where payments are reset
to market rates at intervals of less than one year.
Derivative assets and liabilities are held at fair value (see Note 19), which is determined by reference to third-party valuations (usually from
abank) or by reference to readily observable market prices. Derivative assets and liabilities that are not used in hedging relationships are held
at fair value through the profit and loss.
The valuation of all financial assets and liabilities carried at fair value by the Group is based on hierarchy Level 2. Fair value hierarchy levels
are defined as follows:
Level 1: quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities.
Level 2: inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly (i.e. as prices)
orindirectly (i.e. derived from prices).
Level 3: inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs).
b) Derivative financial instruments
Contractual/
notional amounts
29 January 2022
£’000
Assets
29 January 2022
£’000
Liabilities
29 January 2022
£’000
Contractual/
notional amounts
30 January 2021
£’000
Assets
30 January 2021
£’000
Liabilities
29 January 2021
£’000
Forward foreign exchange contracts 2,312 – (75) 21, 583 – (1,191)
Interest rate swap – – – – – –
2,312 – (75) 21,583 – (1,191)
The following table indicates the timing of the notional amount of the foreign exchange derivative hedging instruments.
Contractual/
notional amounts
29 January 2022
£’000
Contractual/
notional amounts
30 January 2021
£’000
Within six months 2,312 10,021
Between six months and one year – 9,250
Between one and two years – 2,312
2,312 21,583
163TB | AR—’22
SR GR FS
27 Financial Instruments and Risk Management continued
c) Cash flow hedging reserve movements
The following table indicates the cash flow hedging reserve balance at 29 January 2022 and the periods in which the cash flows are
expected to occur. The periods in which the cash flows are expected to impact the income statement are materially the same.
Currency
derivatives
29 January 2022
£’000
Currency
derivatives
30 January £’000
2021
Within six months (25) 490
Between six months and one year (66) 470
Between one and two years (5) 112
Unrecognised gain/(loss) (96) 1,072
d) Financial risk identification and management
The Group’s multinational operations and debt financing requirements expose it to a variety of financial risks. In the course of its business the
Group is exposed to:
ɣ market risk;
ɣ credit risk; and
ɣ liquidity risks have been established and are reviewed regularly to reflect changes in the market conditions and the Group’s activities.
i) Market risk
Market risk is the risk that changes in market prices, such as foreign exchange rates and interest rates, will affect the Group’s income or the value
of its holdings of financial instruments. At the balance sheet date, the only significant market risk to the Group arises from foreign currency risk.
Foreign currency risk
The Group operates internationally and is therefore exposed to foreign currency risk primarily on purchases of inventory denominated in
USDollars and Euros.
The Board reviews and agrees policies for managing exchange rate risks on a regular basis. Where appropriate, the Group uses financial
instruments to mitigate these risks. All transactions in derivatives, principally forward exchange contracts, are taken solely to manage these risks.
No transactions of a speculative nature are entered into.
The Group’s policy is to hedge substantially all the risks of such currency fluctuations by using forward contracts considering forecast foreign
currency cash inflows and outflows. The policy allows for these risks to be hedged for up to 24 months ahead in order to fix the cost in Sterling.
In April 2020, the Group exited its foreign exchange contract to crystallise a cash gain. Since then, the Group has entered into a lesser level of
exchange rate hedging as volatility in trade meant hedge effectiveness criteria were unable to be met.
When trades are entered into, the vast majority of projected purchases in each major currency qualify qualifies as “highly probable” forecast
transactions for hedge accounting purposes.
The Group also publishes its financial statements in Sterling and is therefore exposed to foreign currency translation risks due to movements
inforeign exchange rates on the translation of the results and underlying net assets of its foreign operations into Sterling. Translation risks are
nothedged.
164 TB | AR—’22
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
27 Financial Instruments and Risk Management continued
Foreign currency sensitivity analysis
The Group has used sensitivity analysis that measures the estimated change to the income statement and equity of a 10% strengthening
orweakening in Sterling against all other currencies, using the rates applicable at 29 January 2022. The analysis assumes that all other
variables, in particular, interest rates, remain constant.
The following sensitivity analysis illustrates the impact that a 10% strengthening of the Group’s reporting currency against local functional
currencies would have had on profit before tax and equity. The analysis covers currency translation exposures at the period end on the
Group’s financial assets and liabilities that are not denominated in the functional currencies of those businesses.
A 10% (2021: 10%) strengthening or weakening of the Sterling against the following currencies at 29 January 2022 would have increased/
(decreased) equity and profit before tax by the amounts shown in the following table:
Impact on profit
29 January 2022
£’000
Impact on equity
29 January 2022
£’000
Impact on profit
30 January 2021
£’000
Impact on equity
30 January 2021
£’000
Test of 10% (2021: 10%) strengthening in Sterling against other currencies
US Dollar (473) (473) (201) (201)
Euro 486 486 74 4 74 4
13 13 543 543
Test of 10% (2021: 10%) weakening in Sterling against other currencies
US Dollar 579 579 246 246
Euro (594) (594) (910) (910)
(16) (16) (664) (664)
Interest rate risk
The Group’s exposure to interest rate risk is limited to floating rate financial assets and liabilities.
The Group’s policy is to minimise the impact of adverse interest rate movements, through the use of interest rate management tools where
possible, taking into account factors such as the timing of future cash flows and forward yield curves. The use of any interest rate management
tools is aligned with timescales of current and forecast net debt for which underlying projections can be accurately made. The Group does not
hold any interest rate derivatives at 29 January 2022 (2021: nil).
The interest rate profile of the financial assets and liabilities of the Group is as follows:
Financial assets and liabilities subject to interest rate risk
Group
29 January 2022
£’000
Group
30 January 2021
£’000
Company
29 January 2022
£’000
Company
30 January 2021
£’000
Sterling (5,575) 13,736 195 5,195
US Dollar (86) 8,901 – –
Euro 8,830 8,823 – –
Other (707) 4,296 – –
2,462 35,756 195 5,195
Interest rate sensitivity analysis
The following sensitivity analysis illustrates the impact that a change of 50 basis points in SONIA interest rates at the balance sheet date would
have increased/(decreased) equity and profit before tax by the amounts shown below. This calculation assumes that the change occurred at
the balance sheet date and had been applied to risk exposures existing at that date.
Impact on profit
29 January 2022
£’000
Impact on equity
29 January 2022
£’000
Impact on profit
30 January 2021
£’000
Impact on equity
30 January 2021
£’000
Interest rate increase of 0.5% 12 12 179 179
Interest rate decrease of 0.5% (12) (12) (179) (179)
165TB | AR—’22
SR GR FS
27 Financial Instruments and Risk Management continued
ii) Credit risk
Credit risk is the risk that counterparties to financial instruments do not perform according to the terms of the contract or instrument. The Group’s
principal financial assets are cash, trade and other receivables, and derivative financial assets. The Group’s credit risk is primarily attributable
to its trade and other receivables.
Trade and other receivables
Credit risk arises on credit exposure to wholesale, licence and concession partners including outstanding receivables and committed
transactions. The Group substantially mitigates credit risk through credit insurance, standby letters of credit or supplier finance arrangements
when possible.
Wholesale partner receivables risk is mitigated by credit insurance being taken out up to the amount of the credit limit. All new wholesale
customers are checked against appropriate trade references and details such as frequency/delinquency. The limits applied to each customer
are set in conjunction with our credit insurer’s advice. Monitoring of credit limits is undertaken daily.
All territorial licence partners require a standby letter of credit up to the amount of their credit limit, which is determined based on creditworthiness
and volume of business. The Group is not able to protect its licence partner income with credit insurance, although it does notconsider this
asignificant credit risk. Forecasts are obtained from all its licence partners throughout the period to allow extensive visibility offuture income.
The Company has credit risk associated with its intercompany receivable. This balance is held at cost less provision for impairment. The provision
for impairment is considered on a specific basis in relation to the balance as there is no history of credit losses.
iii) Liquidity risk
Refer to Note 1, Basis of Preparation – Going Concern.
Prudent liquidity risk management implies maintaining sufficient cash and the availability of funding through an adequate amount of committed
credit facilities. Due to the dynamic nature of the underlying businesses, Group treasury maintains flexibility in funding by maintaining
availability under committed credit lines.
Management monitors rolling forecasts of the Group’s liquidity headroom (which comprises of the undrawn borrowing facility and cash
andcash equivalents) based on expected cash flow. This is generally carried out at entity level in the operating companies of the Group
inaccordance with practice and limits set by the Group. In addition, the Group’s liquidity management policy involves projecting cash flows
inmajor currencies and considering the level of liquid assets necessary to meet these, and monitoring balance sheet liquidity ratios against
internal and external regulatory requirements.
The table below analyses the Group’s financial liabilities and derivative financial liabilities into relevant maturity groupings based on the
remaining period to the contractual maturity date, at the balance sheet date. The amounts disclosed in the table are the contractual
undiscounted cash flows. Balances due within twelve months equal their carrying balances as the impact of discounting is not significant.
Carrying amount
£’000
Contracted amount
less than 1 year
£’000
Contracted amount
1–5 years
£’000
Contracted amount
more than 5 years
£’000
At 29 January 2022
Non-derivative financial liabilities
Trade and other payables 65,914 65,914 – –
Borrowings and overdraft 11, 417 5,197 8,000 –
Lease liabilities 124,934 32,657 74,903 17,9 8 8
Derivative financial liabilities
Derivative financial instruments 75 75 – –
At 30 January 2021
Non-derivative financial liabilities
Trade and other payables 7 7,9 6 5 7 7,9 6 5 – –
Borrowings – – – –
Lease liabilities 151,680 34,536 96,481 29,067
Derivative financial liabilities
Derivative financial instruments 1,191 1,191 – –
The Group manages its liquidity risk through the use of secured revolving credit facilities. At 29 January 2022, the Group holds a £80 million
Revolving Credit Facility maturing in November 2023. This facility reduced from £90 million in January 2022, and replaced the existing two
facilities totalling £107.8m in May 2021. At year end, the facility had been drawn down £8.0m. This facility provides the resources to fund the
planned working capital requirements and capital expenditure to support the Group’s long-term growth strategy. Interest is payable based
onSONIA plus a margin. On 22 April 2022, the Group agreed with its lenders to adjust the covenant tests over the remaining life of the
Revolving Credit Facility maturing in November 2023 to provide more headroom for the Group given the prolonged disruption of Covid-19
and the impact of the Omicron variant on the Group’s trading in the final weeks of the last financial year. The RCF facility size remained
unchanged at £80 million.
166 TB | AR—’22
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
27 Financial Instruments and Risk Management continued
The facilities contain financial covenants which are believed to be appropriate in the current economic climate and tested on a quarterly basis.
The Group monitors actual and prospective compliance with these on a regular basis.
The financial covenant tests are based upon the following:
ɣ minimum EBITDA levels (applies up to January 2023)
ɣ a ratio of total net debt to EBITDA (applies after August 2022)
ɣ a fixed charge cover ratio (applies after January 2023)
e) Capital management
The Board’s immediate actions to capital management are set out in Note 1, Basis of Preparation – Going Concern.
The Board’s policy is to maintain a robust capital base, defined as total shareholders’ equity, totalling £120.4m at 29 January 2022
(2021:£152.0m), to maintain investor, creditor and market confidence and to sustain future development of the business.
From time to time the Company purchases its own shares on the market; the timing of these purchases depends on market prices. Primarily
theshares are intended to be used for issuing shares under the Group and Company’s share option and award programmes. Buy and sell
decisions are made on a specific transaction basis by the Board; the Group and Company do not have a defined share buy-back plan.
There were no changes in the Group and Company’s approach to capital management during the period.
28 RELATED PARTIES
The Group considers its Executive and Non-Executive Directors, together with the Executive Team as key management and their compensation
therefore comprises a related-party transaction.
Total compensation in respect of key management for the period was as follows:
52 weeks ended
29 January 2022
£’000
53 weeks ended
30 January 2021
£’000
Salaries, fees and short-term benefits 3,849 3,297
Contributions to money purchase pension schemes 127 57
Share-based payment (credit)/charges – –
3,976 3,354
Directors of the Company as at 29 January 2022 and their immediate relatives control 0.2% of the voting shares of the Company.
Amounts due from/to the Company’s subsidiaries are shown below:
52 weeks ended
29 January 2022
£’000
53 weeks ended
30 January 2021
£’000
Amounts due from No Ordinary Designer Label Limited 123,753 119, 6 7 2
Amounts due to No Ordinary Shoes Limited – –
Sales to and amounts due from/to the Group’s joint ventures are shown below:
52 weeks ended
29 January 2022
£’000
53 weeks ended
30 January 2021
£’000
Amounts due from No Ordinary Retail Company Pty 576 372
Sales to No Ordinary Retail Company Pty 1,918 1,261
Amounts due from Shanghai LongShang Trading Company Ltd 3,929 3,933
Sales to Shanghai LongShang Trading Company Ltd 3,636 2,876
29 POST BALANCE SHEET EVENTS
On 18 March 2022 the Company entered into a 10-year lease for its new corporate head office, the Gorgeous Brown Building.
On 22 April 2022, the Group agreed with its lenders to adjust the covenant tests over the remaining life of the Revolving Credit Facility
maturing in November 2023 to provide more headroom for the Group given the prolonged disruption of Covid-19 and the impact of the
Omicron variant on the Group’s trading in the final weeks of the last financial year. The RCF facility size remained unchanged at £80 million.
167TB | AR—’22
SR GR FS
FIVE YEAR SUMMARY (UNAUDITED)
52 weeks ended
27 Januar y 2018
£’000
52 weeks ended
26 January 2019
£’000
52 weeks ended
25 January 2020
£’000
53 weeks ended
30 January 2021
(Restated)
1
£’000
52 weeks ended
29 January 2022
£’000
Results
Revenue
2
613,113 639,554 630,478 355,271 428,420
Operating profit/(loss) 70,727 34,301 (59,954) (98,895) (34,565)
Profit/(loss) before tax 68,789 30,656 ( 7 7, 6 2 5 ) (1 0 7, 72 9 ) (44,050)
Profit/(loss) before tax and non-underlying items 73,465 62,965 4,778 (59,161) (3 8 , 411)
Profit/(loss) for the period 52,744 24,478 (68,186) (86,445) (35,584)
Assets employed
Property, plant and equipment 139,075 131,865 12 7, 4 2 9 39,401 30,200
Other non-current assets 40,733 54,708 203,612 148,384 129,632
Net current assets/(liabilities) 92,515 89,813 (54,824) 73,810 45,303
Non-current liabilities (48,273) ( 4 7,918 ) (135,54 4) (109,559) (8 4 , 747 )
Net assets 224,050 228,468 140,673 152,036 120,388
Financed by
Shareholders’ funds 224,050 228,468 140,673 152,036 120,388
224,050 228,468 140,673 152,036 120,388
Key statistics
Basic earnings per share 119. 0 p 55.0p (153.0p) (56.2p) (19.3p)
Underlying earnings per share 12 7. 7p 114 . 2 p 6. 7p (26.0p) (17.9 p )
Diluted earnings per share 118 . 3 p 55.0p (153.0p) (56.2p) (19.3p)
Dividends per share 60.1p 58.6p 7. 8 p – –
Dividend cover
3
2.0 times .9 times -20.3 times – –
Dividend cover before non-underlying costs
3
2.1 times 1.9 times 1.2 times – –
Pre-tax return on capital employed before
non-underlying items 26.8% 19.1% 7. 3 % – –
Post-tax return on capital employed before
non-underlying items 20.6% 15.3% 6.5% – –
1 The prior period errors or misstatements relating to delivery income are detailed further in Note 3.
2 Revenue has been restated for all years to include licence income.
3 The dividend has been temporarily suspended since the interim dividend for the 52-week period to 25 January 2020.
168 TB | AR—’22
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
APPENDIX – ALTERNATIVE PERFORMANCE MEASURES (UNAUDITED)
As stated in Note 1, the Group uses certain measures that are not separately disclosable under IFRS or the Companies Act. The Directors
believe that these additional measures, which are used internally, are useful to the users of the financial statements in helping them understand
the underlying business performance. Reconciliations of the reported numbers to alternative performance measures are shown below.
Throughout the Annual Report and Accounts, alternative performance measures (APMs) have been reported which are non-GAAP measures
and are presented to provide stakeholders with additional financial information on the performance of the Group.
These APMs should not be viewed in isolation or as an alternative to the equivalent GAAP measure.
The measures detailed below are not defined by IFRS and therefore may not be directly comparable with other companies’ APMs – this includes
those in the retail industry.
UK & Europe
52 weeks ended
29 January
2022
Reported
£’000
52 weeks ended
29 January
2022
Foreign Exchange
Impact
£’000
52 weeks ended
29 January
2022
Constant Currency
£’000
53 weeks ended
30 January
2021
Restated
1
£’000
Constant
Currency
Variance
Total revenue 2 9 7, 2 2 8 1,504 298,881 248,772 20.14%
Total retail revenue 204,657 1,504 20 6,161 183,891 12.11%
Store revenue 99,650 1,125 100,775 6 7, 2 7 7 49.79%
eCommerce revenue 105,007 379 105,387 116 , 613 -9.63%
Sales per square foot including eCommerce sales 919 7 925 658 40.62%
Sales per square foot excluding eCommerce sales 447 5 452 244 85.36%
Wholesale revenue 7 7, 5 6 5 – 7 7, 5 6 5 52,432 47.9 3 %
Licence income 15,155 – 15,155 12,449 21. 74%
North America
52 weeks ended
29 January
2022
Reported
£’000
52 weeks ended
29 January
2022
Foreign Exchange
Impact
£’000
52 weeks ended
29 January
2022
Constant Currency
£’000
53 weeks ended
30 January
2021
Restated
1
£’000
Constant
Currency
Variance
Total revenue 126,792 7, 8 4 4 134,636 104,105 29.33%
Total retail revenue 93,189 5,638 98,827 71,260 38.69%
Store revenue 64, 410 3,703 68 ,113 39,671 71.70%
eCommerce revenue 28,779 1,935 30,714 31, 589 -2.77%
Sales per square foot including eCommerce sales 708 43 751 542 38.69%
Sales per square foot excluding eCommerce sales 490 28 518 302 71.70%
Wholesale revenue 33,604 2,205 35,809 32,846 9.02%
1 More details of the restatement are found in Note 3.
169TB | AR—’22
SR GR FS
Appendix – Alternative performance measures (unaudited) continued
Rest of the World
52 weeks ended
29 January
2022
Reported
£’000
52 weeks ended
29 January
2022
Foreign Exchange
Impact
£’000
52 weeks ended
29 January
2022
Constant Currency
£’000
53 weeks ended
30 January
2021
Reported
£’000
Constant
Currency
Variance
Total retail revenue 4,070 (116 ) 3,954 2,394 65.18%
Store revenue 4,070 (116 ) 3,954 2,394 65.18%
eCommerce revenue – – – – 0.00%
Sales per square foot including eCommerce sales 462 (13) 448 337 33.08%
Sales per square foot excluding eCommerce sales 462 (13) 448 337 33.08%
Group
52 weeks ended
29 January
2022
Reported
£’000
52 weeks ended
29 January
2022
Foreign Exchange
Impact
£’000
52 weeks ended
29 January
2022
Constant Currency
£’000
53 weeks ended
30 January
2021
Restated
1
£’000
Constant
Currency
Variance
Total revenue 428,240 9,232 4 3 7, 4 7 2 355,271 23.14%
Total retail revenue 301,916 7, 0 2 6 308,942 2 5 7, 5 4 4 19.96%
Store revenue 168,130 4 , 711 172,842 109,342 58.07%
eCommerce revenue 133, 786 2,315 136,101 148,202 -8.17%
Sales per square foot including eCommerce sales 831 36 2,125 658 222.93%
Sales per square foot excluding eCommerce sales 463 20 1, 418 244 481.34%
Wholesale revenue
1
111,16 9 2,205 113 , 3 74 85,278 35.95%
Licence income 15,155 – 15,155 12,449 21. 74%
1 More details of the restatement are found in Note 3.
170 TB | AR—’22
This is our first disclosure addressing the Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) guidance published in 2017.
We are in the process of developing our TCFD strategy over FY23 and set out below our compliance, on a comply or explain basis, with Listing Rule 9.8.6(R)8.
Our disclosures are not yet aligned with the 2017 TCFD recommendations and recommended disclosures across the four TCFD pillars. We aim to work
towards enhancing our disclosures over the course of the next 12 months. We also note:
ɣ Strategy – we are currently in the process of formally assessing our climate-related risks and opportunities over the short, medium and long term, as well
as determining their impact on our businesses, strategy and financial planning. We have not yet undertaken scenario analysis to determine our resilience
of our strategies to climate-related risks.
We are currently working on formally assessing how climate-related risks and opportunities will impact our business, across each time horizon. This work
will be completed in the next financial year. However, our initial assessment is that both the physical and transitional risks (set out below) are medium to
long-term risks to our business, and accordingly would not have a material impact on asset or liability valuations at the year-end date.
ɣ Metrics and targets – we are working to develop appropriate data metrics against which we can monitor climate-related risks, which will be updated
annually. These metrics will complement our current GHG emissions and targets.
TASK FORCE ON CLIMATE-RELATED FINANCIAL DISCLOSURES
GOVERNANCE
Describe the board’s oversight of climate related risks and opportunities
Ted’s ESG strategy, which includes climate-related risks and opportunities, is reported and presented to the board on a bi-annual basis.
Additionally,ESGrisk is represented in the quarterly Management Risk Committee meetings.
Describe management’s role in assessing and managing risk and opportunities
Our Ethics and Sustainability team manage the ESG programme for Ted Baker plc.
In addition, we have a Carbon Steering Group who meet quarterly to implement the wider carbon strategy, in addition to reviewing areas of
responsibility across the business.
STRATEGY
Describe the climate related risks and opportunities the organisation has identified over the short medium and long term
As noted previously, we are currently in the process of formally assessing our climate-related risks and opportunities. Our initial assessment is set out below:
ɣ Physical climate related risks:
None of our facilities have to date been impacted by extreme weather events to such an extent as to cause any significant disruption to our operations.
Our view is that the impact of climate change, caused by higher temperatures and water shortages, will lead to medium and longer term risks within
our supply chain on the price and availability of raw materials, such as cotton, on which we are very dependent.
ɣ Transitional climate-related risks and opportunities:
Changes in customer preferences, such as demands for more sustainable clothing, is both a risk and opportunity for Ted Baker. In the medium-to
longer-term it is a risk if our sustainability performance is not seen to live up to our customers’ aspirations, and an opportunity, if our sustainability
performance is seen to lead our peers. Our sustainability strategy is discussed on pages 52-59.
RISK MANAGEMENT
Describe how processes for identifying, assessing and managing climate-related risks are integrated into the organisation’s
overall risk management.
Risks, including climate-related risks, are monitored and managed by the Ethics and Sustainability team at Ted Baker plc.
Our Ethics and Sustainability lead represents the climate-related risks in the quarterly Management Risk Committee.
METRICS
Disclose the metrics and targets used by the organisation to assess climate-related risks and opportunities in line with its
strategy and risk management process.
As noted previously, we are developing metrics against which we can monitor our climate-related risks, to complement our current carbon metrics.
Wecurrently measure Scope 1 and 2 carbon emissions and have undertaken a project to understand our baseline Scope 3 emissions (see page 53).
In the carbon area, we have set the following targets:
ɣ Absolute emission reduction of 100% by 2030 for Scope 1 and 2 against a 2019 baseline
ɣ Reduce absolute Scope 3 emissions in line with 1.5 degrees Celsius of 46.2% by 2030 against a 2019 baseline.
Disclose Scope 1, Scope 2 and, if appropriate, Scope 3 greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions and the related risks.
See page 54 for our GHG emissions. As demonstrated, our largest risk is embedded within our Scope 3, particularly within textiles, which makes up 41%
of all emissions. We are actively mapping through our garment supply chain, and have developed a strategy, working with our suppliers, to reduce the
risk in this area of our supply chain.
Written, designed and produced
byFalconWindsor.
falconwindsor.com
Company information
Registered Office
The Ugly Brown Building, 6a St. Pancras Way, London NW1 0TB
Company Secretary
Rishi Sharma
Joint Brokers
Liberum Capital Limited, 25 Ropemaker St, London EC2Y 9LY
Panmure Gordon, One New Change, London EC4M 9AF
Auditors
BDO LLP, 55 Baker St, London W1U 7EU
Bankers
Barclays Bank Plc, 1 Churchill Place, London E14 5HP
The Royal Bank of Scotland Plc, 62-63 Threadneedle Street, LondonEC2R 8LA
HSBC Bank Plc, 8 Canada Square, Canary Wharf, London E14 5HQ
BBVA, S.A., One Canada Square, 44th Floor, Canary Wharf, London E14 5AA
Registrars
Link Asset Services, 34 Beckenham Road, Beckenham, Kent BR3 4TU
Ted Baker plc
Registered in England No: 03393836
Ted Baker’s commitment to environmental issues is
reflected in the Annual Report which as been printed
onFSC®-certified and other controlled material.
This document was printed by Pureprint Group using its
environmental print technology, with 100% of dry waste
diverted from landfill, minimising the impact ofprinting
onthe environment. The printer is a CarbonNeutral®
company. Both the printer and the paper mill are
registered to ISO 14001.
ANNUAL REPORT 2022
ATTENTION TO DETAIL